legacy.sccoe.org H… · Web viewsanta clara county office of education. hvac and roofing for...

Bid #B6-11-12HVAC and Roofing for Gateway School Santa Clara County Office of Education

SANTA CLARA COUNTY OFFICE OF EDUCATION

HVAC AND ROOFING FOR GATEWAY SCHOOLBID #B6-11-12

7151 Hanna StreetGilroy, CA 95020

Prepared By:

SANTA CLARA COUNTY OFFICE OF EDUCATION - Bid #B6-11-12Purchasing Services1290 Ridder Park DriveSan Jose, CA 95131

WESTON MILES ARCHITECTS 17500 Depot Street, #120Morgan Hill, CA 95037408.779.6686 Fax 408.778.9417

MECHANICAL/ALFATECH ENGINEER97 East Brokaw Road, Suite 300San Jose, CA 95112(408) 487-1200 (408) 436-1511 fax

May 2012

1


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROJECT SCHEDULE

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 002113 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERSSECTION 003100 - AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION: INVESTIGATION REPORTSSECTION 003113 - PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULESECTION 004100 - BID FORMSECTION 004101 - BID FORM INSTRUCTIONSSECTION 004102 - BID PACKAGE DESCRIPTIONSSECTION 004313 - BID SECURITYSECTION 005000 - NOTICE OF INTENT AND AGREEMENTSECTION 006516 - INSURANCE CERTIFICATESSECTION 007200 - GENERAL CONDITIONSSECTION 007300 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY OF WORKSECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTSECTION 012600 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURESSECTION 012613 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATIONSECTION 013113 - PROJECT COORDINATIONSECTION 013119 - PROJECT MEETINGSSECTION 013200 - CONSTRN PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION: SCHEDULES & REPORTSSECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESSECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTIONSECTION 017400 - CONSTRUCTION CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENTSECTION 017700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESSECTION 018119 - CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENTSECTION 019100 - COMMISSIONING

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETESECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMWORKSECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENTSECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITESSECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRYSECTION 061600 - ROOF FIBERBOARD SHEATHINGSECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTIONSECTION 072116 - BLANKET INSULATIONSECTION 072613 - ABOVE-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERSSECTION 075100 - BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFINGSECTION 076000 - FLASHING AND SHEET METALSECTION 079000 - SEALANTS AND CAULKING

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGSSECTION 081100 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMESSECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

2


DIVISION 09 - FINISHESSECTION 092423 - PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCOSECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARDSECTION 099100 - PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIESSECTION 101400 – SIGNAGE

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBINGSECTION 221316 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPINGSECTION 221413 – STORM DRAIN PIPING

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONINGSECTION 230000 – MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTSSECTION 230500 – BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODSSECTION 230523 – VALVESSECTION 230529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTSSECTION 230533 – MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLSSECTION 230553 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATIONSECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCINGSECTION 230700 – DUCT INSULATIONSECTION 230900 – BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (AUTO TEMP CONTROL)SECTION 231100 – FACILITY FUEL PIPINGSECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTSSECTION 233300 – DUCT ACCESSORIESSECTION 233423 – POWER VENTILATORSSECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLESSECTION 238119 – CLASSROOM HEAT PUMP UNIT

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICALSECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTSSECTION 260100 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVALSECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODSSECTION 260523 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLESSECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDINGSECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXESSECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL INDENTIFICATIONSECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICESSECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORKSECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTSSECTION 321123 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSESECTION 321313 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

END OF SECTION

3


PROJECT SCHEDULE

Notice to Bidders (Addendum #2) Issued Tuesday, May 1, 2012

Bid Documents Posted to SCCOE Website Tuesday, May 1, 2012

Pre-Bid Walk-Thru at Site Tuesday, May 8, 2012

Last day to submit Bid RFI’s Friday, May 11, 2012

Bid Opening Thursday, May 17, 2012

Board Approval Wednesday, June 6, 2012

Notice to Proceed Issued (via PO) Thursday, June 7, 2012

Construction Start Monday, June 11, 2012

Construction Complete Friday, August 3, 2012

4


SECTION 002113 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. The Bidding Documents Include:

1. Notice to Bidders

2. Investigation Reports

3. Project Manual, Specifications (Divisions 0-16)

4. Addenda

B. The Contract Documents Include:

1. The Accepted Bid

2. Addenda

3. Project Manual, Specifications (Divisions 0-16)

4. Certificate of Nondiscrimination by Seller

5. Non-collusion Affidavit

6. List of Subcontractors Form

7. Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications

1.2 PRE-BID CONFERENCE

A. The date and time of the Pre-bid Conference is found in the Notice to Bidders, at the end of Section 002113, Instructions to Bidders.

B. If a pre-bid conference has been scheduled at the site of the work, all bidders, subcontractors, material suppliers and others who may be working on the work of improvement are strongly encouraged to attend this pre-bid conference. Due to the facts and circumstances of this particular project, the pre-bid conference may be the only opportunity to conduct the pre-bid investigation of the site and satisfy the pre-bid obligations set forth in these Contract Documents. If a bidder (or others) attend the entirety of a scheduled pre-bid conference and need

5


additional time to complete their investigation of the site or other pre-bid obligations set forth in these Contract Documents, bidder must notify the County in writing, via certified or registered mail, no less than five (5) days before the scheduled bid opening date, to request additional time. The written request must include an estimate of the amount of additional time required by bidder.

1.3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

A. Bid documents can be reviewed at the SCCOE located at 1290 Ridder Park Drive, San Jose, CA 95131 or on the SCCOE Purchasing website at: http://www.sccoe.org/depts/purchasing, commencing on Tuesday, May 1, 2012.

B. Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing bids. Bidders are responsible for ascertaining that the Bidding Documents upon which their bids are based are complete sets.

C. Requests from bidders for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be directed to the construction manager in writing and received by construction manager no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to bid date or at the discretion of the construction manager. The construction manager will consult with the County who is solely responsible for clarification and interpretation. The construction manager will prepare an addendum and will forward each addendum to the all known bid document holders.

D. Should a bidder find discrepancies, ambiguities, inconsistencies, errors or omissions in the documents, or should there be any doubt as to their meaning, the bidder shall at once notify the construction manager in writing. If bidder fails to notify the construction manager in writing, the bidder will be responsible for the strictest interpretation.

E. Each bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda on the Bid Form. Failure by the bidder to acknowledge receipt of any document may result in the rejection of the bid.

F. An original of the bid form shall be filled in and submitted as the bid. All portions of the bid form must be completed before the bid is submitted. Failure to do so may result in the bid being rejected as non-responsive. Attached to and submitted with the Bid Form, bidder must provide the completed Certificate of Nondiscrimination by Seller, Non-collusion Affidavit signed by bidder, Statement of Compliance, Designation of Subcontractors form and Contractor’s Questionnaire submitted on the enclosed Bid form. Failure to submit all required documents may result in the bid being rejected as non-responsive.

G. Bidder may not withdraw the bid for a period of ninety (90) calendar days after the date for the opening of the bids.

6


H. Investigations of subsurface conditions or otherwise, are made for the purpose of design, and the County assumes no responsibility whatsoever with respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of borings, the log of test borings, or other preliminary investigations, or of the interpretation thereof, and there is no guaranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the work, or any part of it, or that unanticipated conditions may not occur. When a log of test borings or other report is made available to Contractor or included in the Contract Documents, it is expressly understood and agreed that said log of test borings or other reports does not constitute a part of the Contract, and represents only an opinion of the County as to the character of the materials to be encountered, and is made available or included in the Contract Documents only for the convenience of the bidders. Bidders must satisfy themselves, through their own investigation, as to conditions to be encountered.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. For information regarding the Preliminary Construction Schedule, refer to Section 003113, Preliminary Construction Schedule.

1.5 BID OPENING AND CONTRACT AWARDS

A. Bids will be opened publicly and read aloud at the time and date established in the Notice to Bidders.

B. Contracts shall be awarded on the basis of the lowest responsive and responsible bid determined by the base bid plus the sum of all of the alternates. The County reserves the right to prepare a contract based on any combination of base bid and alternates. The County intends to award contracts to the bidders who submit bids in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. All awards will be made in the County’s best interest, to the extent authorized by law.

C. Bid protests shall be filed in writing with the Santa Clara County Office of Education, 1290 Ridder Park Drive, San Jose, California, 95131-2398, Purchasing Department, Attention: Andy Bursch by certified or registered mail, not later than three (3) working days after the bid opening or, if the protest is based on the selection of the apparent lowest responsible bidder, not later than three (3) working days after selection of the apparent lowest responsible bidder. The protest shall specify the reasons and facts upon which the protest is based.

D. The County reserves the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid.

E. The County reserves the right to reject any and all bids.

7


1.6 POST-BID INTERVIEWS

A. Bidders in contention for contract awards may be asked to attend post-bid interviews and submit post-bid documents in rough draft for review.

1.7 POST BID DOCUMENTS

A. The County may elect to issue a Notice of Intent to Award prior to the execution of County/Contractor Agreements.

B. Within five (5) days of receipt of Notice of Intent to Award, contractor is to provide the following:

1. Certificates of Insurance, refer to Section 006516, Insurance Certificates.

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Preliminary Construction Schedule, refer to Section 003113, Preliminary Construction Schedule.

C. After receipt of the above post bid documents, the Santa Clara County Office of Education will issue a Purchase Order (PO), which is to serve as the contract agreement and Notice to Proceed.

D. Within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Notice of Intent to Award, contractor is to provide the following:

1. Samples and submittals, refer to Section 013300, Submittal Procedures.

1.8 WAGES

A. The schedule of prevailing rates of pay for each craft or type of workman needed to execute the work shall contain the minimum rate of pay, as established by the State Director of Industrial Relations in pursuance of the provision of the Labor Code of the State of California.

B. All bidders shall check the available source of labor supply and obtain information with reference to the length of the working day of various crafts and actual rates of wages being paid in the immediate vicinity of the place where work contemplated by these Documents is to be performed, particularly with reference to rates of pay that may be in excess of those general prevailing rates established by the County.

1.9 CONTRACTORS’ LICENSE

A. Bidders must be contractors, properly licensed to perform the work of this project with an active license in good standing as of the date of receipt of bids.

8


License must be maintained in good standing throughout the term of the contract.

1.10 SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING

A. Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 4100 to 4114, inclusive of the California Public Contracts Code, every bidder shall in this bid set forth:1. The name and location of the place of business of each subcontractor.

2. The portion of the work that will be done by each subcontractor. If the bidder fails to specify a subcontractor for any portion of the work to be performed under the contract in excess of one half (1/2) of one percent (1%) of the bidder’s total bid, he agrees to perform that portion himself. The successful bidder shall not, without the written consent of the County, either:

a. Substitute any person as subcontractor in place of the subcontractor designated in the original bid.

b. Permit any subcontract to be assigned or transferred or allow it to be performed by anyone other than the original subcontractor listed in the bid.

c. Sublet or subcontract any portion of the work in excess of one half (1/2) of one percent (1%) of the total bid as to which his original bid did not designate a subcontractor.

2.0 FORMS FOR BIDDING

2.1 BID FORM - Refer to Section 004100, Bid Form.

3.0 PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS FOR BIDDING

3.1 BIDDERS’ REPRESENTATIONS & ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

A. In submitting a bid, each bidder represents that:1. The bidder has read and understands the bidding documents.

2. The bid is made in accordance with the bidding documents.

3. The bidder has visited the Project site and is familiar with the local conditions under which the Work will be performed and acknowledges that failure to visit the site will not relieve the bidder of the responsibility for observing and considering those conditions which a reasonable contractor would have observed and considered during a site visit, estimating properly the difficulty and the work without additional cost to the County.

9


NOTICE TO BIDDERS

FORHVAC AND ROOFING WORK

ATGATEWAY SCHOOL


NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the Santa Clara County Office of Education, herein after referred to as the OWNER or SCCOE, calls for sealed bids to be received by the Purchasing Manager in the Purchasing Department at 1290 Ridder Park Drive, San Jose, California 95131 by Thursday , May 17th 2012 @ 3:00 p.m. at which time and place bids will be opened.

SCOPESanta Clara County Office of Education’s Special Education Program requires building improvements at their Gateway School located at 7151 Hanna Street, Gilroy, CA 95020. Work shall include the demolition of existing roof mechanical well and HVAC units on roof as well as the construction of two new mechanical rooms and 4 new HVAC units which will service 4 existing classrooms. Construction will also include remodel of existing roof by continuing slope to where mechanical well was located, roof extension over new mechanical rooms and new roof material.

Interested parties shall be licensed to provide and oversee all trades work required for this project. We have contracted with The Weston/Miles architectural firm to prepare the specifications and drawings for this project. Note: The general contractor will be responsible for overseeing and coordinating all work described in this bid.

All detailed specifications and drawings may be found on WMA’s website: https://wmarchitects.sharefile.com/d/s0c37fe5ac6942e4b Bid documents will also be posted on the SCCOE’s website at: http://www.sccoe.org/depts/purchasing/bidspostingsys.asp

BID CONTACTS Bidding & Admin. - COE Purchasing Manager, A. D. Bursch @408.453.6858 or

COE Purchasing Technician, Kelly Brewer @408.453.6855Project Management - COE Facilities Manager, Joe Beretta @408.453.6861Architect - Sharon Morris of Weston Miles @408.779.6686

JOB WALK There will be a job walk on Tuesday May 8 th , 2012 @, at 3:00 PM for the purpose of examining the site conditions at the job site located at 7151 Hanna St, Gilroy, CA 95020. Additional bid packages will be made available at this time. It is strongly recommended that all interested parties attend this walk thru.

ADDITIONAL BONDS The successful contractor, simultaneously with the execution of the agreement, shall furnish a payment bond in the amount of 100% of the contract price and a faithful performance bond in the amount of 100% of the contract price. Bonds shall be secured from a surety company issued by corporation duly and legally licensed to transact business in the State of California and approved by the Owner. The check or bid bond shall be given as a guarantee that the contractor, upon award, shall execute the contract, in conformity with the contract documents and shall provide the surety bond or bonds as specified therein within five (5) working days after notification of award of the contract to the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

10

https://wmarchitects.sharefile.com/d/s0c37fe5ac6942e4b


SECTION 003100 – AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION: INVESTIGATION REPORTS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

A. The following reports are available to bidders for information: N/A

1.2 USE OF INFORMATION

A. All of these documents made available by the County are for information only and are not part of the Contract Documents, nor a warranty of subsurface conditions.

B. Bidders may review these documents at a location to be announced at the pre-bid conference. Bidders may purchase a copy at cost of reproduction.

C. The data contained in the above items have been utilized in the preparation of construction documents. The contractor may rely on the accuracy of the technical data contained in the report, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein, or for the completeness thereof for the contractor’s purposes.

D. Except as indicated in the preceding paragraph, contractor shall have full responsibility with respect to subsurface conditions at the site.

END OF SECTION

11


SECTION 003113 - PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The preliminary construction schedule indicates planned substantial completion dates for significant activities during the construction period. Substantial completion of an activity is considered to be attained when the work of subsequent activities can proceed in accordance with the Project Construction Schedule.

B. The contractor will be required to prepare a construction schedule in accordance with Section 013200, Progress Schedules and Reports. During the construction period the contractor is required to regularly provide information and input on scheduling and coordination of his work.

C. The contractor is required to submit a detailed schedule for the activities within his scope of work within five (5) working days of receipt of a Notice to Proceed from the County. Refer to Section 013200, Progress Schedules and Reports.

D. The project is to be performed in a single phase

1. Start date is to be within five days from receipt of Purchase Order, with completion of work by upon 90 calendar days after the evacuation of Gateway School.

1.2 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. In the event of failure on the part of the Contractor to complete it’s work within the time schedule, including any approved extensions thereof, the Contractor shall pay the County Liquidated Damages in the amount of $250 for each calendar day past the specified time that is required to Substantially Complete the work.

END OF SECTION

12


SECTION 004100 – BID FORMBID FOR: Gateway HVAC & Roofing

TO: Purchasing DepartmentSanta Clara County Office of Education1290 Ridder Park DriveSan Jose, CA 95131-2398

DATE SUBMITTED:

SUBMITTED BY: _______________________________________________________Name of Bidder

Address:

Phone #: Fax #:

The undersigned has carefully examined the site, the proposed contract documents consisting of Project Manual and all addenda prepared by Weston Miles Architects Inc. and issued by the SCCOE pertinent to the construction of the above referenced Project and further, being familiar with all other conditions affecting the work, the undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to provide all labor, materials, supervision, transportation, tools, equipment, services and other facilities necessary and required for the expeditious completion of the work included in the bid indicated above, in strict conformity with said conditions and contract documents.

The undersigned has reviewed the work outlined in the bid, fully understands the scope of work required in this bid, acknowledges that the bid includes the work of all trades within the bid documents, understands that each bidder who is awarded a contract shall be in fact a prime contractor, not a subcontractor, to the Santa Clara County Office of Education, and agrees that the bid, if accepted by the County, will be the basis for a contract with the County to enter into such a contract in accordance with the intent of the contract documents.

The undersigned agrees to complete the work required within the bid package, within the time indicated in contract documents as specified in Section 003113, Preliminary Construction Schedule.

The undersigned has notified the construction manager of any discrepancies or omissions, or of any doubt about the meaning of any of the contract documents, and has contacted the construction manager before bid date to verify the issuing of any clarifying addenda.

13


The undersigned further acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:

No. Date:

No. Date:

No. Date:

No. Date: (Include all addenda received)

BIDDER NAME:

BASE BID:

The undersigned proposes to provide and construct the work required for the above listed bid number, including all allowances listed in the bid package description identified in the Project Manual, in accordance with said contract documents for the lump sum price of:

1. Bid Package A - General Construction for Gateway School HVAC & Roofing

Dollars

($ ). INCLUDES ALL TAXES. (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)

AGREEMENT:

It is understood and agreed that if written notice of the County’s acceptance of this proposal is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned after the opening of the bid, and within ninety (90) days, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will execute and deliver to the County a contract in accordance with the bid as accepted, and will also furnish and deliver to the County the Certificate of Insurance as specified, all within five (5) working days after receipt of notification of intent to award, and that the work under the contract shall be commenced by the undersigned bidder, if awarded the contract, on the date indicated in Section 003113, Preliminary Construction Schedule, and shall be completed by the contractor in the time specified in the contract documents.

Enclosed herewith is a listing of subcontractors and major material suppliers in accordance with Section 4100 to 4114 of the California Public Contracts Code and the Instructions to Bidders.The undersigned acknowledges the fact that the County reserves the right to accept or reject any and all bids, to waive any irregularity or informality in receipt of this bid, with or without cause or reason, and award the contract on the basis stated in the Instructions to Bidders.

14


COUNTY POLICIES

Smoke Free Environment Policy

As per Education Code 48901 and Health and Safety Code 39002, the Santa Clara County Office of Education is a Tobacco Free Environment. Smoking and the use of tobacco products by all persons shall be prohibited on or in county school property. County property includes: school buildings, school grounds, school owned vehicles and vehicles owned by others while on County property.

Equal Opportunity Statement

Santa Clara County Office of Education has an Affirmative Action Employment Program and requires any organization or business we contract or trade with to adhere to the same policies.

is an EEO/AA Employer and adheres to the policies.(Bidder Company Name)

BIDDER NAME:

CERTIFICATE OF NONDISCRIMINATION BY SELLER

As a supplier of goods or services to the Santa Clara County Office of Education, the firm listed below certifies that it does not discriminate in its employment with regard to race, religion, creed, sex, national origin, or handicap; that it is in compliance with all Federal, State, and local directives and executive orders regarding nondiscrimination in employment; and that it agrees to demonstrate positively and aggressively the principal of equal opportunity in employment.

We agree specifically:

1. To establish or observe employment policies which affirmatively promote opportunities for minority persons at all job levels.

2. To communicate this policy to all persons concerned, including all company employees, outside recruiting services (especially those serving minority communities), and the minority communities at large.

3. To take affirmative steps to hire minority employees within the company.

FIRM NAME: TITLE OF OFFICER SIGNING: SIGNATURE: DATE:

BIDDER NAME:

15


NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

The contractor and/or the subcontractors, as applicable, shall comply with the California Public Code Section 7106, which is worded as follows:

“Any public works contract of a public entity shall include an affidavit, in the following form:

State of California )) ss.

County of Santa Clara )

, being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is(Name) of (Title) (Contractor)

(DBA)the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her Bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, to effectuate a collusive sham bid.”

The undersigned certifies under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct;

Signature

BIDDER NAME:

16


LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

PROJECT: Gateway HVAC & Roofing

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 4100 to 4114 inclusive, of the California Public Contracts Code, and as set forth in Instructions to Bidders, and the General Conditions, the above named contractor hereby designates below the names and locations of the place of business of each subcontractor. District may request subcontractor license number.

SUBCONTRACTOR LOCATION OF BUSINESS WORK/TRADE

If no subcontractors are to be used please indicate on the top line of this form

BIDDER NAME:

17


STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS

All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The bidder may submit any additional information.

1. When organized?

2. If Corporation, where incorporated?

3. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name?______________________________________________

4. Have you eve defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why?

5. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why?

How was it resolved?

6. List the projects currently under contract including the contract value, the scheduled completion date, contact person and phone number.

CONTRACT COMPLETION NAME VALUE DATE CONTACT & PHONE

Attach additional pages if needed.

18


BIDDER NAME:

7. List experience in school construction work similar to this project. Provide a contact name and phone number.

PROJECT CONTACT & PHONE NUMBER

8. Do you currently have any legal action pending? If yes, please explain:

The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any credit history and financial condition or other information required by the District in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications. I hereby certify that the above information is true and correct to the best of my knowledge and that the District may rely on the information provided.

THIS STATEMENT MUST BE NOTARIZED.Attach the “California All Purpose Acknowledgement” duly notarized.

NAME OF CONTRACTOR:

BY: Signature Title

Type/Print Name Date

Signature Title

Type/Print Name Date

19


BIDDER NAME:

Bidder is a: (circle one)Corporation Partnership Individual Joint Venture Other ____

(Specify)NAMES AND TITLES OF KEY MEMBERS OF FIRM:(Name of person signing the bid on behalf of the bidder and all general partners, if a partnership, must be included.)

NAME OF PRESIDENT IF A CORPORATION:

NAME OF SECRETARY IF A CORPORATION:

CALIFORNIA CONTRACTORS LICENSE(S):

Name of License(s):

Classification(s) Number Expiration Date

(For Joint Ventures, list Joint Venture's license or licenses for all Joint Venture partners.)

The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this bid:

1. Bid security in the form of (fill in type of bid security)

Corporation is organized under the laws of the State of

Corporate Seal:

20


Name of bidder's firm:

Address:

By: __________________________________________________(Signature)__________________________________________________(Print or Type Name)

By: __________________________________________________(Signature)__________________________________________________(Print or Type Name)__________________________________________________(Print or Type Title)

(If signature is by other than the sole proprietor, general partner, or corporate officers, attach an original Power of Attorney.)

END OF SECTION

21


SECTION 004101 – BID FORM INSTRUCTIONS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 BID FORMS

A. Bidders are required to use the Bid Form provided in Section 004100, Bid Form. Additional proposal forms may be obtained from the construction manager.

2.0 FORMAT

2.1 BID FORMAT

A. A responsive bid consists of all the following:

1. Completion of all pages of the Bid Form (Section 004100)

B. Bids shall be submitted in a sealed bid envelope. On the face of the envelope clearly write or type “BID PROPOSAL FOR GATEWAY HVAC & ROOFING #B6-11-12 – DO NOT OPEN.

C. All spaces provided on the Bid Form shall be filled in. If any space provided is

not utilized by the bidder, that space shall be filled in with the notation “N/A” (Not Applicable).

D. The Bid Form shall be type written or manually printed in ink.

E. Where indicated, all amounts shall be expressed in words and in figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall govern.

F. Bidders shall not make unsolicited notations or statements on the Bid Form. Alteration of the Bid Form is not permitted, and may result in the bid being considered non-responsive.

G. All changes to and erasures of the bidder’s entries shall be initialed by the signer of the bid.

H. Each bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement regarding whether the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or other type of legal entity. Bids submitted by corporations shall have the state of incorporation noted. Any bid submitted by an agent shall have a current Power of Attorney attached, certifying the agent’s power to bind the bidder.

22


3.0 COMPLETION OF BID FORMS

3.1 BID FORM (Section 004100)

A. Submit only one Bid Form.

B. Fill in the numbers and dates on all Addenda received and considered in the bid. Bids must include acknowledgement of all addenda issued prior to the bid date.

C. Fill out and sign the Certificate of Nondiscrimination by Seller

D. Fill out and sign the Non-Collusion Affidavit.

E. Fill in List of Subcontractors; if there will not be any subcontractors, state that on the top line and sign the form.

F. Type or print the signer’s name and title in the spaces provided below the signature.

G. Date the Bid Form in the spaces provided.

H. Place the bidder’s name on each sheet in the space provided.

I. Attach the “California All Purpose Acknowledgement” notarized document to the bid.

J. List contractor’s license number and expiration date. Sign and date the bid document in the space provided on page eleven (9). The signature is binding for all items within the bid except where additional signature is needed.

3.2 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

A. Bids shall be submitted to the County in writing, at the location stated in Section 002113, Instructions to Bidders. Telephone and faxed proposals will not be accepted.

B. Bids shall be submitted by the time and date stated in Section 002113, Instructions to Bidders.

C. Bidders shall bear full responsibility for delivering bids to the location for receipt of bids by the time and date for receipt of bids.

D. No telephones will be provided by the County for use by bidders when preparing their bid.

23


3.3 MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

A. A bid may not be withdrawn by the bidder following the time and date designated for the receipt of bids, except in accordance with Sections 5100 – 5108 of the Public Contract Code.

B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, bids may be modified or withdrawn. Modifications and withdrawals shall be in writing. Telephone or fax modifications will not be accepted.

C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time and date designated for receipt of bids.

END OF SECTION

24


SECTION 004102 – BID PACKAGE DESCRIPTIONS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. This Section includes Bid Package Descriptions

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 of these Contract Documents.

B. Section 011000, Summary of Work

1.3 BID PACKAGE DESCRIPTIONS

A. Bid Package titles

Package A: General Construction

B. For the purpose of clarity, the scope of work for each Bid Package has been divided into three categories: "INCLUDED", "ALSO INCLUDED", and "EX CLUDED".

1. Items listed under "INCLUDED" are the standard and/or "conventional" work scope of each Bid Package.

2. Information provided under "ALSO INCLUDED" points out some items which may be considered less obvious or "unconventional," but which are included in the work scope of each Bid Package. (Information under this heading is not always necessary to delineate a Bid Package.)

3. Information provided under "EXCLUDED" is for the purpose of indicating beginning and termination points, and/or to provide an understanding of fringe involvement included in Bid Packages. (Information under this heading is not always necessary to delineate a Bid Package.)

C. Bid Packages are the categories of work into which the project will be divided for bidding and construction.

1. Bid Package Descriptions are written descriptions of the Scope of Work included in each of the bid packages.

2. Bid Package Descriptions have been written to clearly define each bid package. Contractors are encouraged to request information or

25


clarification by calling the construction manager. The County will not be responsible for a contractor’s incorrect interpretation of the bid packages.

3. Each contractor shall become familiar with the work scopes of all other bid packages that interface with the bid package of which a bid is being submitted. Each contractor shall consider that the work of contractor’s bid package(s) may follow the work of another bid package, that other contractors may perform work after the work of contractor’s bid package(s) and that other contractors may work simultaneously with the work of contractor’s bid package(s). Each contractor shall include provisions for such sequencing and scheduling, and for cooperation and coordination with such other contractors on the project.

D. DESCRIPTIONS OF BID PACKAGES

1. Bid Package A: General Construction

a. Included, but not limited to:

1) Provide all submittals, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special services as required for all the work as called for in the Contract Documents and Specifications.

2) Provide demolition of all work shown on project plans. Include hazardous materials abatement indicated in Section 003100, Investigation Reports. Hazardous material abatement is to be performed during hours when school is not in session.

3) Provide demolition, removal, and disposal of casework to be demolished as indicated on plan.

4) Provide new casework and casework support where necessary, and installation as indicated on plan

5) Provide demolition, removal, and disposal of plumbing fixtures to be demolished as indicated on plan.

6) Provide new plumbing fixtures, carriers, piping and support where necessary and installation as indicated on plan.

7) Provide any additional rough carpentry required for the installation of the structural supports that may be required.

26


8) Provide demolition, removal, disposal of any interior walls removed as indicated per plan

9) Provide demolition, removal, disposal of any interior ceiling material to be altered due to construction of new rated or non rated ceiling, rated or non rated non bearing walls indicated per plan

10) Provide material and installation of new rated or non rated walls in the lobby area.

11) Provide material and installation of new rated or non rated doors and windows in the lobby area

12) Provide new toilet room accessories in remodeled restrooms.

13) Provide demolition, removal, disposal of any concrete slab required to be removed as indicated per plan.

14) Provide all signage as indicated per plan

15) Provide material necessary and install concrete back fill as indicated per plan.

16) Provide all finish material and installation to the additional office, observation rooms.

17) Provide material and install all finishes related to restroom and kitchen renovations.

18) Provide and material and install all door hardware as indicated on plan

19) Provide all joint sealants and caulking for this bid package’s scope of work, as shown on the plans and/or as specified.

20) Provide labor and necessary material for removal and reinstallation of doors at classroom restrooms.

21) Provide labor and material necessary to patch ceiling to match adjacent condition

22) Provide demolition, new material, installation, and

27


connection of 2 new HVAC units.

23) Provide any additional rough carpentry required for the installation of the new mechanical units that may be required, including any sleepers or supports for the new units, roof mounted ductwork, gas and condensate piping and electrical conduits.

24) Provide all structural carpentry and misc. metals required for roof mounted equipment.

25) Provide removal of all existing roofing material down to roof deck, including flashing, sheetmetal, accessories and trim.

26) Provide all joint sealants and caulking for this bid package’s scope of work, as shown on the plans and/or as specified.

27) Provide flashing, roof jacks and sheetmetal and counter-flashing as required for roof top equipment and penetrations associated with the work, to create a watertight installation as shown in plans and/or as specified.

28) Provide all sheet metal, flashing and trim, including but not limited to, all gutters and downspouts, sheet metal flashing pans, galvanized sheet metal, flashing and trim, scuppers, drips, gravel stops, counter flashing, roof accessories, and all other miscellaneous sheet metal for the project as shown on the plans and/or as specified.

29) Provide all single ply roofing, roofing specialties and accessories as shown in plans and as specified. Seal all roof jacks. Provide water testing after completion of roofing to confirm all roof penetrations are water tight. If leaks are identified, provide a detailed plan showing where leaks occurred. Repair all damage caused by leaks at no additional cost to the County.

30) Provide all Mechanical work as shown in the plans and specifications including, but not limited, to air handling units, roof mounted duct work, ventilators, unit ventilators, condensers, re-heat coils, air separators, pumps, expansion tanks, final connections, filters, fire dampers, duct detectors and wiring, thermostats, seismic bracing, duct insulation, curbs for HVAC equipment, flues, hot water heating piping and fittings, water treatment, as shown on the plans and/or as specified in

28


Division 22, Plumbing.

31) Provide all mechanical duct and piping supports on roof as shown on the plans and/or specifications. Install to attain watertight conditions.

32) Provide and install all mechanical ductwork related to new mechanical units.

33) Provide and install thermostat as indicated per plan.

34) Provide and install for HVAC duct detectors and test stations.

35) Provide material and labor need for any interior ductwork alteration to the existing system due to interior work

36) Provide and install ceiling access panels.

37) Provide all new electrical as shown on plans and as listed in specifications Division 26, Electrical.

38) Provide all electrical connections to new mechanical equipment.

39) Provide demolition, removal and disposal of light fixtures as indicated per plan.

40) Provide and install all light fixtures as indicated per plan

41) Provide and install all emergency light fixtures as indicated per plan

42) Provide and install all exit signs as indicated per plan

43) Provide and install new assistive listening device system

44) Provide, install and connect new fire alarm devices as indicated on plan to existing fire alarm systems.

b. Also Included, but not limited to:

1) Provide protection of all surrounding areas, including but not limited to, buildings, landscaping, pavements, walkways, curbs, curbs and gutters, driveways, noted to remain. Provide and maintain adequate barricades and safety precautions required by all applicable local and

29


state codes.

2) Provide daily clean up of all trash generated by the work under this contract.

3) Modifications to existing fence may be required in order to provide access to Contractors. Contractor is to include labor and materials required to modify existing fences and repair upon completion of work.

4) Provide and maintain portable toilet facilities for the entire duration of the project for the use of all contractors on site. A minimum of two must be provided. However, contractor is responsible to provide the appropriate quantity to accommodate the number of workers on site at any given time and as required by code at no additional cost to the County.

5) Provide as built record drawings showing original contract, addenda, RFIs, change order work and additional work, including the cost of reproducing those drawings for the County.

6) Provide daily maintenance and securing of temporary construction fencing (provided by others)

7) Hazardous Materials abatement as described in Survey and Evaluations and Plans by IHI Environmental.

c. Excluded:

1) DSA permit fees.

END OF SECTION

30


SECTION 004313 – BID SECURITY

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 BID SECURITY

A. All bids must be valid for the time specified in Section 002113, Instructions to Bidders.

B. Each bid shall be accompanied by Bid Security, pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the County in accordance with the terms stated in the bid and will furnish bonds as described in Section 006516, Insurance Certificates. The Bid Bond, Faithful Performance Bond and the Labor and Materials Payment Bond must be issued by an insurance commissioner to transact surety business in the State of California during this calendar year. Should the bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the County as damages, not as a penalty.

C. Bid security shall be in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the base bid.

D. Bid security shall be in the form of a bid bond, cashier’s check or a certified check. The County shall be listed as obligee on the bond or as payee on the check.

E. If a bid bond is submitted, the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond of behalf of the surety shall attach to the bond a certified, current copy of his power of attorney. The bid bond form supplied by the surety is adequate.

F. Bid security from all bidders will be retained a minimum of fifteen (15) days after bids have been opened. The bid security will be retained for the two lowest responsive bidders until the successful bidder executes a contract.

G. Bid security for the two lowest responsive bidders will be returned to bidders within ten (10) days after construction contracts with the successful bidder has been fully executed. If the successful bidder withdraws his bid within the period specified therein for acceptance, or upon acceptance thereof by the County, and fails to enter into the contract and provide bonds within the time specified after the forms are presented to him, he shall be liable for any difference by which the cost of securing the supplies or services exceeds the amount of bid, and the bid security shall be available toward offsetting such difference.

END OF SECTION

31


SECTION 005000 – NOTICE OF INTENT & AGREEMENT

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 NOTICE OF INTENT TO AWARD

A. The County may elect to issue a Notice of Intent to Award prior to execution of County/Contractor Agreements.

B. Upon receipt of such a Notice of Intent, the contractor shall review it for completeness and accuracy. If the Contractor has any comments regarding the content, they must notify the County in writing within two (2) working days.

C. Should a Notice of Intent to Award be issued, the Contractor shall submit all required post bid documents by the fifth (5th) working day following the date of issue of the Notice of Intent to Award. The post bid documents include:

1. Certificates of Insurance (Section 006516)

2. Schedule of Values

3. Preliminary

1.2 COUNTY/CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT

A. The Agreement between the County and each contractor will be written on the County’s standard Purchase Order Form.

B. The Purchase Order Form will be completed by the County and will be sent to the selected contractor.

C. The Purchase Order, along with all other bidding documents as defined in Section 002113, Instructions to Bidders will be the entire, integrated contract between the County and each contractor.

D. Upon receipt of a Purchase Order, the successful bidder shall review it for completeness and accuracy.

E. The County will execute the Purchase Order after all required post bid documents have been submitted.

F. The Purchase Order will serve as the Contractor’s Notice to Proceed.

END OF SECTION

32


SECTION 006516 – INSURANCE CERTIFICATES

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 INSURANCE CERTIFICATES

A. Each contractor shall provide insurance certificates to the construction manager for delivery to the County indicating that all required insurance coverage is in force prior to beginning work on the project.

B. Use a standard Insurance Certificate Form such as the “Accord” form available from your insurance agent. Also include the County, the construction manager, and their agents, representatives and employees to be added to the original certificate as additional named insureds.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

A. The contractor shall purchase and maintain liability insurance to protect the County, the construction manager, and their agents, representatives and employees from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the contractor’s operations under the contract whether such operations be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. The insurance required shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the contractor’s obligations. The following claims shall be covered.

1. Claims under worker’s compensation, disability benefit and similar employee benefits acts (with worker’s compensation and employer’s liability insurance in an amount not less than those necessary to meet the statutory requirements of the state(s) having jurisdiction over an portion of the work);

2. Claims for damages because of public liability bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of this contractor’s employees, not less than three million dollars ($3,000,000);

a. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees arising out of any one occurrence;

b. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the contractor, or (2) by any other person;

33


3. Claims for damage, other than to the work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom in the amount of not less than three million dollars ($3,000,000) against any liability arising directly or indirectly out of any activity, performance, or operation under the contract;

4. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership maintenance or use of any motor vehicle, owned, hired and non-owned with minimum limits of liability, per occurrence, of three million dollars ($3,000,000) for bodily injury and property damage.

B. All policies shall contain a provision requiring thirty (30) days written notice to be given to the County prior to cancellation, modification, or reduction of limits. The standard cancellation clause on the certificate shall be changed from:

“Should any of the above described policies be canceled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing company will endeavor to mail 30 days written notice to the certificate holder named to the left but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon the company, its agent or representative.”

to:

“Should any of the above described policies be canceled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing company will mail 30 days written notice to the certificate holder named.”

C. The insurance required shall be primary and non-contributory to any insurance possessed or procured by the County and limits of liability shall be not less than those set forth.

D. Certificates of insurance acceptable to the County shall be filed with the County prior to commencement of work.

1.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE

A. The County will provide property insurance in accordance with the general conditions of the contract documents. The contractor shall be responsible for and pay all costs of the deductible up to a maximum of $10,000 for each claim.

B. The County will provide an endorsement listing the construction manager and the architect as additional insureds under all such policies of insurance.

END OF SECTION

34


SECTION 007200 – GENERAL CONDITIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSSANTA CLARA COUNTY OFFICE OF EDUCATION

Article 1. NOT USED.Article 2. LAWS CONCERNING THE COUNTY A PART HEREOF 3Article 3. SITE INVESTIGATION 3Article 4. STATUS OF CONTRACTOR 3Article 5. CHANGE IN NAME AND NATURE OF CONTRACTOR'S LEGAL ENTITY

39Article 6. CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISION 39Article 7. SUBCONTRACTORS 4Article 8. PROHIBITED INTERESTS 5Article 9. COUNTY'S INSPECTOR 5Article 10. NOT USED.Article 11. NOT USED.Article 12. NO ORAL AGREEMENTS 6Article 13. ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST ACTIONS 6Article 14. OTHER CONTRACTS 6Article 15. OCCUPANCY 42Article 16. COUNTY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK 7Article 17. COUNTY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE OR SUSPEND CONTRACT 7Article 18. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT 9Article 19. NOT USED.Article 20. NOT USED.Article 21. FIRE INSURANCE 9Article 22. PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE 9Article 23. WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE 10Article 24. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE 10Article 25. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 10Article 26. OWNERSHIP OF PLANS 12Article 27. DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS 12Article 28. NOT USED.Article 29. LAYOUT AND FIELD ENGINEERING 13Article 30. SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT 13Article 31. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13Article 32. NOT USED.Article 33. VERIFICATION OF TEST REPORTS 14Article 34. TRENCHES 14Article 35. DOCUMENTS ON WORK 15Article 36. STATE AUDIT 15Article 37. NOT USED.Article 38. NOT USED.Article 39. NOT USED.

35


Article 40. MATERIALS AND WORK 15Article 41. INTEGRATION OF WORK 17Article 42. OBTAINING OF PERMITS, LICENSES AND EASEMENTS 17Article 43. SURVEYS 17Article 44. EXISTING UTILITY LINES; REMOVAL, RESTORATION 17Article 45. WORK TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS

18Article 46. ACCESS TO WORK 18Article 47. PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR 18Article 48. LIENS 19Article 49. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR 19Article 50. NOT USED.Article 51. UTILITIES 19Article 52. SANITARY FACILITIES 19Article 53. CLEANING UP 20Article 54. PATENTS, ROYALTIES, INDEMNITIES, AND TAXES 20Article 55. GUARANTEE 20Article 56. DUTY TO PROVIDE FIT WORKERS 21Article 57. WAGE RATES, TRAVEL AND SUBSISTENCE 21Article 58. HOURS OF WORK 22Article 59. PAYROLL RECORDS 23Article 60. APPRENTICES 24Article 61. LABOR FIRST AID 25Article 62. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 25Article 63. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION EMPLOYMENT PROGRAM 27Article 64. SCHEDULE OF VALUES 27Article 65. CONTRACTOR CLAIMS 28Article 66. NOT USED.Article 67. PAYMENTS 31Article 68. CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK 32Article 69. COMPLETION 33Article 70. ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT PRICE 34Article 71. CORRECTION OF WORK 34Article 72. EXTENSIONS OF TIME AND DELAY DAMAGES 35Article 73. PAYMENTS WITHHELD 35Article 74. EXCISE TAXES 37Article 75. TAXES 37Article 76. NO ASSIGNMENT 37Article 77. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF 37Article 78. NO WAIVER 38Article 79. SEVERABILITY 38Article 80. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 38Article 81. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS) 38Article 82. CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT 38Article 83. TIMELY PROGRESS PAYMENTS & INTEREST 39

36


GENERAL CONDITIONS


Article 1. NOT USED

Article 2. LAWS CONCERNING THE COUNTY A PART HEREOF

Contract is subject to all provisions of the Constitution and laws of California governing, controlling, or affecting the County, or the property, funds, operations, or powers of the County, and such provisions are by this reference made a part hereof.

Article 3. SITE INVESTIGATION

Before bidding on this Work, Contractor shall make a careful investigation of the site and thoroughly familiarize itself with the requirements of Contract. By the act of submitting a bid for the Work included in this Contract, Contractor shall be deemed to have made such study and investigation and represents that it is familiar with and accepts the existing conditions of the site. If required, Contractor will submit with its bid a Site Visit Certification, evidencing its investigation of the site.

Article 4. STATUS OF CONTRACTOR

(a) Contractor and subcontractors are, and shall at all times be deemed to be, independent contractors and shall be wholly responsible for the manner in which they perform the services required of them by the terms of this Contract. Nothing herein contained shall be construed as creating the relationship of employer and employee, principal and agent, or joint ventures between the County or any of the County’s employees or agents, on the one hand, and Contractor or any of Contractor’s agents, employees, or subcontractors, on the other hand. Contractor assumes exclusively the responsibility for the acts of its agents, employees, and subcontractors as they relate to the services to be provided during the course and scope of their work. Contractor, its agents, employees and subcontractors shall not be entitled to any rights or privileges of the County employees. The County shall be permitted to monitor the activities of Contractor to determine compliance with the terms of this Contract.

(b) Contractor and subcontractors are required by law to be licensed and regulated by the Contractor's State License Board. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the Registrar, Contractors' State License Board, 3132 Bradshaw Road, Post Office Box 2600, Sacramento, California, 95826.

(c) The Contractor shall be responsible to the County for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, representatives and agents and those of the subcontractor, its employees, representatives and agents, and all other persons performing any portion of the Work under a

37


contract or at the request of Contractor. The Contractor shall not be relieved of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents because of activities or duties performed by the Construction Manager, if there is one, Architect, Inspector, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than Contractor.

Article 5. CHANGE IN NAME AND NATURE OF CONTRACTOR'S LEGAL ENTITY

Before Contractor makes any change in the name or legal nature of the Contractor’s entity, Contractor shall first notify the County directly, or through the Construction Manager, if there is one, and cooperate with the County in making such changes as in this Contract the County may request.

Article 6. CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISION

(a) During progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep on the premises (including both the site and the plant) a competent construction superintendent who is an employee of the Contractor, and is satisfactory to the County, as indicated directly, or through the Construction Manager, if there is one. Before commencing the Work herein, Contractor shall give written notice directly to the County, or through the Construction Manager, if there is one, of the name of such superintendent. The Contractor’s construction superintendent shall not be changed except with prior written notice to the County or Construction Manager, if there is one, unless the Contractor’s construction superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to Contractor, the County, or any of the County’s employees or agents, in which case, Contractor shall notify the County directly, or through the Construction Manager, if there is one, in writing. The Contractor’s construction superintendent shall represent Contractor, and all directions given to Contractor’s construction superintendent shall be binding on the Contractor.

(b) Contractor shall give efficient supervision to Work, using its best skill and attention. Contractor shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other instructions and shall at once report to the County, directly, or through the Construction Manager, if there is one, any error, inconsistency or omission that Contractor, its employees or subcontractors may discover, in writing with a copy to the County’s inspector. The Contractor’s construction superintendent shall have sole responsibility for discovery of errors, inconsistencies or omissions.

Article 7. SUBCONTRACTORS

(a) Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor by terms of Contract as far as such terms are applicable to subcontractor's work. If Contractor shall subcontract any part of this Contract, Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the County for acts and omissions of any subcontractor and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by any subcontractor, as it is for acts and omissions of persons directly employed by Contractor. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the County, nor shall this Contract be construed to be for the benefit of any subcontractor. The Divisions or

38


Sections of the Contract Documents (Specifications) are not intended to control the Contractor in dividing the work among subcontractors or limit the work performed by any trade.

(b) The County’s consent to, or approval of, any subcontractor under this Contract shall not in any way relieve Contractor of any obligations under this Contract and no such consent shall be deemed to waive any provisions of this Contract.(c) Pursuant to Section 4104 of the Public Contract Code, Contractor must submit a List of Subcontractors with its bid. If Contractor specifies more than one subcontractor for the same portion of work or fails to specify a subcontractor, and such portion of the Work exceeds one-half of one percent (1/2 of 1%) of the total bid, Contractor agrees that it is fully qualified and licensed to perform and shall perform such work itself, unless Contractor provides for substitution or addition of subcontractors. Substitution or addition of subcontractors shall be permitted only as authorized in Chapter 2 (commencing at Section 4100), Division 5, Title 1 of the Public Contract Code.

(d) The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the trades, subcontractors and materialmen engaged upon the Work.

(e) The County will not undertake to settle any differences between the Contractor and its subcontractors or between subcontractors.

(f) In accordance with Sections 4107 and 4107.5 of the Public Contract Code, the Contractor shall not without consent in writing of the County: (1) substitute any person as a subcontractor in place of the subcontractor designated in the original bid; (2) permit any such subcontractor to be assigned or transferred, or allow any portion of the Work to be performed by anyone other that the original subcontractor listed in the bid; or (3) sublet or subcontract any portion of the Work in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2 of 1%) of the Contractor’s total bid as to which its original bid did not designate a subcontractor.

Article 8. PROHIBITED INTERESTS

No official of the County that is authorized on behalf of the County to negotiate, make, accept, or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting or approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with construction of Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested financially in this Contract or in any part thereof. No officer, employee, attorney, or inspector for the County who is authorized on behalf of the County to exercise any executive, supervisory or other similar function in connection with construction of Project shall become directly or indirectly interested financially in this Contract or in any part thereof. Contractor shall receive no compensation and shall repay the County for any compensation received by Contractor hereunder, if Contractor aids, abets or knowingly participates in the violation of this Article.

Article 9. COUNTY’S INSPECTOR

39


(a) One or more inspector(s), including special inspectors, as required, will be employed and assigned to the Work by the County, in accordance with requirements of Title 24, Part 1, of the California Code of Regulations. Duties of an inspector are specifically defined in Part 1 of Title 24.(b) No work shall be carried on except with the knowledge and under the inspection of Inspector(s). Inspector(s) shall have free access to any or all parts of Work at any time. Contractor shall furnish Inspector reasonable opportunities for obtaining such information as may be necessary to keep Inspector fully informed regarding progress and manner of work and character of materials. Inspection of Work shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract. Inspector shall be authorized to stop work whenever provisions of the Contract are not being complied with and such noncompliance is discovered. Contractor shall instruct its employees accordingly.

(c) Contractor acknowledges that Inspector has no contractual duty to Contractor, express or implied, and that Contractor is not an intended beneficiary of the Inspector’s contract with the County.

Article 10. NOT USED


Article 12. NO ORAL AGREEMENTS

No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the County, either before or after execution of Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations contained in any of the Contract Documents.

Article 13. ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST ACTIONS

(a) Section 4553 of the Government Code, in part, states:

If an awarding body or public purchasing body receives, either through judgment or settlement, monetary recovery for a cause of action assigned under this chapter, the assignor shall be entitled to receive reimbursement for actual legal costs incurred and may, upon demand, recover from the public body any portion of the recovery, including treble damages, attributable to overcharges that were paid by the assignor but were not paid by the public body as part of the bid price, less the expenses incurred in obtaining that portion of the recovery.

(b) Section 4554 of the Government Code, in part, states:

Upon demand in writing by the assignor, the assignee shall, within one year from such demand, reassign the cause of action assigned under this part if the assignor has been or may have been injured by the violation of law for which the cause of action arose and (a) the assignee has not been injured thereby, or (b) the assignee declines to file a court action for the cause of action.

Contractor, on behalf of itself and all of its subcontractors, agrees to assign to the County all

40


rights, title, and interest in and to all such causes of action Contractor and/or its subcontractors may have hereunder. This assignment shall become effective at the time the County tenders final payment to the Contractor, and Contractor shall require assignments from all subcontractors in compliance herewith.

Article 14. OTHER CONTRACTS

(a) The County reserves the right to employ other prime contractors to perform services for the County at the same time as Contractor, and the right to let other contracts in connection with this Work. Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and execution of their work and shall properly coordinate and connect its work with that of such other contractors.

(b) If any part of Contractor’s work depends for proper execution or results upon work of any subcontractor or any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the County in writing any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution or results. Contractor will be held accountable for damages to the County for that work that it failed to inspect or should have inspected. Contractor’s failure to inspect and report shall constitute its acceptance of other contractor's work as fit and proper for reception of its work, except as to latent defects that may be discovered in the work of another contractor after the execution of Contractor’s work.

(c) To insure proper execution of its subsequent work, Contractor shall measure and inspect work already in place and shall at once report to the County in writing any discrepancy between executed work and Contract Documents.

(d) Contractor shall ascertain to its own satisfaction the scope of the Project and nature of any other contracts that have been or may be awarded by the County in prosecution of the Project to the end that Contractor may perform this Contract in light of such other contracts, if any.

(e) Nothing herein contained shall be interpreted as granting to Contractor exclusive occupancy at site of Project. Contractor shall not cause any unnecessary hindrance or delay to any other contractor working on Project. If simultaneous execution of more than one Contract for the Project is likely to cause interference with performance of some other contract or contracts, the County shall decide which contractor shall cease or suspend work temporarily and which contractor shall continue or whether work can be coordinated so that contractors may proceed simultaneously.

(f) The County shall not be responsible for any damages suffered or extra costs incurred by Contractor resulting directly or indirectly from award or performance or attempted performance of any other contract or contracts on Project, or caused by any decision or omission of the County, or Construction Manager, if there is one, respecting the order of precedence in performance of contracts.

Article 15. OCCUPANCY

41


The County reserves the right to occupy portions of the Project at any time before completion, and such occupancy shall not constitute final acceptance of any portion of the Work or preclude the assessment of liquidated damages after such occupancy. The Contractor will not be subject to performing work or repairs caused by the County’s use of the occupied areas. Condition of areas to be occupied by the County shall be mutually inspected by the County, Construction Manager (if there is one), Architect, inspector, and Contractor. Such occupancy shall not extend the Contract Time. The Contractor will be required to complete punch list items documented by the County, Inspector, and Contractor prior to final payment.

Article 16. COUNTY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK

Should the Contractor at any time during the process of construction, fail or refuse to furnish enough materials or workmen to properly execute the Work, unless prohibited from so doing through the action of the County or other authorized agents, the County, after giving five (5) working days written notice to Contractor, either directly or through the Construction Manager, if there is one, may without prejudice to any other right it may have, proceed to furnish the materials and/or workers necessary to proceed with or complete the Work and may deduct the cost thereof, together with reasonable expenses arising from such procedure, from any amounts then due or that may thereafter become due to Contractor.

Article 17. COUNTY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE OR SUSPEND CONTRACT

(a) If Contractor refuses or fails to execute the Work or any separable part thereof with such diligence as will insure its completion within the Contract Time or any extension thereof, or fails to complete said Work within such time, or if Contractor should file a petition for relief as a debtor, or should relief be ordered against Contractor as a debtor under Title 11 of the United States Code, or if Contractor should make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or should a receiver be appointed on account of its insolvency, or if it should repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials to complete the Work in the time specified, or persistently disregard laws or ordinances or instructions of the County, or if Contractor or its subcontractor should otherwise materially violate any provision of this Contract, then the County may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, serve written notice upon Contractor and its Surety of the County’s intention to terminate this Contract, such notice to contain the reasons for such intention to terminate. Unless within ten (10) calendar days after the service of such notice such condition or violation shall cease and arrangement satisfactory to the County for the correction thereof be made, this Contract shall upon the expiration of said ten (10) calendar days, cease and terminate. In such case, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until except as provided as herein.

(b) In the event of any such termination, the County shall immediately serve written notice thereof upon Surety and Contractor, and Surety shall have the right to take over and perform this Contract, provided, however, that if Surety does not give the County written notice of its intention to take over and perform this Contract within ten (10) calendar days after service upon it of said notice of termination and does not commence said performance on a timely basis acceptable to the County, the County may take over the Work and execute same to completion.

42


The County may enter a contract with another contractor, or complete the Work by any other method it may deem advisable for the account and at the expense of Contractor, and Contractor and its Surety shall be liable to the County for any cost and/or other damages incurred by the County as a result of such termination, including without limitation, attorneys’ fees, all costs necessary to repair Contractor’s work not in compliance with the Contract Documents, and all costs necessary for the completion of the Work in excess of the Contract Price. Time is of the essence in this Contract, and therefore, Contractor and its Surety shall also be liable for any delay caused by such termination, consistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents pertaining to liquidated damages. If the County takes over the Work, as hereinabove provided, the County may, without liability for so doing, take possession of, and utilize in completing the Work, such materials, appliances, plant, and other property belonging to Contractor as may be on the site of the Work, in bonded storage, or previously paid for, and necessary thereof.

(c) If the unpaid balance of Contract Price exceeds the expense of finishing the Work, including, but not limited to, compensation for additional legal, architectural, managerial, inspection and administrative services, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor and/or surety shall pay the difference to the County, in addition to any other damages provided under this Contract and/or by law.

(d) The County may, without cause, order Contractor in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the County may determine necessary. An adjustment shall be made for any actual, reasonable, and necessary increases in the cost of Contractor’s performance of the Contract caused by such suspension, delay or interruption unless: (1) that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which Contractor is responsible; or (2) that an equitable adjustment or claim is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

(e) The County may, at any time and without cause, terminate the Contract for the County’s convenience. Upon receipt of written notice from the County of such termination for convenience, Contractor shall: (1) cease operations as directed in the notice; (2) take actions necessary, and such actions that the County may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and (3) except for work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. In case of such termination for the County’s convenience under this provision, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for work performed under this Contract, and actual, reasonable and necessary costs incurred by reason of such termination.

(f) If the Contract is terminated under Paragraph (a) of this Article, and it is subsequently determined for any reason that the Contractor was not in default under the provisions thereof, the termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience of the County under Paragraph (e) of this Article, and the rights of the Contractor and the County shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof.

(g) The foregoing provisions are cumulative to, and do not limit, any other rights or remedies available to the County.

43


Article 18. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT

If through no fault of Contractor, or of anyone employed by it, (1) the Work is stopped by order of any court or governmental authority, other than the County, or (2) the County fails to issue payment to Contractor within sixty (60) calendar days after it is due, then Contractor may, upon ten (10) calendar days after service of written notice to the County, stop work or terminate the Contract. Contractor’s damages shall be limited to direct, actual, and unavoidable additional costs of labor, materials or equipment directly resulting from (2), above.



Article 21. FIRE INSURANCE

The Contractor shall be responsible for securing and maintaining fire insurance and any other appropriate insurance covering any tool, equipment, or supplies that are expected to remain its property.

Article 22. PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE

(a) Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this Contract such Comprehensive General Liability, Automobile Liability, and Public Liability Insurance as shall protect the Contractor, County, County’s officers, Construction Manager, agents, and employees from all claims for personal injury, including accidental death, to any person (including, the County, its officers, ,agents, and employees, Construction Manager’s employees and Contractor’s or subcontractor's employees), as well as from all claims for property damage arising from operations under this Contract, with minimum limits, coverage, and other terms set forth in the Special Conditions.

(b) Contractor shall require its subcontractors, if any, to procure and maintain similar Comprehensive General Liability, Automobile Liability, Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance with minimum limits, coverage, and other terms set forth in the Special Conditions, as required of Contractor.

Article 23. WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE

(a) In accordance with the provisions of Section 3700 of the California Labor Code, the Contractor and every subcontractor shall be required to secure the payment of compensation to its employees.

(b) Contractor shall provide for the duration of this Contract, Workers’ Compensation Insurance and Employer’s Liability Insurance for all of its employees engaged in work under this Contract, on or at the site of the Project, and if any of its work is subcontracted, Contractor shall require the subcontractor similarly to provide such insurance for all of the latter's employees. Any class

44


of employee or employees not covered by a subcontractor's insurance shall be covered by Contractor’s insurance. In case any class of employees engaged in work under this Contract, on or at the site of the Project, is not protected under the Workers' Compensation Statute, Contractor shall provide or shall cause a subcontractor to provide adequate insurance coverage for the protection of such employees not otherwise protected before subcontractor commences work. Contractor shall file with the County certificate of its insurance protecting Workers, and a thirty (30) day notice shall be provided to the County before the cancellation or reduction of any policy of Contractor or subcontractor.

Article 24. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE

(a) Contractor shall not commence work nor shall it allow any subcontractor to commence work under this Contract until all required insurance and certificates have been obtained and delivered in duplicate to the County, and approved by the County.

(b) Certificates and insurance policies shall include the following:

1. A clause stating the following: "This policy shall not be canceled or reduced in required limits of liability or amounts of insurance until notice has been mailed to the County and Construction Manager, if there is one, stating date of cancellation or reduction. Date of cancellation or reduction may not be less than thirty (30) calendar days after date of mailing notice."

2. Language stating in particular those insured, extent of insurance, location and operation to which insurance applies, expiration date, to whom cancellation and reduction notice will be sent, and length of notice period.

3. A clause stating that the County and Construction Manager, if there is one, are named additional insured under the policy described and that such insurance policy shall be primary to any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the County.

(c) If Contractor fails to pay premiums for coverage required by the Contract Documents to any of its insurers in a timely manner, the County reserves the right, at its sole discretion, to elect to pay all future premiums and to deduct those amounts from payments due or to become due to Contractor.

Article 25. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

(a) Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for in one provision, or illustrated in a drawing, shall be binding as if called for or illustrated by all.

(b) Materials or work described in words that have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be deemed to refer to such meanings.

(c) Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is referred to in the Contract Documents by brand name or catalogue number, it shall be understood that this is referenced for the purpose

45


of defining the performance or other salient requirements and that other products of equal capacities, quality and function shall be considered. The Contractor may recommend the substitution of a material, article, or piece equipment of equal substance and function to those referred to in the Contract Documents by reference to brand name or catalogue number, and if, in the opinion of the County, such material, article, or piece of equipment is of equal substance and function to that specified, the County may approve its substitution and use by the Contractor in accordance with Section 3400 of the Public Contract Code. The Contractor warrants that if substitutes are approved, no major changes in the function or general design of the Project will result. Incidental changes or extra component parts required to accommodate the substitute will be made by the Contractor without a change in the Contract Price or contractual completion date.

In accordance with Section 3400 of the Public Contract Code, the Contractor shall submit data to the County substantiating requests for substitution of "equal" items at least ten (10) calendar days prior to bid opening.

(d) Trade Name or Trade Term: It is not the intention of this Contract to detail the description of any materials and/or methods commonly known to the trade under "trade name" or "trade term." The mere mention or notation of such "trade name" or "trade term" shall be considered a sufficient notice to Contractor that it will be required to complete, finish and render operable the referenced work, including any and all appurtenances and incidental and accessory items to same, consistent with the best practices of all trade(s) involved.

(e) The naming of any material and/or equipment shall mean furnishing and installing of same, including all incidental and accessory items thereto and/or labor therefore, as per best practices of the trade(s) involved, unless specifically noted otherwise.

(f) Interpretations: Figured dimensions on plans shall govern, but work not dimensioned shall be the same as similar parts that are shown or specified. Large scale details shall take precedence over smaller scale drawings as to shape and details of construction. Specifications shall govern as to materials, workmanship, and installation procedures. Plans and specifications are intended to be fully cooperative and to agree. In case of conflict, the specification calling for the higher quality, material or workmanship shall prevail. If Contractor observes that plans and specifications are in conflict, however, Contractor shall promptly notify the County in writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the Article 68, entitled "Changes and Extra Work."

(g) Specifications and accompanying plans are intended to delineate and describe the Project and its component parts to such a degree as will enable skilled and competent contractors and subcontractors to intelligently bid upon the Work, and to carry said Work to a successful and complete conclusion.

(h) Plans and specifications are intended to comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of constituted authorities having jurisdiction, and where referred to in the Contract Documents, said laws, ordinances, rules and regulations shall be considered as a part of the Contract, within the limits specified. Contractor shall bear all expense of correcting work done

46


contrary to said laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, if (1) Contractor or subcontractor knew or should have known that the work as performed is contrary to said laws, ordinances, rules and/or regulations and if Contractor performed same without first consulting the County for further instructions regarding said work or (2) if Contractor or subcontractor disregarded the County’s instructions regarding said work.

(i) Questions regarding interpretation of plans and specifications shall be clarified by the County in writing. Should Contractor commence work, or any part thereof, without seeking clarification, Contractor waives any claim for extra work or damage as a result of any ambiguity, conflict or lack of information.

(j) Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, 6 copies of plans and specifications. Additional copies may be obtained at cost of reproduction.

Article 26. OWNERSHIP OF PLANS

All copies of plans, drawings, designs, specifications, and copies of other incidental architectural and engineering work, or copies of other Contract Documents furnished by the County, are and remain the property of the County. They are not to be used by Contractor in any other work and, with the exception of signed sets of Contract Documents, are to be returned to the County upon request at the completion of Work or in the event of termination. Further, the plans and specifications may be used by the County, as it may require, without any additional cost to the County.

Article 27. DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS

(a) In case of ambiguity, conflict, or lack of information, the County shall furnish additional instructions by means of drawings or otherwise, necessary for proper execution of Work. All such drawings and instructions shall be consistent with Contract Documents, true developments thereof, and reasonably inferable there from.

(b) Work shall be executed in conformity with Contract Documents, and any additional instructions pursuant to Paragraph (a), above. Contractor shall do no work without proper drawings and instructions.

(c) Should any detail be more expensive, in the opinion of Contractor, than scale drawings and specifications warrant, Contractor shall give written notice thereof to the County within five (5) calendar days of the receipt of same. In case notice is not given to the County within five (5) calendar days, it will be assumed the details are a reasonable development of the scale drawings. In case notice is given, then the claim will be considered, and if found justified, the County will either modify the drawings or issue a change order for the extra work involved.

(d) All parts of the described and shown construction shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds and Contractor is hereby advised to use all diligence to become fully involved as to the required construction and finish, and in no case to proceed with the different parts of the

47


Work without obtaining first from the County such directions and/or drawings as may be necessary for the proper performance of the Work.

(e) If it is found at any time, before or after completion of the Work, that Contractor has varied from the plans and/or specifications, in material, quality, form or finish, or in the amount or value of the materials and labor used, the County shall make a recommendation: (1) that all such improper work should be removed, remade or replaced, and all work disturbed by these changes be made good at Contractor’s expense; or (2) that the County deduct from any amount due Contractor, the sum of money equivalent to the difference in value between the work performed and that called for by the plans and specifications. The County shall determine such difference in value. The County, at its option, may pursue either course


Article 29. LAYOUT AND FIELD ENGINEERING

The Contractor shall be responsible for having ascertained pertinent local conditions such as location, accessibility and general character of the site and for having satisfied itself as to the conditions under which the Work is to be performed. No claim for allowances because of its error or negligence in acquainting itself with the conditions at the site will be recognized.

Article 30. SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT

When a soils investigation report obtained from test holes at site is available, such report shall not be a part of this Contract. Any information obtained from such report or any information given on drawings as to subsurface soil condition or to elevations of existing grades or elevations of underlying rock is approximate only, is not guaranteed, does not form a part of Contract, and Contractor may not rely thereon. Contractor is required to make visual examination of site and must make whatever tests Contractor deems appropriate to determine underground condition of soil. Contractor agrees that no claim against the County will be made by Contractor for damages and hereby waives any rights to damage in the event that during progress of Work Contractor encounters subsurface or latent conditions at site materially differing from those shown on drawings or indicated in specifications, or for unknown conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily encountered in the Work of the character provided for in Contract, except as provided in the Article 44, entitled "Existing Utility Lines; Removal, Restoration".

48


Article 31. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

(a) Tests and inspections will comply with Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations, Group 1, Article 5, Section 4-335.

(b) The County will select an independent testing laboratory to conduct the tests. Selection of the materials required to be tested shall be by the laboratory or the County’s representative and not by the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify the County’s representative a sufficient time in advance of its readiness for required observation or inspection.

(c) The Contractor shall notify the County’s representative a sufficient time in advance of the manufacture of material to be supplied under the Contract, which must by the terms of the Contract be tested in order that the County may arrange for the testing of same at the source of supply.

(d) Any material shipped by the Contractor from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection or prior to the receipt of notice from the County’s representative that such testing and inspection will not be required shall not be incorporated in the job.

(e) The County will select and pay testing laboratory costs for all tests and inspections. Costs of tests of any materials found not to be in compliance with the Contract shall be paid for by the County and reimbursed by the Contractor.

49



Article 33. VERIFICATION OF TEST REPORTS

Each testing agency shall submit to the Division of the State Architect a verified report in duplicate covering all of the tests that are required to be made by that agency during the progress of the Project. A report shall be furnished each time that work on the Project is suspended, covering the tests up to that time, and at the completion of the Project, covering all tests.

Article 34. TRENCHES

(a) In accordance with Labor Code Section 6705, if Contract Price exceeds twenty-five thousand dollars ($25,000) and involves the excavation of any trench or trenches five (5) feet or more in depth, Contractor shall, in advance of excavation, submit to the County or a registered civil or structural engineer employed by the County a detailed plan showing the design or shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions to be made for workers' protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trench or trenches. If such plan varies from the shoring system standards established by the Construction Safety Orders, the Contractor shall submit a plan prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer, but in no case shall plan be less effective than that required by the Construction Safety Orders. No excavation of such trench or trenches shall be commenced until the plan has been accepted by the County or the person to whom authority to accept has been delegated by the County.

(b) Public Contract Code Section 7104, in relevant part, provides:

Any public works contract of a local public entity which involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface shall contain a clause which provides the following:

That the contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify the public entity, in writing, of any:

(1) Material that the contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law.

(2) Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated.

(3) Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the contract.

That the public entity shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in the contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the work shall issue a change order under the procedures described in the contract.

50


That, in the event that a dispute arises between the public entity and the contractor whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, the contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the contract, but shall proceed with all work to be performed under the contract. The contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties.

Article 35. DOCUMENTS ON WORK

Contractor shall keep on the job site at all times one legible copy of all Contract Documents, including addenda and change orders, and Titles 19 and 24 of the California Code of Regulations, the latest edition of the Uniform Building Code, all approved drawings, plans, schedules and specifications, record drawings (as set forth below), MSDS sheets (as set forth under Article 81, entitled, “Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)”)and all codes and documents referred to in the specifications, and made part thereof. Said documents shall be kept in good order and available to the County, the County’s representatives, and all authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Contractor shall be acquainted with and comply with the provisions of said Titles as they relate to this Project. (See particularly the duties of Contractor, Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations, Section 4-343.) Contractor shall also be acquainted with and comply with all California Code of Regulations provisions relating to conditions on this Project, particularly Titles 8 and 17.

Article 36. STATE AUDIT

In accordance with the provisions of Government Code Section 10528, or any amendments thereto, all books, records, and files of the County, Contractor, or any subcontractor connected with the performance of this Contract involving the expenditure of state funds in excess of ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00), including, but not limited to, the administration thereof, shall be subject to the examination and audit of the Office of the Auditor General of the State of California and the County for a period of three (3) years after final payment is made under this Contract. Contractor shall preserve and cause to be preserved such books, records and files for the audit period.




Article 40. MATERIALS AND WORK

(a) Except as otherwise specifically stated in this Contract, Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, transportation, superintendence, temporary constructions of

51


every nature, and all other services and facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute and complete this Work within the specified time.

(b) Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and the best of their respective kinds and grades as noted or specified, and workmanship shall be of good quality.

(c) Materials shall be furnished in ample quantities and at such times as to insure uninterrupted progress of Work and shall be stored properly and protected as required.

(d) For all materials and equipment specified or indicated in the plans, the Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for complete assemblies and complete working systems. Incidental items not indicated in plans, nor mentioned in the specifications, that can legitimately and reasonably be inferred to belong to the Work described, or are necessary in good practice to provide a complete assembly or system, shall be furnished as though itemized within the Contract in every detail. In all instances, material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with each manufacturer's most recent published recommendations and specifications.

(e) Contractor shall, after award of Contract by the County, place orders for materials and/or equipment as specified so that delivery of same may be made without delays to the Work. Contractor shall, upon demand from the County, furnish to the County documentary evidence showing that orders have been placed.

(f) The County reserves the right, for any failure in complying with the above instructions, to place orders for such materials and/or equipment as it may deem advisable so that the Work may be completed at the date specified in the Agreement, and all expenses incidental to the procuring of said materials and/or equipment shall be paid for by Contractor.

(g) No material, supplies, or equipment for Work under this Contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by seller or supplier. Contractor warrants good title to all material, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in Work and agrees upon completion of all Work to deliver premises, together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed there on by it, to the County free from any claims, liens, or charges. Contractor further agrees that neither it nor any person, firm, or corporation furnishing any materials or labor for any work covered by the Contract shall have any right to lien upon premises or any improvement or appurtenance thereon, except that Contractor may install metering devices or other equipment of utility companies or of political subdivision, title to which is commonly retained by utility company or political subdivision. In the event of installation of any such metering device or equipment, Contractor shall advise the County as to the owner thereof.

(h) Nothing contained in this Article, however, shall defeat or impair the rights of persons furnishing materials or labor under any bond given by Contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to seek funds due the Contractor from and in the possession of the County, and this provision shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions

52


shall be given to all persons furnishing material for Work when no formal contract is entered into for such material.

(i) The title to new materials and/or equipment for the Work of this Contract and attendant liability for its protection and safety, shall remain with Contractor until incorporated in the Work of this Contract and accepted by the County; no part of said materials and/or equipment shall be removed from its place of storage except for immediate installation in the Work of this Contract; and Contractor shall keep an accurate inventory of all said materials and/or equipment in a manner satisfactory to the County or its authorized representative.

Article 41. INTEGRATION OF WORK

(a) Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, patching, and preparation of work as required to make its several parts come together properly, and fit it to receive or be received by work of other contractors showing upon, or reasonably implied by, the plans and specifications for the completed structure, and shall make good after them as the County may direct.

(b) All cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by Contractor.

(c) Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering work and shall not cut or alter work of any other contractor without the written consent of the County.

Article 42. OBTAINING OF PERMITS, LICENSES AND EASEMENTS

(a) Before the date of the commencement of the Work or before they are legally required to continue the Work without interruption, all permits, licenses, and certificates necessary for prosecution of Work shall be secured and paid for by Contractor, unless otherwise specified. The Contractor, acting in the name of the County, shall obtain and pay, only where legally required, for all licenses and permits, inspections and inspection certificates, required to be obtained of or made by any authority having jurisdiction over any part of the Work included in the Contract. All such permits, licenses, and certificates shall be delivered to the County before demand is made for the certificate of final payment. Contractor shall, and shall require subcontractors to, maintain contractor's licenses in effect as required by law.

(b) Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the County, unless otherwise specified.

Article 43. SURVEYS

Surveys to determine location of property lines and corners will be supplied by the County. Surveys to determine locations of construction, grading, and site work shall be provided by Contractor requiring the same.

Article 44. EXISTING UTILITY LINES; REMOVAL, RESTORATION

53


(a) Pursuant to Government Code Section 4215, the County assumes the responsibility for removal, relocation, and protection of utilities located on the construction site at the time of commencement of construction under this Contract with respect to any such utility facilities that are not identified in the plans and specifications. Contractor shall not be assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of the Project caused exclusively by failure of the County to provide for removal or relocation of such utility facilities. Locations of existing utilities provided by the County shall not be considered exact, but approximate within reasonable margin, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibilities to exercise reasonable care nor costs of repair due to Contractor’s failure to do so. The County shall compensate Contractor for the costs of locating and repairing damage not due to the failure of Contractor to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating utility facilities not indicated in the plans and specifications with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment actually and necessarily idle during such work.

(b) This Article shall not be construed to preclude assessment against Contractor for any other delays in completion of the Work. Nothing in this Article shall be deemed to require the County to indicate the presence of existing service lateral or appurtenances whenever the presence of such utilities on the site of the Project can be inferred from the presence of other visible facilities, such as buildings, meter junction boxes, on or adjacent to the site of the construction.

(c) If Contractor, while performing work under this Contract, discovers utility facilities not identified by the County in the Contract’s plans and specifications, Contractor shall immediately notify the County and the utility company in writing. The cost of repair for damage to above mentioned visible facilities without prior written notification to the County shall be borne by the Contractor.

Article 45. WORK TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS

Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on conduct of Work as indicated and specified, including but not limited to the appropriate statutes and Code of Regulations Sections. If Contractor observes that plans and specifications are at variance therewith, or should Contractor become aware of the development of conditions not covered by Contract Documents that will result in finished Work being at variance therewith, Contractor shall promptly notify the County in writing and any changes deemed necessary by the County shall be adjusted as provided in Contract for changes in Work. If Contractor performs any work that it knew, or through exercise of reasonable care should have known, to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules or regulations, without such notice to the County, Contractor shall bear all costs arising there from.

Where specifications or plans state that materials, processes, or procedures must be approved by the Division of the State Architect, State Fire Marshal, or other body or agency, Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying requirements of such bodies or agencies.

Article 46. ACCESS TO WORK

54


The County, its representatives, and the Division of the State Architect shall at all times have access to the Work. Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities for such access so that the County’s representatives may perform their functions.

Article 47. PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR

Contractor shall pay:

(a) For all transportation services and utilities not later than the twentieth (20th) day of the calendar month following that in which such services are rendered or provided;

(b) For all materials, tools, and other expendable equipment to the extent of ninety percent (90%) of the cost thereof, not later than the twentieth (20th) day of the calendar month following that in which such materials, tools, and equipment are delivered at site of Project and balance of cost thereof not later than the thirtieth (30th) day following completion of that part of work in/on which such materials, tools, and equipment are incorporated or used; and

(c) To each of its subcontractors, not later than the fifth day following each payment to Contractor; the respective amounts allowed Contractor on account of work performed by respective subcontractor to the extent of such subcontractor's interest therein.

Article 48. LIENS

(a) Contractor agrees that as part of each payment application it will submit to the County a complete set of Civil Code Section 3262 waivers and releases showing the payments that have been made for materials and labor used in connection with the Work. (b) If a lien or stop notice of any nature is filed against the Work and/or any the County property by an entity that has supplied material or services at the request or for Contractor, Contractor shall promptly, on demand of the County and at Contractor’s own expense, take any and all action necessary to cause any such lien or stop notice to be released or discharged immediately, or secure and file a security bond covering one hundred twenty five percent (125%) of the amount of such lien or stop notice, irrespective of whether Contractor is enforcing Contract compliance by the subcontractor.

(c) If Contractor fails to furnish to the County within ten (10) calendar days after demand by the County satisfactory evidence that a lien or stop notice has been so released, discharged, or secured, then the County may discharge such indebtedness, by whatever means reasonably necessary, and deduct the amount required therefore, together with any and all losses, costs, damages, and attorneys’ fees and expenses incurred or suffered by the County from any sum payable to Contractor under the Contract.

(d) Contractor shall, at its own cost, defend, indemnify and hold harmless the County, its officers, agents and employees from and against any and all liability, damages, losses, claims, demands, actions, and costs, including attorneys’ fees and expenses, arising from or attributable to a lien or stop notice filed and/or served in connection with the Work.

55


Article 49. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR

If Contractor or any of its subcontractors or employees cause loss or damage to any separate contractor on the Work, Contractor agrees to settle with such separate contractor by agreement, if the subcontractor or employee will so settle, or by arbitration. If such subcontractor sues the County, on account of any loss so sustained, the County shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the County against any expenses or judgment arising therefrom.


Article 51. UTILITIES

(a) All utilities, including but not limited to electricity, water, gas, and telephone, used on Work shall be furnished and paid for by Contractor. Contractor shall furnish and install necessary temporary distribution systems, including meters, if necessary to carry on the Work. Upon completion of Work, Contractor shall remove all temporary distribution systems.

(b) If Contract is for an addition to an existing facility, Contractor may, with written permission of the County, use the County’s existing utilities.

Article 52. SANITARY FACILITIES

Contractor, at its own cost, shall provide temporary sanitary facilities in no fewer numbers than required by law and such additional facilities as may be directed by the Inspector for the use of all workers. The facilities shall be maintained in a sanitary condition at all times and shall be left at the site until removal is directed by the Inspector. Use of toilet facilities in the Work under construction shall not be permitted except by consent of the Inspector.

Article 53. CLEANING UP

Contractor at all times shall keep premises free from debris such as waste, rubbish, and excess materials and equipment caused by the Work. Contractor shall not leave debris under, in, or about the premises, but shall promptly remove same from the premises on a daily basis. If Contractor fails to clean up, the County may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to Contractor. If Contract is for an addition to an existing facility, Contractor shall perform specific clean up on or about the premises upon request by the County as it deems necessary for the continuing education process. In such instance, the Contractor shall comply within 24 hours after which time the County may do so and the cost thereof shall be borne by the Contractor.

Article 54. PATENTS, ROYALTIES, INDEMNITIES, AND TAXES

Contractor shall hold and save the County and its officers, agents, and employees harmless from liability of any nature or kind, including cost and expense, for or on account of any patented or un-patented invention, process, article, or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of this Contract, including its use by the County, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents, unless such liability arises from the sole negligence, or willful misconduct

56


of the County. Contractor shall pay all applicable federal, state and local sales taxes and all other taxes pertaining to the Work involved in this Contract.

Article 55. GUARANTEE

(a) In addition to guarantees required elsewhere, Contractor shall, and hereby does guarantee against all defects for a period of one year after the recordation of the Notice of Completion, and shall repair or replace any and all such work, together with any other work, that may be displaced in so doing, that may prove defective in workmanship and/or materials within a one (1) year period from the date of recordation without expense whatsoever to the County, ordinary wear and tear, unusual abuse or neglect excepted. The County will give notice of observed defects to Contractor with reasonable promptness. Contractor shall notify the County upon completion of such repairs or replacement.

(b) In the event of failure of Contractor or Surety to commence and pursue with diligence said replacements or repairs within ten (10) calendar days after being notified in writing, the County is hereby authorized to proceed to have defects repaired and made good at expense of Contractor and Surety, each who hereby agree to pay costs and charges thereof immediately on demand.

(c) If, in the opinion of the County, defective work creates a dangerous condition or requires immediate correction or attention to prevent further loss to the County, or to prevent interruption of operations of the County, the County will attempt to give the notice required by this Article. If Contractor or Surety cannot be contacted or neither complies with the County’s request for correction within a reasonable time, as determined by the County, the County may, notwithstanding the provisions of this Article, proceed to make such correction or provide such attention and the costs of such correction or attention shall be charged against Contractor and Surety of the guarantees provided in this Article or elsewhere in this Contract.

(d) This Article does not in any way limit the guarantees on any items for which a longer guarantee is specified or on any items for which a manufacturer gives a guarantee for a longer period. Contractor shall furnish to the County all appropriate guarantee or warranty certificates upon completion of the Project or upon request by the County.

(e) All guarantees required under this Article shall be in writing on the Guarantee form included in the Contract Documents.

(f) Nothing herein shall limit any other rights or remedies available to the County.

Article 56. DUTY TO PROVIDE FIT WORKERS

(a) Contractor and subcontractor(s) shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among their employees and shall not employ or work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in work assigned to such person. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to ensure compliance with this Article.

57


(b) Any person in the employ of Contractor or subcontractors whom the County may deem incompetent or unfit shall be excluded from the Work site and shall not again be employed on it except with written consent of the County.

Article 57. WAGE RATES, TRAVEL AND SUBSISTENCE

(a) Pursuant to the provisions of Article 2 (commencing at Section 1770), Chapter 1, Part 7, Division 2 of the Labor Code, the governing body of the County has obtained the general prevailing rate of per diem wages and the general prevailing rate for holiday and overtime work in the locality in which this public work is to be performed for each craft, classification or type of worker needed to execute this Contract from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations (hereinafter, in this Article, "Director"). These rates are on file with the Facilities Department of the County and copies will be made available to any interested party on request. Contractor shall obtain and post a copy of such wage rates at the job site.

(b) Holiday and overtime work, when permitted by law, shall be paid for at a rate of at least one and one-half times the above specified rate of per diem wages, unless otherwise specified. Holidays shall be as defined in the Collective Bargaining Agreement applicable to each particular craft, classification or type of worker employed under Contractor.

(c) Contractor shall pay and shall cause to be paid each Worker engaged in Work on the Project not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages determined by the Director, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between Contractor or any subcontractor and such workers.

(d) Contractor shall pay and shall cause to be paid to each Worker needed to execute the Work on the Project, travel and subsistence payments, as such travel and subsistence payments are defined in the applicable collective bargaining agreements filed with the Department of Industrial Relations in accordance with Labor Code Section 1773.8.

(e) If during the period this bid is required to remain open, the Director of Industrial Relations determines that there has been a change in any prevailing rate of per diem wages in the locality in which the Work under Contract is to be performed, such change shall not alter the wage rates in the Notice to Contractors or the Contract subsequently awarded.

(f) Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1775, Contractor shall as a penalty to the County, forfeit the amount required for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each Worker paid less than the prevailing rates determined by the Director, for such Work or craft in which such Worker is employed for any public work done under contract by Contractor or by any subcontractor under it. The difference between such prevailing wage rates and the amount paid to each Worker for each calendar day or portion thereof for which each Worker was paid less than the prevailing wage rate shall be paid to each Worker by Contractor.

(g) Any Worker employed to perform Work on the Project, which work is not covered by any classification listed in the general prevailing wage rate of per diem wages determined by the Director shall be paid not less than the minimum rate of wages specified therein for the

58


classification which most nearly corresponds to work to be performed by him, and such minimum wage rate shall be retroactive to time of initial employment of such person in such classification.

(h) Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1773.1, per diem wages are deemed to include employer payments for health and welfare, pension, vacation, travel time, and subsistence pay as provided for in Labor Code Section 1773.8, apprenticeship or other training programs authorized by Section 3093, and similar purposes.

(i) Contractor shall post at appropriate conspicuous points on the site of Project, a schedule showing all determined minimum wage rates and all authorized deductions, if any, from unpaid wages actually earned.

Article 58. HOURS OF WORK

(a) As provided in Article 3, (commencing at Section 1810), Chapter 1, Part 7, Division 2 of the Labor Code, eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a legal day’s work. The time of service of any worker employed at any time by Contractor or by any subcontractor on any subcontract under this Contract upon the work or upon any part of the work contemplated by this Contract shall be limited and restricted by Contractor to eight (8) hours per day, and forty (40) hours during any one week, except as hereinafter provided. Notwithstanding the provisions hereinabove set forth, work performed by employees of Contractor in excess of eight (8) hours per day, and forty (40) hours during any one week, shall be permitted upon this public work upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of such hours at not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay.

(b) Contractor shall keep and shall cause each subcontractor to keep an accurate record showing the name of and actual hours worked each calendar day and each calendar week by each Worker employed by Contractor in connection with the Work or any part of the Work contemplated by this Contract. The record shall be kept open at all reasonable hours to the inspection of the County and to the Division of Labor Law Enforcement, Department of Industrial Relations of the State of California.

(c) Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1813, Contractor shall pay to the County a penalty in the amount required by law for each Worker employed in the execution of this Contract by Contractor or by any subcontractor for each calendar day during which such Worker is required or permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any one calendar day and forty (40) hours in any one calendar week in violation of the provisions of Article 3 (commencing at Section 1810), Chapter 1, Part 7, Division 2 of the Labor Code.

(d) Any Work necessary to be performed after regular working hours, or on Sundays or other holidays shall be performed without additional expense to the County.

Article 59. PAYROLL RECORDS

59


(a) Pursuant to the provisions of Section 1776 of the Labor Code, Contractor shall keep and shall cause each subcontractor performing any portion of the work under this Contract to keep an accurate payroll record, showing the name, address, social security number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by Contractor in connection with the Work.

(b) The payroll enumerated under subdivision (a) shall be certified and shall be available for inspection at all reasonable hours at the principle office of Contractor on the following basis:

1. A certified copy of an employee's payroll record shall be made available for inspection or furnished to the employee or his/her authorized representative on request.

2. A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a) shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request to a representative of the County, Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, and Division of Apprenticeship Standards of the Department of Industrial Relations.

3. A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a) shall be made available upon request by the public for inspection or copies thereof made; provided, however, that a request by the public shall be made through either the body awarding Contract, Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement. If the requested payroll records have not been provided pursuant to paragraph (2), the requesting party shall, prior to being provided the records reimburse the costs of preparation by Contractor, subcontractors, and the entity through which the request was made. The public shall not be given access to the records at the principal office of Contractor.

4. The form of certification shall be as follows: I, (name-print)

the undersigned, am (position in business)

with the authority to act for and on behalf of (name of business and/or contractor),

certify under penalty of perjury that the records or copies thereof submitted and consisting of

(description, number of pages) are the originals or true, full and correct copies of the originals which depict the payroll record(s) of actual disbursements by way of cash, check or whatever form to the individual or individuals named.

Date: Signature

(c) Each contractor shall file a certified copy of the records enumerated in subdivision (a) with the entity that requested the records within ten (10) working days after receipt of a written request.

60


(d) Any copy of records made available for inspection as copies and furnished upon request to the public or any public agency by the County, Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or Division of Labor Standards Enforcement shall be marked or obliterated in such a manner as to prevent disclosure of an individual's name, address, and social security number. The name and address of contractor awarded Contract or performing Contract shall not be marked or obliterated.

(e) Contractor shall inform the County of the location of the records enumerated under subdivision (a), including the street address, city and county, and shall, within five (5) working days, provide a notice of a change of location and address.

(f) In the event of noncompliance with the requirements of this Section, Contractor shall have ten (10) working days in which to comply after receipt of written notice specifying in what respects Contractor must comply with this Section. Should noncompliance still be evident after the ten (10) working day period, Contractor shall, as a penalty to the County, forfeit the amount required by law for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each Worker, until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request of Division of Apprenticeship Standards or Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, these penalties shall be withheld from progress payments then due.

(g) It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to ensure compliance with the provisions of Labor Code Section 1776.

Article 60. APPRENTICES

(a) Contractor acknowledges and agrees that, if this Contract involves a dollar amount or a number of working days greater than that specified in Labor Code Section 1777.5, thirty thousand dollars ($30,000) and/or twenty (20) days, this Contract is governed by the provisions of Labor Code Section 1777.5. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to ensure compliance with this Article and with Labor Code Section 1777.5 for all apprenticeship occupations.

(b) Apprentices of any crafts or trades may be employed and, when required by Labor Code Section 1777.5, shall be employed, provided they are properly registered in full compliance with the provisions of the Labor Code.

(c) Every such apprentice shall be paid the standard wage paid to apprentices under the regulations of the craft or trade at which he is employed, and shall be employed only at the work of the craft or trade to which he is registered.

(d) Only apprentices, as defined in Labor Code Section 3077, who are in training under apprenticeship standards and written apprentice agreements under Chapter 4 (commencing at Section 3070), Division 3 of the Labor Code, are eligible to be employed. The employment and training of each apprentice shall be in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship standards and apprentice agreements under which he is training.

61


(e) Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1777.5, if that Section applies to this Contract as indicated above, Contractor and any subcontractors employing workers in any apprentice-able craft or trade in performing any work under this Contract shall apply to the applicable joint apprenticeship committee for a certificate approving the Contractor or subcontractor under the applicable apprenticeship standards and fixing the ratio of apprentices to journeymen employed in performing the Work.

(f) Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1777.5, if that Section applies to this Contract as indicated above, Contractor and any subcontractor may be required to make contributions to the apprenticeship program.

(g) If Contractor or any subcontractor willfully fails to comply with Labor Code Section 1777.5, then, upon a determination of noncompliance by the Administrator of Apprenticeship, it shall: (1) be denied the right to bid on any subsequent project for one year from the date of such determination; and (2) forfeit as a penalty to the County the amount required by law per day for each calendar day of noncompliance, which shall be withheld from any payment due or to become due under the terms of this Contract. Interpretation and enforcement of these provisions shall be in accordance with the rules and procedures of the California Apprenticeship Council.

(h) Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with Labor Code Section 1777.6, which Section forbids certain discriminatory practices in the employment of apprentices.

(i) Contractor shall become fully acquainted with the law regarding apprentices prior to commencement of the work. Special attention is directed to Sections 1777.5, 1777.6 and 1777.7 of the Labor Code, and Title 8, California Code of Regulations, Section 200 et seq. Questions may be directed to the State Division of Apprenticeship Standards, 455 Golden Gate Avenue, San Francisco, California 94102.

Article 61. LABOR FIRST AID

Contractor shall maintain emergency first aid treatment for Contractor’s workers on the Project that complies with the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (29 United States Code, Section 651, et seq.).

Article 62. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

(a) Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur as a result of its fault or negligence in connection with the prosecution of this Contract, and shall take all necessary measures and be responsible for the proper care and completion and final acceptance by the County. All Work shall be solely at Contractor’s risk, with the exception of damage to the Work caused by "acts of God" as defined and in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 7105.

(b) Contractor shall take, and require subcontractors to take, all necessary precautions for safety of workers on the Project and shall comply with all applicable federal, state, local and other safety laws, standards, orders, rules, regulations, and building codes to prevent accidents or

62


injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to premises where work is being performed and to provide a safe and healthful place of employment. Contractor shall furnish, erect and properly maintain at all times, all necessary safety devices, safeguards, construction canopies, signs, nets, barriers, lights, and watchmen for protection of workers and the public and shall post danger signs warning against hazards created by such features in the course of construction. Contractor shall designate a responsible member of its organization on the Project, whose duty shall be to post information regarding protection and obligations of workers and other notices required under occupational safety and health laws, to comply with reporting and other occupational safety requirements, and to protect the life, safety and health of workers. Name and position of person so designated shall be reported to the County by Contractor.

Contractor shall correct any violations of safety laws, rules, orders, standards, or regulations. Upon the issuance of a citation or notice of violation by the Division of Occupational Safety and Health, Contractor shall correct such violation promptly.

(c) In an emergency affecting safety of life or of Work or of adjoining property, Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the County, is hereby permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury; and Contractor shall act as authorized or instructed by the County. Any compensation claimed by Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined by agreement.

(d) Contractor shall provide such heat, covering, and enclosures as are necessary to protect all work, materials, equipment, appliances, and tools against damage by weather conditions, such as extreme heat, cold, dry winds, or dampness. Temporary enclosures and doors (if not glazed) shall be provided by Contractor. The County shall have full authority to suspend operations on Work when subject to damage by climatic conditions or because of insufficient curing or drying of surfaces or materials.

(e) Contractor shall take adequate precautions to protect existing roads, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, utilities, adjoining property and structures (including, without limitation, protection from settlement or loss of lateral support), and to avoid damage thereto, and repair any damage thereto caused by construction operations.

(f) Contractor shall (unless waived by the County in writing):

1. When performing new construction on existing sites, become informed and take into specific account the maturity of the students on the site; and when performing work that may interfere with school routine before or after school hours, enclose working area with substantial barricade, and arrange work to cause a minimum amount of inconvenience and danger to students and faculty in their regular school activities.

2. Provide substantial barricades around any shrubs or trees indicated to be preserved.

3. Deliver materials to building area over route designated by the County.

63


4. When directed by the County, take preventive measures to eliminate objectionable dust.

5. Confine apparatus, the storage of materials, and the operations of workers to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, or directions of the County; and shall not interfere with the Work or unreasonably encumber premises or overload any structure with materials; and enforce all instructions of the County regarding signs, advertising, fires, and smoking and require that all workers comply with all regulations while on construction site. Contractor, Contractor’s employees, subcontractors, subcontractors' employees or any person associated with Contract Work shall conduct themselves in a manner appropriate for a school site. No verbal or physical contact with students and faculty, profanity, or inappropriate attire will be permitted. The County may request non-complying persons be permanently removed from Project site.

6. Take care to prevent disturbing or covering any survey markers, monuments, or other devices marking property boundaries or corners. If such markers are disturbed by accident, they shall be replaced by an approved civil engineer at no cost to the County.

Article 63.AFFIRMATIVE ACTION EMPLOYMENT PROGRAM

(a) The Santa Clara County Office of Education will maintain a list of minority businesses and businesses operated by women that will ensure that such businesses received solicitations for bids.

(b) The Santa Clara County Office of Education will maintain a list of minority and women consultants and will ensure that they are afforded equal opportunity for contracts.

(c) The Santa Clara County Office of Education will notify its vendors, suppliers, and other contractors of its affirmative action program.

(d) The Santa Clara County Office of Education will require the inclusion of the following equal opportunity clauses as a condition of all contracts in excess of $10,000

1. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and a selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

2. The contractor will, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive

64


consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, physical handicap, sex, or national origin.

3. The contractor will show evidence of compliance with all provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.

4. In the event of the contractor’s noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts with this office.

Article 64. SCHEDULE OF VALUES

(a) Within 10 days after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a Schedule of Values in a form approved by the County. The Schedule of Values shall reflect allocations to the various portions of the Work in sufficient detail and supported by data to that substantiates its accuracy as the County may require. This schedule, when approved, shall be used as a basis for the Contractor’s applications for progress payments.

(b) Contractor shall provide itemized estimates of Work completed, corresponding to the Schedule of Values, as part of each application for progress payment.

Values employed in making up the Schedule of Values and estimates of Work completed will be used only for determining the basis of progress payments and will not be considered as fixing a basis for additions to or deductions from Contract Price.

Article 65. CONTRACTOR CLAIMS

(a) In order to assert a claim for damages in connection with the Contract, sustained by reason of acts by or attributable to the County, Contractor shall, within five (5) calendar days after initially sustaining such damage, submit to the County a written statement of the damage sustained, including the causes thereof. On or before the fifteenth (15th) day of the month succeeding that in which such damage shall have been initially sustained, Contractor shall submit to the County an itemized statement of the details, including, but not limited to, the causes thereof, and amounts of such damage. Unless such statements are made as in accordance with this paragraph, Contractor’s claims for compensation for damages, of which it knew or should have known, shall be waived, forfeited and invalidated, and it shall not be entitled to consideration for payment on account of any such damage.

(b) In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 20104, subdivision (c), Article 1.5, Chapter 1, Part 3 of the Public Contract Code is set forth below. Contractor understands and agrees that the provisions of Article 1.5 shall not affect the claims notice requirements set forth in these General Conditions.

Section 20104 of Public Contract Code.Application of article; provisions included in plans and specifications

65


(a) (1) This article applies to all public works claims of three hundred seventy five thousand dollars ($375,000) or less which arise between a contractor and a local agency.

(2) This article shall not apply to any claims resulting from a contract between a contractor and a public agency when the public agency has elected to resolve any disputes pursuant to Article 7.1 (commencing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2.

(b) (1) "Public work" has the same meaning as in Sections 3100 and 3106 of the Civil Code, except that "public work" does not include any work or improvement contracted for by the state or the Regents of the University of California.

(2) "Claim" means a separate demand by the contractor for (A) a time extension, (B) payment of money or damages arising from work done by or on behalf of the contractor pursuant to the contract for a public work and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the claimant is not otherwise entitled to, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the local agency.

(c) The provisions of this article or a summary thereof shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for any work which may rise to a claim under this article.

(d) This article applies only to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 1991.

Section 20104.2 Claims; requirements; tort claims excluded

For any claim subject to this article, the following requirements apply:

(a) The claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Claims must be filed on or before the date of final payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of claims.

(b) (1) For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to any written claim within 45 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant.

(2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant.

(3) The local agency's written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 15 days after receipt of the further

66


documentation or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater.

(c) (1) For claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to all written claims within 60 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant.

(2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant.

(3) The local agency's written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater.

(d) If the claimant disputes the local agency's written response, or the local agency fails to respond within the time prescribed, the claimant may so notify the local agency, in writing, either within 15 days of receipt of the local agency's response or within 15 days of the local agency's failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the local agency shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute.

(e) Following the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the claimant may file a claim as provided in Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 to Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time that claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer process.

(f) This article does not apply to tort claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing tort claims or actions specified by Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code.

Section 20104.4 Civil action procedures; mediation and arbitration; trial de novo; witnesses

67


The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve claims subject to this article:

(a) Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the matter to non-binding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15-day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator.

(b) (1) If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1141.11 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3 (commencing with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil Procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under this subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration.

(2) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds.

(3) In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedures, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, pay the attorney’s fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo.

(c) The court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or arbitration process.

Section 20104.6 Payment on undisputed portion of claim; interest on arbitration awards or judgments

(a) No local agency shall fail to pay money as to any portion of a claim which is undisputed except as otherwise provided in the contract.

68


(b) In any suit filed under Section 20104.4, the local agency shall pay interest at the legal rate on any arbitration award or judgment. The interest shall begin to accrue on the date the suit is filed in a court of law.


Article 67. PAYMENTS

(a) Unless otherwise specified, each month within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of approved periodical estimate for partial payment, and compliance by Contractor with Section 01027, Application for Payment, there shall be paid to Contractor a sum equal to ninety percent (90%) of value of work performed and of materials delivered on the ground or stock subject to or under the control of the County and unused up to the last day of the previous month, less aggregate previous payments. Monthly payments shall be made only on the basis of monthly estimates that shall be prepared by Contractor on a form approved by the County and filed before the fifth (5th) day of the month during which payment is to be made. Work completed as estimated shall be an estimate only and no inaccuracy or error in said estimate shall operate to release Contractor or Surety from any damages arising from such work or from enforcing each and every provision of this Contract, and the County shall have the right subsequently to correct any error made in any estimate for payment.

(b) With each payment request, and prior to receiving any payment, Contractor must furnish the County with the following:

(1) Schedules in accordance with Article 39, entitled “Construction Schedules;”

(2) Waivers and releases in accordance with Article 48, entitled “Liens;” and

(3) An updated summary of unresolved claims (“Summary of Claims”), including, but not limited to, the causes thereof, that it claims it sustained by reason of acts by, or attributable to, the County.

(4) An updated schedule of values indicating Contractor’s estimate of the percentage of completion for each line item.

Acceptance of a payment will constitute a release of all of Contractor’s claims for damages sustained by reasons of acts by, or attributable to, the County of which Contractor knew or should have known at the time of the payment request, except for those clearly identified claims for damages specified in the Summary of Claims.

(c) Contractor shall not be entitled to have any payment estimates processed or any payment for work performed so long as Contractor fails to materially comply with the Contract Documents or any lawful or proper direction given by the County concerning the Work, including, but not limited to, scheduling revisions and updates.

69


(d) Before payment is made hereunder, the County will receive the request for progress payment and verification by the Architect, Construction Manager, if any, the County and Inspector that the work for which payment is requested has been performed in accordance with the terms of the Contract.

Architect, Construction Manager, if any, the County and Inspector shall sign the request for payment as verification that the work has been performed. It is understood, however, that signature of the Architect and Construction Manager, if any, and Inspector shall not be conclusive upon the County, but merely advisory.

(e) No payment by the County hereunder shall be interpreted so as to imply that the County has inspected, approved, or accepted any part of the Work. The final payment, if unencumbered, shall be made thirty-five (35) calendar days after the recordation of the Notice of Completion with the office of the County Recorder, subject to Article 69, entitled “Completion.”

(f) Unless otherwise provided, on or before making request for final payment of the undisputed amount due under Contract, Contractor shall submit to the County, in writing, all claims for compensation under or arising out of this Contract and a Summary of Claims, as required under Paragraph (b), above, that is final and cumulative. The final and cumulative Summary of Claims may not include any claims for damages that have been released by operation of the provisions of Paragraph (b), above, or Article 65, entitled “Contractor Claims.” The acceptance by Contractor of the payment of the final amount shall constitute a waiver of all claims for compensation and damages against the County under or arising out of this Contract, except those identified in the final and cumulative Summary of Claims.

(g) Prior to requesting final payment, Contractor must deliver the record drawings, Project warranties, operations and maintenance manuals, a Settlement Agreement and Release of Claims form, and all other documents required by Section 01700, Contract Closeout, to the Construction Manager, if there is one, and the Architect.

Article 68. CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK

(a) The County may, as provided by law and without affecting the validity of this Contract, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work by issuance of written change orders or written directives during the progress of the Project, Contract Price and/or Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original Contract, except for changes to the Contract Time and/or Contract Price, which shall be made in accordance with Section 01028.

(b) In giving instructions, the County shall have authority to make minor changes in Work, not involving change in cost, and not inconsistent with purposes of building, by written directives. Otherwise, except in an emergency endangering life or property, no extra work or change shall be made unless pursuant to a written change order from the County, authorized by action of the Governing Board, and no claim for addition to Contract Time and/or Contract Price shall be valid unless so ordered.

70


(c) Value of any such extra work, change, or deduction shall be determined at the discretion of the County in one or more of the following ways:

1. By acceptable lump sum proposal from Contractor.

2. By unit prices contained in Contractor’s original bid and incorporated in CONTRACT DOCUMENTS or fixed by subsequent agreement between the County and Contractor.

3. By cost of material and labor, plus a percentage for overhead and profit. The following form shall be used by the Contractor to communicate proposed additions and deductions to Contract Price:

71


CREDIT EXTRAa. Material (attach itemized quantity

and unit cost plus sales tax). b. Labor (attach itemized hours and rates).

c. Subtotal

d. Subcontractor's actual overhead andprofit, not to exceed a combined10%.

e. Subtotal

f. Contractor's actual overhead andprofit ,not to exceed a combined5%.

g. Subtotal

h. Bond Premium, not toexceed one percent (1%) of Item g.

i. Total

Article 69. COMPLETION

(a) The County shall accept completion of the Work and have the Notice of Completion recorded when the entire Work shall have been completed to the satisfaction of the County. The Work may only be accepted as complete by action of the Governing Board.

(b) The County, at its sole option, may have the Notice of Completion recorded when the entire Work shall have been completed to the satisfaction of the County, except for minor corrective Work.

(c) If Contractor fails to complete the minor corrective Work prior to the expiration of the thirty-five (35) day period immediately following the recordation of Notice of Completion, the County shall withhold from the final payment an amount equal to 150 % of the estimated cost, as determined by the County, of the minor corrective work until such time as the Work is completed.

(d) At the end of such thirty-five (35) day period, if there are any items remaining to be corrected, the County may elect to proceed as provided in Article 70, entitled "Adjustment to Contract Price."Article 70. ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT PRICE

72


(a) If Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to perform any provision hereof, the County may, after ten (10) calendar days written notice to Contractor, and without prejudice to any other remedy it may have, make good such deficiencies.(b) The County shall adjust the Contract Price by reducing the amount thereof by the cost of making good such deficiencies. If the County deems it inexpedient to correct work defective or not done in accordance with Contract, the County shall make an equitable reduction in the Contract Price.

Article 71. CORRECTION OF WORK

(a) Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the County at any time before final acceptance of the entire Work to make an examination of work already completed by removing or tearing out the same, the Contractor shall upon request promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and materials. If such work is found to be defective in any respect due to fault of the Contractor or its subcontractors, it shall compensate the County for all expenses of such examinations and for satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to fully meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the additional cost of labor and material necessarily involved in the examination and replacement shall be paid by County.

(b) Contractor shall promptly remove from premises all work identified by the County as failing to conform with the Contract Documents, whether incorporated or not. Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute its own work to comply with Contract Documents, without additional expenses to the County, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other contractors that is destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.

(c) If Contractor does not remove such work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the County may remove it and may store the material at Contractor’s expense. If Contractor does not pay expenses of such removal and any storage within ten (10) calendar days thereafter, the County may, upon ten (10) calendar days written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for net proceed thereof, after deducting all costs and expenses that should have been borne by Contractor.

Article 72. EXTENSIONS OF TIME AND DELAY DAMAGES

(a) Both Contractor and the County agree that the following delays will be considered "non-compensable" and, therefore, neither party shall collect damages from the other should they occur: acts of God as defined and in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 7105, acts of public enemy, acts of Government, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, against others, and unusually severe weather (normal seasonal rainfall shall not be considered reason for time extension), or delays of subcontractors due to such causes.

(b) “Excusable delays” refers to any delay due to unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of Contractor, caused by acts of the County or anyone employed by it or acts of another contractor in performance of a contract (other than this Contract) with the County.

73


(c) In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 7102, Contractor shall not be charged for liquidated damages because of non-compensatory or excusable delays.

(d) “Inexcusable delays” refers to any delay to the progress of the Work caused by events or factors other than those specifically identified in Paragraphs (a) and (b), above.

(e) If an inexcusable delay occurs concurrently with either an excusable delay or a non-compensable delay, the maximum extension of the Contract Time shall be the number of days, if any, that the excusable delay or the non-compensatory delay exceeds the period of time of the inexcusable delay. Additionally, no adjustment to the Contract Time shall be made unless such activities directly impact work on the critical path of the then current and updated Approved Construction Schedule as of the date on which such delay first occurs. (f) Contractor shall within five (5) calendar days of the beginning of any excusable bidding or non-compensable delay, notify the County in writing of the causes of delay. The Contractor’s failure to notify the County within such five (5) calendar day period shall be deemed a waiver and relinquishment of such a claim of delay against the County.

(g) In the event that excusable delays cause damages to Contractor, Contractor’s damages shall be limited to direct, actual, and unavoidable additional costs of labor, materials or equipment directly resulting from such delay, and shall exclude indirect or other consequential damages. Except as expressly provided above, Contractor shall not have any other claim, demand, or right to adjustment of the Contract Price arising out of delay, interruption, hindrance or disruption to the progress of the Work. Adjustments to the Contract Price and the Contract Time, if any, on account of changes to the Work or suspension/termination for convenience of the Work shall be governed by the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.

(h) Extensions of time shall apply only to the portion of Work affected by the delay, and shall not apply to other portions of Work not so affected.

Article 73. PAYMENTS WITHHELD

(a) In addition to amounts that the County may retain or deduct pursuant to Articles 67 and 69 and Section 01027, Application for Payment, paragraph 1.04, the County may withhold a sufficient amount or amounts of any payment or payments otherwise due to Contractor, as in its judgment may be necessary to cover the following:

1. One hundred percent (100%) of payments made by the County on behalf of Contractor or any subcontractors pursuant to Articles 47 or 70, Paragraph (a).

2. One hundred twenty-five percent (125 %) of the amount claimed by subcontractors or the supplier of materials in the form of a stop notice.

3. One hundred percent (100%) of the amount of any equitable reduction in Contract Price pursuant to Paragraph (b) of Article 70, entitled “Adjustment to Contract Price.”

74


4. One hundred and fifty percent (150%) of the estimated cost of defective work that Contractor has not remedied.

5. Liquidated damages assessed against Contractor.

6. Penalties or assessments required by law.

7. The cost of material ordered by the County pursuant to Article 40, entitled "Materials and Work."

8. One hundred percent (100%) of the estimated cost of completing of the Contract, if there exists a reasonable doubt that this Contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid to Contractor.

9. One hundred and fifty percent (150%) of the estimated amount of damage caused to another contractor.

10. The cost of site clean-up as provided in Article 53, entitled "Cleaning Up."

11. The costs of responding to unjustified requests for information, in accordance with Paragraph (b) of Article 11, entitled “Architect—Submittals and Requests for Information.”

12. The costs of premiums that the County pays on behalf of Contractor in accordance with Paragraph (c) of Article 24, entitled “Proof of Carriage of Insurance.”

(b) If the above grounds are, in the opinion of the County, removed by or at the expense of Contractor, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.

(c) The County may apply such withheld payment amount for such claims or obligations at its discretion. In so doing, the County shall make such payments on behalf of Contractor. If any payment is so made by the County, then such amount shall be considered as a payment made under Contract by the County to Contractor and the County shall not be liable to Contractor for such payments made in good faith. Such payments may be made without prior judicial determination of the validity of the claim or obligation. The County will render Contractor an accounting of such funds disbursed on behalf of Contractor.

(d) As an alternative to payment of such claims or obligations, the County, in its sole discretion, may reduce the total Contract Price as provided in the Article 70, entitled "Adjustment to Contract Price."

Article 74. EXCISE TAXES

75


If under Federal Excise Tax Law any transaction hereunder constitutes a sale on which a Federal Excise Tax is imposed and the sale is exempt from such Federal Excise Tax because it is a sale to a State or Local Government for its exclusive use, the County, upon request, will execute documents necessary to show (1) that the County is a political subdivision of the State for the purposes of such exemption and (2) that the sale is for the exclusive use of the County. No Federal Excise Tax for such materials shall be included in any bid price.

Article 75. TAXES

Bid price, and, in turn, the Contract Price, is to include any and all applicable sales taxes or other taxes that may be due in accordance with Section 7051 of the Revenue and Taxation Code Regulation 1521 of the State Board of Equalization, or any other tax code that may be applicable.

76


Article 76. NO ASSIGNMENT

Contractor shall not assign this Contract, or any part thereof, without the prior written consent of the County. Assignment without such prior written consent shall be null and void. Any assignment of money due or to become due under this Contract shall be subject to a prior lien for services rendered or material supplied for performance of work called for under said Contract in favor of all persons, firms, or corporations rendering such services or supplying such material to the extent that claims are filed pursuant to the Civil Code, Government Code, Labor Code and/or Code of Civil Procedure and shall also be subject to deductions for liquidated damages or withholding of payments as determined by the County in accordance with this Contract.

Article 77. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF

Any notice from one party to the other or otherwise under Contract shall be in writing and shall be dated and signed by the party giving such notice or by a duly authorized representative of such party. Any such notice shall not be effective for any purpose whatsoever unless served in one of the following manners:

1. If notice is given to the County, by personal delivery thereof to the County or by depositing same in United States mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to the County, and sent by registered or certified mail with postage prepaid;

2. If notice is given to Contractor, by personal delivery thereof to Contractor or to Contractor’s superintendent at site of Project, or by depositing same in United States mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to Contractor at its regular place of business or at such address as may have been established for the conduct of work under this Contract, and sent by registered or certified mail with postage prepaid;

3. If notice is given to Surety or other person by personal delivery to such Surety or other person or by depositing same in United States mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed to such Surety or person at the address of such Surety or person last communicated by Surety or other person to party giving notice, and sent by registered or certified mail with postage prepaid.

Article 78. NO WAIVER

Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents, and rights and remedies available thereunder, shall be in addition to and not in lieu of or otherwise a limitation or restriction of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. No action or failure to act by the County shall constitute a waiver of a right or remedy afforded it under the Contract Documents or at law, nor shall such an action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach hereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.

Article 79. SEVERABILITY

77


In the event any provision of the Contract Documents shall be deemed illegal, invalid, unenforceable and/or void, by a court or any other governmental agency of competent jurisdiction, such provision shall be deemed to be severed and deleted from the Contract Documents, but all remaining provisions hereof, shall in all other respects, continue in full force and effect.

Article 80. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to the County, Inspector and Construction Manager, if there is one, in writing. The work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the County and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the County and Contractor.

Article 81. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)

Contractor is required to ensure Material Safety Data Sheets are available in a readily accessible place at the Work site for any material requiring a Material Safety Data Sheet per the Federal "Hazard Communication" standard, or Employees Right to Know Law. The Contractor is also required to ensure proper labeling on substances brought onto the job site and that any person working with the material or within the general area of the material is informed of the hazards of the substance and follows proper handling and protection procedures. Two additional copies of the Material Safety Data Sheets should also be submitted directly to the County.

Article 82. CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT

(a) The Contractor understands that the County may employ a construction manager to perform construction management services on the Project. If the County employs a construction manager, the Contractor and subcontractors agree to cooperate with the construction manager; to coordinate work with others as required; and to furnish the construction manager without delay information or documentation requested.

(b) Contractor acknowledges that the Construction Manager, if any, has no contractual duty to Contractor, express or implied, and that Contractor is not an intended beneficiary of the Construction Manager’s contract, if there is one, with the County.

Article 83. TIMELY PROGRESS PAYMENTS & INTEREST

California Public Contract Code Section 20104.50 sets forth the Legislature's intent for prompt payment to contractors and established the following procedures for timely progress payments and payment of interest:

78


1. Any local agency which fails to make any progress payment within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted payment request from a contractor on a construction contract shall pay interest to the contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of Section 685.010 of the Code of Civil Procedure.

2. Upon receipt of a payment request, each local agency shall act in accordance with both of the following:

a. Each payment request shall be reviewed by the local agency as soon as practicable after receipt for the purposed of determining that the payment request is a proper payment request.

b. Any payment request determined not to be a proper payment request suitable for payment shall be returned to the contractor as soon as practicable, but not later than seven (7) days, after receipt. A request returned pursuant to this paragraph shall be accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the payment request is not proper.

3. The number of days available to a local agency to make a payment without incurring interest pursuant to Section 20104.50 shall be reduced by the number of days by which a local agency exceeds the seven-day return requirement set forth in paragraph 2 (b), above.

4. A "progress payment" includes all payment due contractors, except that portion of the final payment designated by the contract as retention earnings.

5. A payment request shall be considered properly executed if funds are available for payment of the payment request, and payment is not delayed due to an audit inquiry by the financial officer of the local agency.

END OF SECTION

79


SECTION 007300 – SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Article 1. GENERAL

These Special Conditions supplement and/or modify certain provisions of the General Conditions, and both General and Special Conditions shall be deemed to be a part of every Section of Contract Documents (Specifications), as if wholly embodied and repeated in every Section. The Contractor and subcontractor shall be held to have read and thoroughly familiarized themselves with their content.

Article 2. CONTRACT TIME

1. Reference: Paragraph 1.03 of Section 002113, Instructions to Bidders, Paragraph 1.02 of Section 003113, Preliminary Schedule and Paragraph 4 of the Agreement.

2. The duration of the contract shall be as listed in Section 003113, Preliminary Schedule.

Article 3. NOT USED

Article 4. SEPARATE CONTRACTORS AND ACCESS

1. The County may award, or may have awarded other contracts for additional work, and the contractor shall cooperate fully with such other contractors by scheduling his/her own work so that it properly relates to work to be performed under other contracts. The contractor shall not commit or permit any act, which will adversely interfere with the performance of work by any other contractor.

2. Contractors shall assume all liability, financial or otherwise, in connection with his/her contract and shall protect and save harmless the County and the construction manager, if there is one, from any and all damages or claims that may arise because of inconvenience, delay, or loss experienced by them because of the presence and operations of other contractors working within the limits of the same project.

3. The contractor shall be aware that work by other contractors will occur simultaneously in any given area or all areas. The contractor understands, in order to maintain the project completion schedule, that he may not have access to a given area to continue work due to the work of other contractors. The construction manager reserves the right to determine what areas are accessible to a contractor and when it is necessary to relocate or reschedule the work of the contractor. Relocation and rescheduling or work will be minimized. However, if either is necessary, the contractor agrees that no additional compensation for costs that may be incurred shall be allowed or processed by the construction manager or the County. In the event that the construction manager relocates or reschedules the work of a contractor, and that action creates an adverse affect on the Contractor’s scheduled critical path for the work of the contract, an authorized extension of the schedule by the construction manager or the County may be granted to extend the scheduled contract completion date without increase in compensation.

80


4. Contractor loss due to acts of another contractor:

(a) If, through acts of neglect or unauthorized delays on the part of the contractor, any other contractor or any subcontractor shall suffer a loss from delays or damage to their work, this contractor shall settle with such other contractor or subcontractor without their involvement of the County or its construction manager. Settlement between contractor shall include any and all fiscal damages incurred as a result of delay and a joint written statement to the construction manager indicating the agreed upon number of calendar days of delay suffered by the affected contractor. The affected contractor will attach this joint letter to his request for the time extensions to the construction manager and must show specifically how the actions of the other contractor impacted his critical path activities. Such requests for a time extension shall be a zero (0) cost to the County. If the contractors agree that the construction manager (as agent for the County) shall determine a binding resolution to the dispute, both contractors shall submit all relevant documents and information to the construction manager for review. When determined in their opinion to be a fail and legitimate claim, the County reserves the right to backcharge on contractor for his/her delay or damage to another contractor. A change order will be the mechanism used to adjust contract amounts.

(b) Failure of any contractor who is party to a dispute between separate contractors, to submit his facts and information regarding this position and assertions relevant to the dispute within sixty (60) days from discovery to the construction manager, shall not relieve such contractor from his obligation to abide to the resolution prescribed by the construction manager. The contractor making the discovery, but failing to report the dispute to the construction manager in writing within the prescribed time, will assume the responsibility for remedy of the conditions in question.

Article 5. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Reference: Section 006516, Insurance Certificates, and Section 007200, General Conditions, Articles 21, 22, 23, and 24.

2. Amounts: Per Section 007200, General Conditions, Articles 22 and 23, contractor shall procure and maintain, and shall require all subcontractors, if any, whether primary or secondary, to procure and maintain:

MINIMUM

COMBINED

SINGLEINSURED LIMITS

Per Statutorya. Workers' Compensation Self-Insured Requirements

81


b. Employer’s Liability $3,000,000 ea. Accident

c. Comprehensive General Liability $3,000,000 ea.

$3,000,000 ea. Bodily Injury$3,000,000 ea. occurrence Bodily Injury$3,000,000 ea. occurrence

Property Damage

(X) Premises and Operations(X) Contractual Liability(X) Independent Contractors(X) Products/Completed Operations(X) Broad Form Property Damage(X) Personal Injury(X) Broad Form Liability Endorsement(X) Explosion Hazard(X) Underground Hazard(X) Owned Automobiles(X) Non-owned Automobiles(X) Hired Automobiles

d. Automobile Liability (if not included in General Liability $1,000,000coverage checked above) $1,000,000 ea. Bodily Injury

$1,000,000 ea. occurrenceBodily Injury$1,000,000 ea. occurrenceProperty Damage

e. Public Liability Insurance for injuries includingaccidental death, to any one person in anamount not less than and, $1,000,000

f. Subject to the same limit for each person,on account of one accident, in an amountnot less than $1,000,000

END OF SECTION82


SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY OF WORK

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes summary of work including:

1. Work covered by Contract Documents including drawings, specification & sketches MSK-1 & MSK-2 which are changes to the following drawings:

Sheet #M2.11 - See MSK-1 :

a) Route flue vent horizontal with rain cap from the top of the Airedale unit gas furnace. Flue vent shall penetrate mechanical closet wall above door as high as possible close to the roof structure above and shall extend horizontally up to the edge of roof overhang as shown on MSK-1.

b) Route horizontal combustion air intake with wall cap to the top of the Airedale unit gas furnace. Combustion air intake shall penetrate mechanical closet wall as high as possible close to the roof structure above and existing classroom exterior wall as shown on MSK-1.

Sheet #M2.21 – See MSK-2 :

a) Deleted sheet note #2. Delete roof penetrations and eliminate combustion kits for AC-1, AC-2, AC-3 & AC-4. Refer to MSK-2.

2. Bid items, Allowances and Alternates.

3. Work under other contracts.

4. Work sequence.

5. Cooperation of contractor and coordination with other work.

6. Maintenance.

7. Occupancy requirements.

8. Reference Standards.

9. Products ordered in advance.

10. Furnished products.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Work of Contract comprises the demolition of existing roof mechanical well, HVAC units on roof and landscape planter to construct two new mechanical rooms and 4 new HVAC units to supply 4 existing classrooms. Construction will also include

83


remodel of existing roof by continuing slope to where mechanical well was located, roof extension over new mechanical rooms and new roof material.

B. Unless provided otherwise in the Contract Documents, all risk of loss to Work covered by Contract Documents shall rest with Contractor until Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work.

1.3 BID ITEMS

A. Any bid item may be deleted in total or in part prior to or after award of Contract without compensation in any form or adjustment of other bid items or prices therefore.

B. Alternates:

1. Alternates will be exercised per order received.2. Contractor must coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as

required to complete Work, including changes under each Alternate designated in the contract documents.

1.4 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Construct Work in stages and at times to accommodate operation requirements during the construction period; coordinate construction schedule and operations with Architect.

1.5 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTOR AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK

A. Should construction work, or work of any other nature, be under way by other forces or by other contractors within or adjacent to the limits of the Work, the Contractor shall cooperate with all such other contractors or forces to the end that any delay or hindrance to their work will be avoided. The cost of such cooperation will be considered as included in the bid amount and no direct or additional payment will be made therefore.

B. Santa Clara County Office of Education reserves the right to perform other or additional work, within or adjacent to the limits of the work specified, at any time by the use of other forces. The Contractor shall coordinate with the County and any forces, or other forces, engaged by the County, as required by the Contract General Conditions (refer to AIA Document A201-1997, Part A of this book). In the event that the performance of such other or additional work materially increases or decreases the Contractor's costs, the work and the amount to be paid therefore will be appropriately adjusted as determined by the Architect.

C. Limit use of premises for Work and for construction operations to allow for:

1. Operation.

84


2. Work by other contractors and tenants.

D. Coordinate use of premises and access to site with other contractors, utilities, tenants, and forces, as required by the Contract General Conditions (refer to AIA Document A201-1997, Part A of this book). Architect has final authority over coordination, use of premises, and access to site.

E. Cooperate with students, teachers, administrators and others who may occupy the building prior to completion of Work of this Contract.

F. Cooperate with contractors for other area work, not included in Contract, but which may take place during construction period.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Cost of maintenance of systems and equipment prior to Final Acceptance will be considered as included in prices bid and no direct or additional payment will be made therefore.

1.7 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Whenever, in the opinion of Architect, Work or any part thereof is in a condition suitable for use, and the best interest of requires such use, may take beneficial occupancy of and connect to, open for public use, or use the Work or such part thereof. In such case, will request Architect to inspect the Work or part thereof, and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of Work.

B. Prior to date of Final Acceptance of the Work by all necessary repairs or renewals in Work or part thereof so used, not due to ordinary wear and tear, but due to defective materials or workmanship or to operations of Contractor, shall be made at expense of Contractor.

C. Use of Work or part thereof as contemplated by this Section shall in no case be construed as constituting acceptance of Work or any part thereof. Such use shall neither relieve Contractor of any responsibilities under Contract, nor act as waiver by of any of the conditions thereof.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of standard, except where more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

3.0 EXECUTION

85


A. Not applicable to this Section.

END OF SECTION

86


SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the description requirements and procedures for determining amount of work done and for obtaining payment for work done.


A. Section 011000, Summary of Work

B. Section 012600, Modification Procedures

C. Section 013300, Submittal Procedures

D. Section 013200, Construction Progress Documentation – Schedule

E. Section 017700, Contract Closeout Procedures

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Public Contract Code

1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work under Contract, or under any bid item, allowance or alternate, shall include all labor, materials, transport, handling, storage, supervision, administration and all other items necessary for the satisfactory completion of work, whether or not expressly specified or shown.

1.5 DETERMINATION OF QUANTITIES

A. Quantity of work to be paid for under any item for which a unit price is fixed in Contract shall be number, as determined by Architect, of units of work satisfactorily completed in accordance with Plans and Specifications and as directed pursuant to Plans and Specifications. Unless otherwise provided, determination of number of units of work so completed will be based, so fares practicable, on actual measurement or count within prescribed or ordered limits, and no payment will be made for work done outside of limits. Measurements and computations will be made by methods as Architect may consider appropriate for class of work measured.

87


1.6 SCOPE OF PAYMENT

A. Except as otherwise expressly stipulated in Section 011000 Summary of Work, payment to Contractor at the unit price or other price fixed in the contract for performing the work required under any item, or (if the contract is on a lump sum price basis) at the lump sum price fixed in the contract for performing all work required under the contract, and as either may be adjusted pursuant to any approved change order, shall be full compensation for completing, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all work required under the item or under the contract, and for all expense incurred by Contractor for any purpose in connection with the performance and completion of said work, including all incidental work necessary for completion of the Work.

B. The Contract Sum, whether lump sum, unit price or otherwise, shall be deemed to include all costs necessary to complete required Work, shall also include any costs for loss or damage arising from nature of Work or, prosecution of the Work, or from action of elements. Unless the Contract Documents expressly provide otherwise, the Contract Sum shall be deemed to include:

1. Any and all costs arising from any unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during, and all risks of any description connected with, prosecution of Work until acceptance by Owner;

2. All expenses incurred due to suspension, or discontinuance of Work as provided in Contract;

3. Escalation to allow for cost increases between time of Contract Award and completion of Work.

C. Whenever it is specified herein that Contractor is to do work or furnish materials of any class for which no price is fixed in the Contract, it shall be understood that Contractor is to do such work or furnish such materials without extra charge or allowance or direct payment of any sort, and that cost of doing work or furnishing materials is to be included in price bid, unless it is expressly specified herein, in particular cases, that work or material is to be paid for as extra work.

D. No payment shall be made for materials or equipment not yet incorporated into the Work, except as follows:

NONE.

E. For the above listed materials and equipment, where Contractor requests payment on the basis of such materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work, Contractor must satisfy the following conditions:

1. The materials and/or equipment shall be delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, for example, a mutually acceptable warehouse;

88


2. Full title to the materials and/or equipment shall vest in the Owner at the time of deliver to the site, warehouse or other storage location;

3. Contractor shall obtain a negotiable warehouse receipt, endorsed over to Owner for materials and/or equipment stored in an off-site warehouse. No payment shall be made until such endorsed receipts are delivered to Architect;

4. Stockpiled materials and/or equipment shall be available for Owner inspection. Materials and/or equipment shall be segregated and labeled or tagged to specifically identify this specific Contract;

5. After delivery of materials and/or equipment, if any inherent or acquired defects are discovered, defective materials and/or equipment shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials and/or equipment at Contractor's expense;

6. At its expense, Contractor shall insure the materials and/or equipment against theft, fire, vandalism, and malicious mischief, as well as any other coverages required under the Contract Documents;

7. Contractor's application for payment shall be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

1.7 BASIS OF PAYMENT

A. Unit Pay Quantities: When estimated quantity for specific portions of Work is listed in Bid Form, quantity of work to be paid for shall be actual number of units satisfactorily completed in accordance with Plans and Specifications.

B. Lump Sum: When estimated quantity for specific portion of Work is not indicated and unit is designated as Lump Sum, payment will be on a Lump Sum basis for Work satisfactorily completed in accordance with Plans and Specifications.

C. Allowances: Allowance items will be paid for as provided in Section 011000 Summary of Work. Funds authorized for Allowance work will not be released for contract payments unless additional work has been authorized in writing by Owner.

D. Payment for all work included in Contract Documents shall be included in lump sum or unit price or prices bid, and no direct or additional payments will be made for any incidental work.

E. Owner does not expressly, or by implication, agree, warrant, or represent in any manner, that actual amount of Work will correspond with amount shown or estimated and reserves right to increase or decrease amount of any class or portion of Work, to leave out entire Bid Item or Items, or to add work not included in Bid, when in its judgment such change is in best interest of Owner. No change in Work shall be

89


considered waiver of any other condition of Contract. No claim shall be made for anticipated profit, for loss of profit, for damages, or for extra payment whatever, except as otherwise expressly provided for in Contract Documents, because of any differences between amount of work actually done and estimated amount as set forth herein, or for elimination of extra Bid Items.

1.8 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Progress payments will be made monthly.

B. Schedule of Values:

1. Within thirty (30) calendar days from issuance of Notice of Award and prior to the Contractor's application for the first progress payment, the Contractor shall submit a detailed breakdown of its bid by scheduled Work items and/or activities, including coordination responsibilities and project record document responsibilities. The Contractor shall furnish such breakdown, of the total Contract Sum, by assigning dollar values (cost estimates) to each applicable Progress Schedule network activity, which cumulative sum equals the total Contract Sum. The format and detail of the breakdown shall be as directed by the Architect to facilitate and clarify future progress payments to Contractor for direct Contact Work. This breakdown shall be referred to as the Schedule of Values.

2. The Contractor's overhead, profit, insurance, cost of bonds and/or other financing, as well as "general conditions costs," (for example, site cleanup and maintenance, temporary roads and access, off site access roads, temporary power and lighting, security and the like), shall be prorated through all activities so that the sum of all the Schedule of Values line items equal the Contractor's total Contract Sum, less any allowances designated by the Architect.

3. The Architect will review the breakdown in conjunction with the Progress Schedule to ensure that the dollar amounts of this Schedule of Values are, in fact, fair market cost allocations for the Work items listed. Upon favorable review by the Architect, this Schedule of Values will be accepted for use by the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of fair market cost allocations.

4. Any attempt to increase the cost of early activities, that is, "front loading," will be rejected by the Owner, resulting in a complete reallocation of monies until such "front loading" is corrected. Repeated attempts at "front loading" may result in suspension or termination of the Work or refusal to process progress payments, until such time as the Schedule of Values is acceptable to the Owner.

C. Payment Requests:

1. On or before the 25th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect three (3) copies of a request for payment for the cost of the Work put in

90


place during the period from the [1st] day of the previous month to the [30th] day of the previous month. Such requests for progress payments shall be based upon Schedule of Values prices of all labor and materials incorporated in the Work up until midnight of the last day of that one month period, less the aggregate of previous payments. If Contractor is late submitting its payment request, that payment request may be processed at any time during the succeeding one month period, resulting in processing of Contractor's payment request being delayed for more than a day for day basis.

2. Payment requests may include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:

a. Material, equipment and labor incorporated into the Work, less any previous payments for the same;

b. Up to seventy-five percent (75%) of the cost of major equipment identified in paragraph 1.05.D above, if purchased and delivered to the site or stored off site, as may be approved by the Architect.

c. Up to fifty percent (50%) of the cost of materials identified in paragraph 1.05.D above specifically fabricated for the Project that are not yet incorporated into the Work.

3. Contractor shall, at the time any payment request is submitted, certify in writing the accuracy of the payment request and that Contractor has fulfilled all scheduling requirements of the Contract General Conditions (refer to AIA Document A201-1997, included in Part A of this book) and Section 013200, Construction Progress Documentation -Schedules and Reports, including updates and revisions. The certification shall be executed by a responsible officer of the Contractor.

4. No progress payment will be processed prior to Architect receiving all requested, acceptable schedule update information.

5. Each payment request shall list each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, including the Change Order Number, and a description of the work activities, consistent with the descriptions of original work activities. Contractor shall submit a monthly Change Order status log to Architect.

6. If Architect requires substantiating data, Contractor shall submit information requested by Architect, with cover letter identifying Project, payment request number and date, and detailed list of enclosures. Contractor shall submit one copy of substantiating data and cover letter for each copy Payment request submitted.

7. Monthly progress payments shall be made, based on total value of activities completed or partially completed, as determined by Owner with participation of Contractor, and based upon approved activity costs. Accumulated retainage will be shown as separate item in payment summary. If Contractor fails or refuses to participate in construction progress evaluation with Owner, Contractor shall not

91


receive current payment until Contractor has participated fully in providing construction progress information and schedule update information for Owner.

8. No progress payment will be processed prior to Architect receiving all requested, acceptable prevailing wage and certified payroll information.

D. Progress Payments:

1. Upon receiving Contractor's payment request, Architect will review the payment request and make necessary adjustments to percent of completion of each activity. One copy will be returned to Contractor with description of adjustments made. All parties will update percentage of completion values in the same manner, that is, express value of an accumulated percentage of completion to date.

2. The payment request may be reviewed by Architect, Architect/Engineer and/or inspectors, for the purpose of determining that the payment request is a proper payment request, and shall be rejected, revised or approved by the Architect pursuant to the cost breakdown prepared in accordance with Section 1.7B of this Section.

3. If it is determined that the payment request is not a proper payment request suitable for payment, Architect shall return it to the Contractor as soon as practicable, but no later than seven (7) days after receipt, together with a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the payment request is not proper.

4. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, if the Owner fails to make any progress payment within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted payment request from a contractor, the Owner shall pay interest to the Contractor equivalent to the legal rates set forth in subdivision (a) of Section 685.010 of the Code of Civil Procedure. The thirty (30) day period shall be reduced by the number of days by which Owner exceeds the seven (7) day return requirement set forth herein.

5. As soon as practicable after approval of each request for progress payment, Owner will pay to Contractor in manner provided by law, an amount equal to ninety percent (90%) of Architect's estimate, or a lesser amount if so provided in Contract Documents, provided that payments may at any time be withheld if, in judgment of Architect, Work is not proceeding in accordance with Contract, or Contractor is not complying with requirements of Contract.

6. Before any progress payment or final payment is made, the Contractor may be required to submit satisfactory evidence that Contractor is not delinquent in payments to employees subcontractors, suppliers, or creditors for labor and materials incorporated into Work.

92


7. Owner reserves and shall have the right to withhold payment for any equipment and/or specifically fabricated materials that, in the sole judgment of the Architect, is not adequately and properly protected against weather and/or damage, prior to or following incorporation into the Work.

8. Granting of progress payment or payments by Owner, or receipt thereof by Contractor, shall not be understood as constituting in any sense acceptance of Work or of any portion thereof, and shall in no way lessen liability of Contractor to replace unsatisfactory work or material, though unsatisfactory character of work or material may have been apparent or detected at time payment was made.

9. When Owner shall charge sum of money against Contractor under any provision of Contract, amount of charge shall be deducted and retained by Owner from amount of next succeeding progress payment or from any other monies due or that may become due Contractor under Contract. If, on completion or termination of Contract, such monies due Contractor are found insufficient to cover Owner's charges against him, Owner shall have right to recover balance from Contractor or Sureties.

1.9 RETENTION

A. Pursuant to provisions of Public Contract Code Section 22300, substitution of securities for any monies withheld under Contract to insure performance is permitted under following conditions:

1. At request and expense of Contractor, securities listed in Section 16430 of the Government Code, bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit, interest bearing demand deposit accounts, standby letters of credit, or any other security mutually agreed to by Contractor and Owner which are equivalent to the amount withheld under retention provisions of Contract shall be deposited with Controller or with a state or federally chartered bank in California, as the escrow agent, who shall then pay such monies to Contractor. Upon satisfactory completion of Contract, securities shall be returned to Contractor.

2. Alternatively, Contractor may request and the Owner shall make payment of retentions earned directly to the escrow agent at the expense of the Contractor. At the expense of the Contractor, the Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities and the Contractor shall receive the interest earned on the investments upon the same terms provided for in this Section for securities deposited by the Contractor. Upon satisfactory completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall receive from escrow agent all securities, interest, and payments received by the escrow agent from the Owner, pursuant to the terms of this Section. The Contractor shall pay to each subcontractor, not later than twenty (20) days after receipt of the payment, the respective amount of interest earned, net of costs attributed to retention withheld from each subcontractor, on the amount of retention withheld to insure the performance of the Contractor.

93


3. Contractor shall be beneficial owner of securities substituted for monies withheld and shall receive any interest thereon.

4. Contractor shall enter into escrow agreement with Controller as authorized under Public Contract Code Section 22300, specifying amount of securities to be deposited, terms and conditions of conversion to cash in case of default of Contractor, and termination of escrow upon completion of Contract.

1.10 FINAL PAYMENT

A. As soon as practicable after all required Work is completed in accordance with Contract, including Contractor maintenance after Final Acceptance, Owner will pay to Contractor, in manner provided by law, unpaid balance of contract price of Work, or whole contract price of Work if no progress payment has been made, determined in accordance with terms of Contract, less sums as may be lawfully retained under any provisions of Contract or by law.

B. Prior progress payments shall be subject to correction in the final payment. Architect's determination of amount due as final payment shall be final and conclusive evidence of amount of Work performed by Contractor under Contract, and shall be full measure of compensation to be received by Contractor.

C. Contractor and each assignee under an assignment in effect at time of final payment, and as a condition precedent to final payment, shall release Owner, its officers, agents, employees, Architect and all consultants from liabilities, obligations, and claims arising under Contract.

1.11 EFFECT OF PAYMENT

A. Payment will be made by Owner, based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment. Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has:

1. Made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of Work;

2. Reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures;

3. Reviewed copies of requisitions received from subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by Owner to substantiate Contractor's right to payment; or

4. Made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

2.0 PRODUCTS


94


3.0 EXECUTION


END OF SECTION

95


SECTION 012600 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the description of general procedural requirements for alterations, modifications and extras.



B. Section 012200, Unit Prices: Measurement and Payment

C. Section 012613, Requests For Information

1.3 GENERAL

A. Any change in scope of work or deviation from Drawings or Specifications shall be accomplished only when authorized in writing by Architect.

B. Changes in scope of Work or deviation from Drawings or Specifications may be initiated only by the Contractor or the Architect.

1. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting Requests For Information (RFI), Notice of Concealed or Unknown Conditions, or Notice of Hazardous Waste Conditions.

a. RFIs shall be submitted to seek clarification of Contract Documents.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for its costs to implement and administer RFIs throughout the Contract duration. Regardless of the number of RFIs submitted, Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation. Contractor shall be responsible for both the Santa Clara County Office of Education's and Architect's administrative costs for answering its RFIs where the answer could reasonably be found by reviewing the Contract Documents, as determined by Architect; such costs will be deducted from progress payments.

3. Architect may initiate changes by issuing a Supplemental Instruction.

4. Architect may initiate changes by issuing Requests For Proposal (RFP) to Contractor. Such RFPs will detail all proposed changes in the Work and request a quotation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Times from Contractor.

96


1.4 PROCEDURE

A. Contractor shall submit RFI to Architect. Architect shall respond by issuing a Clarification.

1. If Contractor is satisfied with the Clarification and does not request change in Contract Sum or Contract Times, then the Clarification shall be executed without a change.

2. If Contractor believes that the Clarification results in change in Contract Sum or Contract Times, Contractor shall notify Architect who may then deny request for change or issue RFP.

B. Contractor shall submit Notices of Concealed or Unknown Conditions to resolve unanticipated conditions incurred in the execution of the Work. If Architect determines that a change in Contract Sum or contract Times is justified, Architect shall issue RFP. Architect shall issue Supplemental Instruction to Contractor. Contractor shall not proceed with Supplemental Instruction until Architect approves it in writing.

1. If Contractor is satisfied with Supplemental Instruction and does not request change in Contract Sum or Contract Times, then Supplemental Instruction shall be executed without a Change Order.

2. If Contractor believes that Supplemental Instruction results in change in Contract Sum or Contract Times, Contractor shall notify Architect. Architect may then deny request for change, cancel Clarification or issue RFP.

C. Responses by recipients shall be within a reasonable time.

D. Contractor shall respond to Architect's RFP within fifteen (15) working days by furnishing a complete breakdown of costs of both credits and extras; itemizing materials, labor, taxes, overhead and profit. Subcontract work shall be so indicated.

E. Upon approval of RFP, Architect will issue a Change Order directing Contractor to proceed with extra work.

F. Payment shall be made as follows:

1. Change Orders which increase Contract Sum or Contract Times shall be included in next Contract Modification Form, signed by Architect, accepted by Contractor.

2. Payment shall be made for Change Order work along with other work in progress payment following completion of Change Order work. Partial completion of Change Order work shall be paid for that part completed during the period covered by the monthly payment request.

97


1.5 COST DETERMINATION

A. Total cost of extra work shall be the sum of labor costs, material costs, equipment rental costs and specialist costs as defined herein plus overhead and profit as allowed herein. This limit applies in all cases of claims for extra work, whether calculating Change Orders, RFPs, or calculating claims of all types, and applies even in the event of fault, negligence, strict liability, or tort claims of all kinds, including misrepresentation, concealment, strict liability or negligence. No other costs arising out of or connected with the performance of extra work, of any nature, may be recovered by Contractor. No special, incidental or consequential damages may be claimed or recovered against Santa Clara County Office of Education, its representatives or agents, whether arising from breach of contract, negligence or strict liability, unless specifically authorized in the Contract Documents.

B. Overhead and Profit:

1. Overhead shall be as defined in Article 1.8, below.

2. Overhead and profit on labor for extra work shall be 15 percent (15%).

3. Overhead and profit on materials for extra work shall be 15 percent (15%).

4. Overhead and profit on equipment rental for extra work shall be 15 percent (15%).

5. When extra work is performed by a first tier subcontractor, Contractor shall receive a 10 percent (10%) markup on subcontractors' total costs of extra work.

6. When extra work is performed by a lower tier subcontractor, Contractor shall receive a 10 percent (10%) markup on the lower tier subcontractors' total costs of extra work. Contractor and first tier subcontractors shall divide the markup as mutually agreed.

7. Credit for overhead and profit on deleted work shall be 5% for the Contractor actually performing the work plus applicable reductions insurance and bond cost.

C. Taxes:

1. Santa Clara County Sales Tax should be included.

2. Federal and Excise Tax shall not be included.

D. County-Operated Equipment: When County-operated equipment is used to perform extra work, Contractor will be paid for equipment and operator as follows:

1. Payment for equipment will be made in accordance with Paragraph 1.5D, below.

98


2. Payment for cost of labor will be made at no more than rates of such labor established by State of California Department of Industrial Relations schedule of Prevailing Wages at the time such work was performed, whether or not the labor was actually covered by such an agreement.

1.6 COST BREAKDOWN

A. Contractor to submit complete breakdown cost proposal identifying labor hours x rate, material quantity x unit price, equipment rental hours x rate and subcontract cost proposals. Markups shall be shown as a separate line-item on the proposal in accordance with Article 1.4B, above. Subcontractors and vendors shall also provide cost breakdowns in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and this Section.

B. Labor: Contractor will be paid cost of labor for workers (including forepersons when authorized by Architect) used in actual and direct performance of extra work. Labor rate, whether employer is Contractor, subcontractor or other forces, will be sum of following:

1. Actual Wages - Actual wages paid shall include any employer payments to or on behalf of workers for health and welfare, pension, vacation and similar purposes.

2. Labor Surcharge - Payments imposed by Santa Clara County Office of Education, County, State and Federal laws and ordinances, and other payments made to, or on behalf of, workers, other than actual wages as defined in subparagraph 1 above, such as taxes and insurances. Labor surcharge shall be as set forth in California Department of Industrial Relations labor rate classification schedule which is in effect on date upon which extra work is accomplished and which schedule is incorporated herein by reference as though fully set forth herein.

C. Material: Only materials furnished by Contractor and necessarily used in performance of extra work will be paid for. Cost of such materials will be cost, including sales tax, to purchaser (Contractor, subcontractor or other forces) from supplier thereof, except as the following are applicable:

1. If cash or trade discount by actual supplier is offered or available to purchaser, it shall be credited to Santa Clara County Office of Education notwithstanding fact that such discount may not have been taken.

2. For materials salvaged upon completion of extra work, salvage value of materials shall be deducted from cost, less discount, of materials.

3. If cost of a material is, in opinion of Architect, excessive, then cost of material shall be deemed to be lowest current wholesale price at which material is available in quantities concerned delivered to Site, less any discounts as provided in subparagraph 1 above.

99


D. Equipment Rental: For Contractor or subcontractor-owned equipment, payment will be made at rental rates listed for equipment in California Department of Transportation official equipment rental rate schedule which is in effect on date upon which extra work is accomplished and which schedule is incorporated herein by reference as though fully set forth herein. For rented equipment, payment will be made based on actual rental invoices. Equipment used on extra work shall be of proper size and type. If, however, equipment of unwarranted size or type and cost is used, cost of use of equipment shall be calculated at rental rate for equipment of proper size and type. Rental rates paid shall be deemed to cover cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs and maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, and all incidentals. Unless otherwise specified, manufacturer's ratings, and manufacturer approved modifications, shall be used to classify equipment for determination of applicable rental rates. Individual pieces of equipment or tools not listed in said publication and having a replacement value of one hundred dollars ($100) or less, whether or not consumed by use, shall be considered to be small tools and no payment will be made therefor as payment is included in payment for labor. Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns.

1. For equipment on Site, rental time to be paid for equipment shall be time equipment is in operation on extra work being performed or on standby as approved by Architect. The following shall be used in computing rental time of equipment:

a. When hourly rates are listed, less than thirty (30) minutes of operation shall be considered to be one-half (1/2) hour of operation.

b. When daily rates are listed, less than four (4) hours of operation shall be considered to be one-half (1/2) day of operation.

2. For equipment which must be brought to Site to be used exclusively on extra work, cost of transporting equipment to Site and its return to its original location shall be determined as follows:

a. Santa Clara County Office of Education will pay for costs of loading and unloading equipment.

b. Cost of transporting equipment in low bed trailers shall not exceed hourly rates charged by established haulers.

c. Cost of transporting equipment shall not exceed applicable minimum established rates of California Public Utilities Commission.

d. Payment for transporting, and loading and unloading equipment as above provided will not be made if equipment is used on Work in any other way than upon extra work.

100


3. Rental period shall begin at time equipment is unloaded at Site of extra work and terminate at end of day on which Architect directs Contractor to discontinue use of equipment. Excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, unless equipment is used to perform extra work on such days, rental time to be paid per day shall be four (4) hours for zero (0) hours of operation, six (6) hours for four (4) hours of operation and eight (8) hours for eight (8) hours of operation, time being prorated between these parameters. Hours to be paid for equipment which is operated less than eight (8) hours due to breakdowns, shall not exceed eight (8) less number of hours equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns.

E. Work Performed by Special Forces or Other Special Services: When Architect and Contractor, by agreement, determine that special service or item of extra work cannot be performed by forces of Contractor or those of any subcontractors, service or extra work item may be performed by specialist. Invoices for service or item of extra work on basis of current market price thereof may be accepted without complete itemization of labor, material, and equipment rental costs when it is impracticable and not in accordance with established practice of special service industry to provide complete itemization. In those instances wherein Contractor is required to perform extra work necessitating a fabrication or machining process in a fabrication or machine shop facility away from Site, charges for that portion of extra work performed in such facility may, by agreement, be accepted as a specialist billing. Architect must be notified in advance of all off site work. To specialist invoice price, less credit to Santa Clara County Office of Education for any cash or trade discount offered or available, whether or not such discount may have been taken, will be added 15 percent (15%) in lieu of overhead and profit provided in Paragraph 1.4B, above.

F. Deleted Work and Credits: When a change request, RFI, RFP, or Construction Change Directive includes both additive and deductive work, the total mark-up shall be on the net sum of the change.

1.7 FORCE-ACCOUNT

A. If it is impracticable because of nature of work, or for any other reason, to fix an increase or decrease in price definitely in advance, a Construction Change Directive may be issued in accordance with Article 7.3 Construction Change Directives from General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-1997 (included in Part A of this book) to fix a maximum price which shall not under any circumstances be exceeded, and subject to such limitation, such alteration, modification or extra shall be paid for at actual necessary cost as determined by Santa Clara County Office of Education, which cost shall be determined pursuant to Article 1.4, above, and shall be known as Force-Account work.

B. Whenever any Force-Account work is in progress, definite price for which has not been agreed on in advance, Contractor shall report to Architect each day in writing in detail amount and cost of labor and material used, and any other expense incurred in Force-Account work on preceding work day, and no claim for compensation for Force-Account work will be allowed unless report shall have been made.

101


C. Above described methods of determining payment for work and materials shall not apply to performance of work or furnishings of material which, in judgment of Architect, may properly be classified under items for which prices are established in Contract.

1.8 FURNISHED MATERIALS (by Santa Clara County Office of Education)

A. Santa Clara County Office of Education reserves right to furnish materials as it deems advisable, and Contractor shall have no claims for costs and overhead and profit on such materials.

1.9 OVERHEAD DEFINED

A. The following constitutes charges that are included in overhead for all contract modifications, including Force-Account work:

1. Drawings: field drawings, shop drawings, etc. including submissions of drawings.

2. Routine field inspection of work proposed.

3. General Superintendence.

4. General administration and preparation of change orders.

5. Computer services.

6. Reproduction services.

7. Salaries of project engineer, project manager, superintendent, timekeeper, storekeeper and secretaries.

8. Janitorial services.

9. Temporary on-site facilities.

a. Offices

b. Telephones

c. Plumbing

d. Electrical: Power, lighting

e. Platforms

f. Fencing, and so on.

g. Home office expenses.

h. Procurement and use of vehicles and fuel used coincidentally in base bid work.

i. Surveying

102


j. Estimating

k. Protection of work

l. Final cleanup

m. Other incidental work

1.10 RECORDS AND CERTIFICATION

A. Force-Account (cost reimbursement) charges shall be recorded daily upon Cost Breakdown for Contract Modification Form obtained from or approved by the Architect. Contractor or authorized representative shall complete and sign form. Architect or Inspector shall sign form indicating approval of labor and equipment hours and material used only. Contract Modification Form shall provide names and classifications of workers and hours worked by each, itemize materials used, and also list size type and identification number of equipment, and hours operated, and shall indicate work done by specialists.

B. No payment for Force-Account work shall be made until Contractor submits original invoices substantiating materials and specialist charges.

C. Santa Clara County Office of Education shall have the right to audit all records in possession of Contractor relating to activities covered by Contractor's claims for modification of Contract, including Force-Account work, as set forth in Article 7.3 Construction Change Directives from General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-1997 (included in Part A of this book).

D. Further, Santa Clara County Office of Education shall have right to audit, inspect, or copy all records maintained in connection with this Contract, including financial records, in possession of Contractor relating to any transaction or activity occurring or arising out of, or by virtue of, Contract. If Contractor is a joint venture, right of Santa Clara County Office of Education shall apply collaterally to same extent to records of joint venture sponsor, and of each individual joint venture member.

2.0 PRODUCTS


3.0 EXECUTION


END OF SECTION

103


104


SECTION 012613 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the procedures to be followed by the Contractor upon discovery of any apparent conflicts, omissions, or errors in the contract documents, or upon having any questions concerning interpretation.

1.2 PROCEDURES

A. Notification by Contractor: Should the Contractor discover conflicts, omissions, or errors in the contract documents, or have any questions concerning interpretation or clarification of the contract documents, or if it appears to the contractor that work to be done or any matter relative thereto are not sufficiently detailed or explained in the contract documents, then, before proceeding with the work affected, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect in writing and request interpretation, clarification, or additional detailed instructions concerning the work. The Contractor shall ask for any clarification or request for information immediately upon discovery, but no less than fifteen (15) days prior to the start date of the activities related to the clarification, based on the latest updated version of the accepted contract schedule.

B. Form: The Contractor shall submit all requests for clarification and/or additional information in writing to the Architect using the Request For Information (RFI) form provided by the Architect.

C. The Contractor will number RFIs consecutively with the date of issue, except for reissuance of a respective RFI in which the subscript a, b, c, and so on, will be added until the RFI is resolved.

D. Response Time: The Architect, whose decision will be final and conclusive, shall resolve such questions and issue instruction to the Contractor within a reasonable amount of time, but no less than 14 calendar days. In some cases, this time may need to be lengthened or shortened for emergency situations as mutually agreed upon by all parties. Should the Contractor proceed with the work affected before receipt of a response from the Architect within the response time described above, any portion of the work which is not done in accordance with the Architect's interpretation, clarifications, instructions, or decisions subject to removal or replacement and the Contractor shall be responsible for all losses.

E. Reason for Submission: The Contractor may submit RFIs if one of the following conditions occur:

1. The Contractor discovers an unforeseen condition or circumstance that is not described in the contract documents.

105


2. The Contractor discovers an apparent conflict or discrepancy between portions of the contract documents and appears to be inconsistent or is not reasonably inferred from the intent of the contract documents.

3. The Contractor discovers what appears to be an omission from the contract documents that cannot be reasonably inferred from the intent of the contract documents.

F. Rejections: RFIs will not be recognized or accepted if in the opinion of the Architect one of the following conditions exists:

1. The Contract submits an RFI as a submittal.

2. The Contractor submits the RFI under the pretense of a contract documents discrepancy or omission without thoroughly reviewing the documents.

3. The Contractor submits the RFI in a manner that suggests that specific portions of the contract documents are assumed to be excluded, or taken as an isolated portion of the contract documents in part rather than whole.

4. The Contractor submits an RFI in an untimely manner without proper coordination and scheduling of work or related trades.

G. Subject: Each RFI shall be limited to one subject.

H. Additional Detailed Instructions: The Architect may furnish additional detailed written instructions to further explain the work, and such instructions shall be a part of the contract documents. Should additional detailed instructions in the opinion of the Contractor constitute work in excess of the scope of the contract the Contractor shall submit notification immediately and written notification thereof to the Architect no more than seven calendar days following receipt of such instruction, and in any event prior to the commencement of work thereon. The Architect will then consider such notice, and if the Architect considers it justified, the Architect's instructions will be revised or a proposed change order will be issued. The Contractor shall have no claim for additional compensation or extension of the schedule because of any such additional instructions unless the Contractor provides the Architect written notice thereof within the time frame specified above. In addition, the Contractor shall within 15 days from the date of notification provide detailed justification and analysis as well as compete pricing and schedule CPM network analysis to support any request for time extension. For more details, see Article 7 Changes in the Work from General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-1997 (Part A of this book).

2.0 PRODUCTS


3.0 EXECUTION

106



END OF SECTION

107


SECTION 013113 - PROJECT COORDINATION

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Coordinate the Work; do not delegate the responsibility for coordination to any Subcontractor.

1. Resolve differences or disputes concerning coordination, interference, or extent of Work of the various Sections.

2. The Contractor's decisions regarding work by subcontractors, if consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be final.

B. Coordinate Work to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements.

C. Perform and complete checking and coordination before commencing Work in the affected areas.

D. Verify characteristics of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate Work having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connection to, and placing such equipment in service.

E. Provide basic layouts of grid lines and station points on subfloors as necessary to facilitate coordination and layout of partitions and Work at and above ceilings.

F. Make provisions for accommodating Work to be provided by others.

1.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare large-scale coordination drawings before beginning fabrication or delivery of materials and equipment to the job site.

1. Drawings shall clearly indicate coordination of mechanical, electrical, and equipment installations with structural and architectural elements.

B. Keep copies of coordination drawings at the job site.

C. The Architect will verify that coordination drawings have been made, but no review of the drawings will be made.

1.3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

108


A. Use coordination drawings of mechanical and electrical Work, together with Shop Drawings and layout drawings of affected Work to check; coordinate and integrate the Work to prevent interferences.

B. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical Work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits is diagrammatic only; make runs parallel with lines of building.

D. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installation, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated; coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

2.0 PRODUCTS


3.0 EXECUTION


END OF SECTION

109


SECTION 013119 - PROJECT MEETINGS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to commencement of Work, a preconstruction conference will be held to discuss procedures to be followed during the progress of the Work.

1. The preconstruction conference will be held at a location designated by the Architect.

B. Attending the conference shall be:

1. Santa Clara County Office of Education's representatives.

2. Architect's representatives.

3. Santa Clara County Office of Education's consultants.

4. Architect's subconsultants.

5. Contractor's representatives.

6. Contractor's superintendent.

7. Designated major Subcontractors.

8. Others requested by the Architect.

1.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Weekly progress meetings will be held throughout the progress of the Work; location shall be in Architect's field office.

B. The Architect will prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes and distribute copies within three (3) work days to the Architect, meeting participants, and those affected.

C. Attendance and Participation: Project superintendent, Santa Clara County Office of Education, Architect, Architect's subconsultants, Santa Clara County Office of Education's consultants, and major subcontractors as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

110


D. Suggested Agenda: Review of Work progress, status of progress CPM schedule and adjustments, delivery schedules, submittal status report, RFI status report, maintenance of quality standards, pending changes, and substitutions.

E. Special Meetings: Schedule and administer other meetings as required by the progress of the Work and to review provisions and tests specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

1. Schedule special meetings when so requested by the Architect.

1.3 BILLING MEETINGS

A. As part of the last progress meeting each month, schedule and hold a billing meeting, with the Architect in attendance.

1. Purpose of billing meeting is for agreeing on the percentage of Work completed to that date and to establish the sum to be requested in the Application for Payment.

B. Prepare an itemized draft of the month's proposed billing for review at the meeting.

1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION/APPLICATION MEETINGS

A. Meetings to review installation and application shall be scheduled a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior to the start of installations and applications.

1. Attending shall be Project superintendent, Santa Clara County Office of Education, Architect, manufacturers' representatives and installers of products involved, other installers whose Work may affect or be affected by the Work to be reviewed, and Testing Laboratory Inspector.

B. Review in detail the Contract Documents and manufacturers' requirements, Specifications, installation drawings and details, and Drawings and Details of affected Work.

1. Resolve discovered and anticipated conflicts, incompatibilities, and inadequacies at the conference.

C. Review in detail Project conditions, schedules, construction sequence, requirements for applications and qualities of completed applications, and protection of adjacent Work and property.

D. Review in detail means of protecting the completed applications during the remainder of the construction period.

1.5 SCHEDULE APPROVAL MEETINGS

111


A. Prior to approval of the CPM schedule, the Architect may require that the Contractor and its Subcontractors attend meetings to ascertain information for approval of the CPM schedule.

B. This information may include, but will not be limited to, productivity, manpower loading, equipment planning, activity durations, logic, cost loading, and other pertinent matters.

C. Attending shall be the Contractor, Subcontractors as appropriate, suppliers as appropriate, and others as appropriate.

2.0 PRODUCTS


3.0 EXECUTION


END OF SECTION

112


SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION: SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scheduling of Work under this Contract shall be performed by Contractor in accordance with requirements of this Section.

B. Upon Award of Contract, Contractor shall immediately commence development of the Schedule to ensure compliance with schedule submittal requirements.

C. Contract schedule shall be based on and incorporate Contract milestone and completion dates specified in Contract Documents.

D. Overall time of completion and time of completion for each milestone shown on Contract schedule shall adhere to times specified in the Contract Special Provisions.

1. The Architect is not required to accept an earlier (advanced) schedule.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation for any field or home office overhead in event agreement is not reached on an earlier (advanced) schedule and Contractor completes its Work, for whatever reason, beyond completion date shown in earlier (advanced) schedule.

3. A schedule showing the work completed in less than the Contract time, which has been accepted by the Architect, shall be considered to have Project Float. The Project Float is the time between the scheduled completion of the work and Contract Substantial Completion.

4. Project Float is a resource available to both the Architect and the Contractor.

E. Contract schedule shall be basis for evaluating job progress, payment requests, and time extension requests. Responsibility for developing Contract CPM schedule and monitoring actual progress as compared to schedule rests with Contractor.

F. Failure of Contract schedule to include any element of the Work or any inaccuracy in Contract Schedule will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for accomplishing the Work in accordance with the Contract.

G. Float Ownership: Neither the Santa Clara County Office of Education nor the Contractor owns float.

113


1. The Project owns the float. As such, liability for delay of the Substantial Completion Date rests with the party whose actions, last in time, actually cause delay to the Substantial Completion.

a. For example, if Party A uses some, but not all of the float and Party B later uses remainder of the float as well as additional time beyond the float, Party B shall be liable for the time that represents a delay to the Substantial Completion Date.

b. Under this scenario, Party A would not be responsible for the time since it did not consume all of the float and additional float remained; therefore, the Substantial Completion Date was unaffected.

H. Progress Schedule shall be the basis for evaluating job progress, payment requests, and time extension requests. Responsibility for developing Contract schedule and monitoring actual progress as compared to Progress Schedule rests with Contractor.

I. Failure of Progress Schedule to include any element of the Work or any inaccuracy in Progress Schedule will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for accomplishing the Work in accordance with the Contract. Santa Clara County Office of Education's acceptance of Schedule shall be for its use in monitoring and evaluating job progress, payment requests, and time extension requests, and shall not, in any manner, impose a duty of care upon Santa Clara County Office of Education, or act to relieve Contractor of its responsibility for means and methods of construction.

1.2 ORIGINAL CPM SCHEDULE

A. Within thirty (30) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed date, submit a detailed proposed Original CPM Schedule presenting an orderly and realistic plan for completion of the Work, in conformance with requirements as specified herein.

B. Contract schedule shall furnish or comply with following requirements:

1. Time-scaled CPM schedule.

2. No activity on schedule shall have duration longer than fifteen (15) workdays, with exception of submittal, approval, fabrication and procurement activities, unless otherwise approved by the Architect.

a. Activity durations shall be total number of actual work days required to perform that activity excluding consideration of weather impact on completion of that activity.

3. Procurement of major equipment, through receipt and inspection at jobsite, identified as a separate activity.

4. County-furnished materials and equipment, if any, identified as separate activities.

114


5. Dependencies (or relationships) between activities.

6. Processing/approval of submittals and shop drawings for all Contract-required material and equipment. Activities that are dependent on submittal acceptance or material delivery shall not be scheduled to start earlier than expected acceptance or delivery dates.

a. The duration for review and approval of submittals and shop drawings shall be as specified in Section 013300, Submittal Procedures. Contractor shall be responsible for all impacts resulting from resubmittal of shop drawings and submittals.

7. Twenty (20) workdays for developing punch list(s), completion of punch list items, and final clean-up for the Work or any designated portion thereof.

a. No other activities shall be scheduled during this period.

8. Interface with the Work of other contractors (and agencies such, as but not limited to, utility companies).

9. Show detailed Subcontractor Work activities.

10. Activity durations shall be in Work days.

C. Adjustments to Original CPM Schedule: Within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of the Architect's response to the Contractor's Original CPM Schedule, the Contractor shall have adjusted the Original CPM Schedule submittal to address all review comments and resubmit for the Architects review.

1. The Architect, within ten (10) calendar days from date that Contractor submitted the revised schedule, will either (1) accept schedule as submitted, or (2) advise Contractor in writing to review any part or parts of schedule which either do not meet Contract requirements or are unsatisfactory for the Architect to monitor Project's progress, resources and status or evaluate monthly payment request by Contractor.

2. The Architect may accept schedule with conditions. At the first monthly meeting the CPM schedule update shall be revised to correct deficiencies identified.

3. When schedule is accepted, it shall be considered as the "Original CPM Schedule" which will then be immediately updated to reflect the current status of the work.

4. The Architect reserves right to require the Contractor to adjust, add to, or clarify any portion of schedule which may later be discovered to be insufficient for monitoring of Work or approval of partial payment requests. No additional compensation will be provided for such adjustments, additions, or clarifications.

115


D. Acceptance: Acceptance of Contractor's schedule by the Architect will be based solely upon schedule's compliance with Contract requirements.

1. By way of Contractor assigning activity durations and proposing sequence of Work, Contractor agrees to utilize sufficient and necessary management and other resources to perform work in accordance with the schedule.

2. Upon submittal of schedule update, updated schedule shall be considered "current" CPM schedule.

3. Submission of Contractor's schedule to the Architect shall not relieve Contractor of total responsibility for scheduling, sequencing, and pursuing Work to comply with requirements of Contract Documents, including adverse effects such as delays resulting from ill-timed work.

E. Submittal of Original CPM Schedule, and subsequent schedule updates, shall be understood to be Contractor's representation that the Schedule meets requirements of Contract Documents and that Work shall be executed in sequence indicated on the schedule.

F. Contractor shall distribute Original CPM Schedule to Subcontractors for review and acceptance.

1.3 MONTHLY CPM SCHEDULE UPDATE SUBMITTALS

A. Following acceptance of Contractor's Original CPM Schedule, Contractor shall monitor progress of Work and adjust schedule each month to reflect actual progress and any anticipated changes to planned activities.

1. Each schedule update submitted shall be complete, including all information requested for the Original CPM Schedule submittal.

2. Each update shall continue to show all work activities including those already completed.

3. These completed activities shall accurately reflect "as built" information by indicating when activities were actually started and completed.

4. Within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of above noted update, the Architect will either accept or reject monthly schedule update submittal.

a. If accepted, percent complete shown in monthly update will be basis for Application for Payment by the Contractor. The schedule update shall be submitted as part of the Contractor's Application for Payment.

b. If rejected, update shall be corrected and resubmitted by Contractor before the Application for Payment is submitted.

116


1.4 SCHEDULE REVISIONS

A. Updating the Schedule to reflect actual progress shall not be considered revisions to the Schedule. Since scheduling is a dynamic process, revisions to activity durations and sequences are expected on a monthly basis.

B. If the Contractor's revision is not accepted by the Architect, and the Contractor disagrees with the Architect's position, the Contractor has seven (7) calendar days from receipt of the Architect's letter, to provide a written narrative explaining its position. If the Architect still does not agree with the Contractor's position, the Architect's position shall govern, and the schedule shall be updated in accordance with the Architect's request. The Contractor's failure to respond in writing within seven (7) calendar days shall be contractually interpreted as acceptance of the Architect's position, and the Contractor waives its rights to subsequently dispute or file a claim regarding the Architect's position.

C. At the Architect's discretion, the Contractor can be required to provide subcontractor certifications for revisions affecting said subcontractors.

1.5 RECOVERY SCHEDULE

A. If the Schedule Update shows a substantial completion date fourteen (14) calendar days beyond the Contract Substantial Completion date, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect the proposed revisions to recover the lost time within seven (7) calendar days. As part of this submittal, the Contractor shall provide a written narrative for each revision made to recapture the lost time.

B. If the Contractor's revisions are not accepted by the Architect, the Contractor shall follow the procedures in Paragraph 1.4, above.

C. At the Architect's discretion, the Contractor can be required to provide subcontractor certifications for revisions affecting said subcontractors.

1.6 TIME IMPACT EVALUATION FOR CHANGE ORDERS, AND OTHER DELAYS

A. When the Contractor is directed to proceed with changed work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit, within fourteen (14) calendar days from the direction to proceed, a Time Impact Evaluation (TIE) which includes both a written narrative and a schedule diagram depicting how the changed work affects other schedule activities. The schedule diagram shall show how the Contractor proposes to incorporate the changed work in the schedule, and how it impacts the current schedule update critical path. The Contractor is also responsible for requesting time extensions based on the TIE's impact on the critical path. The diagram must be tied to the main sequence of schedule activities to enable the Santa Clara County Office of Education to evaluate the impact of changed work to the scheduled critical path.

B. The Contractor shall be required to comply with the requirements of Paragraph 1.6A, above, for all types of delays such as, but not limited to, Contractor/Subcontractor

117


delays, adverse weather delays, strikes, procurement delays, fabrication delays, and so on.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the preparation of Time Impact Evaluations, and the process of incorporating them into the current schedule update.

D. Once agreement has been reached on a TIE, the Contract Times will be adjusted accordingly. If agreement is not reached on a TIE, the Contract Times may be extended in an amount the Santa Clara County Office of Education allows, and the Contractor may submit a claim for additional time claimed by contractor.

1.7 TIME EXTENSIONS

A. The Contractor is responsible for requesting time extensions for time impacts that, in the opinion of the Contractor, impact the critical path of the current schedule update. Notice of time impacts shall be given in accordance with Article 4 and 8 of the Contract General Conditions (refer to AIA Document A201-1997, included in Part A of this book).

B. Where an event for which the Santa Clara County Office of Education is responsible impacts the projected Substantial Completion date, the Contractor shall provide a written mitigation plan, including a schedule diagram, which explains how (for example, increase crew size, overtime, and so on) the impact can be mitigated. The Contractor shall also include a detailed cost breakdown of the labor, equipment and material the Contractor would expend to mitigate the Santa Clara County Office of Education caused time impact. The Contractor shall submit its mitigation plan to the Santa Clara County Office of Education within fourteen (14) calendar days from the date of discovery of said impact. The Contractor is responsible for the cost to prepare the mitigation plan.

C. Failure to request time, provide TIE, or provide the required mitigation plan will result in Contractor waiving its right to a time extension and cost to mitigate the delay.

D. No time will be granted under this Contract for cumulative effect of changes.

E. The Santa Clara County Office of Education will not be obligated to consider any time extension request unless requirements of Contract Documents are complied with.

F. Failure of the Contractor to perform in accordance with the current schedule update shall not be excused by submittal of time extension requests.

G. If the Contractor does not submit a TIE within the required fourteen (14) calendar days for any issue, it is mutually agreed that the Contractor does not require a time extension for said issue.

118


H. Santa Clara County Office of Education will grant day-for-day non-compensable time extensions for delays to the critical path due to inclement weather.

2.0 PRODUCTS


3.0 EXECUTION


END OF SECTION

119


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes general requirements for submittals for the work specified in these Contract Documents.

1. Procedures.

2. Safety Plan.

3. Progress Schedule.

4. Shop Drawings.

5. Samples.

6. Quality Control Submittals.

a. Design Data.

b. Test Reports.

c. Certificates.

d. Manufacturers’ Instructions.

7. Operations and Maintenance Manuals.

8. Project Record Documents.



B. Section 012200, Unit Prices: Measurement and Payment

C. Section 012600, Modification Procedures

D. Section 017700, Contract Closeout Procedures

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Provide at minimum the following quantity of submittals:

1. Five (5) sets of Submittals and Shop Drawings (two sets will be returned to Contractor).

120


2. Two (2) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.B. Submit at own expense Schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample Submittals, Safety

Plans, Progress Schedule, Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, Operations and Maintenance Manuals, and Project Record Documents required by the Contract Documents.

C. Transmit each item with a standard letter of transmittal in form approved by Architect.

D. Identify project, Contractor, subcontractor, major supplier, pertinent drawing sheet and data number, and specification Section number as appropriate. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

E. Where manufacturer's standard drawings or data sheets are used, they shall be marked clearly show those portions of the data which are applicable to this project.

F. Submit Shop Drawings, Samples and other submittals to Architect for review and approval in accordance with accepted Contract Schedule. If no such schedule is agreed upon, then all Shop Drawing, Samples and product data submittals shall be completed within thirty (30) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed from the County.The data shown on the Shop Drawings shall be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Architect the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Architect to review the information for the limited purposes specified below. Samples shall be identified clearly as to material, supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for which it is intended and otherwise as Architect may require to enable Architect to review the submittal. The number of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications.

G. At the time of each submission, Contractor shall give Architect specific written notice of all variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, and the reasons therefore. This written notice shall be in a written communication separate from the submittal. In addition, Contractor shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Architect for review and approval of each such variation.If the County accepts deviation, the County shall issue appropriate Contract Modification.

H. Submittal coordination and verification is responsibility of Contractor; this responsibility shall not be delegated in whole or in part to subcontractors or suppliers. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified:

a. All field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto;

b. All materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work;

121


c. All information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities and of means, methods techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

I. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

J. Contractor's submission to Architect of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal will constitute Contractor's representation that it has satisfied its obligations under the Contract Documents, and as set forth immediately above, with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal.

K. Designation of work "by others," if shown in submittals, shall mean that work will be responsibility of Contractor rather than subcontractor or supplier who has prepared submittals.

L. After review by Architect of each of Contractor's submittals, one of set of duplicates of material will be returned to Contractor with actions defined as follows:

1. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN - Accepted subject to its compatibility with future submittals and additional partial submittals for portions of the work not covered in this submittal. Does not constitute approval or deletion of specified or required items not shown on the submittal.

2. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED (NO RESUBMISSIONS REQUIRED) - Same as 1 above, except that minor corrections as noted shall be made by Contractor.

3. AMEND AND RESUBMIT - Rejected because of major inconsistencies or errors which shall be resolved or corrected by Contractor prior to subsequent review by Architect.

4. REJECTED - RESUBMIT - Submitted material does not conform to Plans and Specifications in major respect, that is, wrong size, model, capacity, or material.

M. It is considered reasonable that Contractor shall make a complete and acceptable submittal at least by second submission. The County reserves the right to deduct monies from payments due Contractor to cover additional costs of Architect's review beyond the second submission. Illegible submittals will be rejected and returned to Contractor for resubmission.

N. Favorable review will not constitute acceptance by the County or Architect of any responsibility for the accuracy, coordination and completeness of the submittals.

O. Accuracy, coordination, and completeness of Submittals shall be sole responsibility of Contractor, including responsibility to backcheck comments, corrections, and modifications from the County's or Architect's review before fabrications. Submittals

122


may be prepared by Contractor, subcontractors, or suppliers, but Contractor shall ascertain that submittals meet requirements of Contract Documents, while conforming to structural space and access conditions at point of installation. Architect's review will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Favorable review of submittal, method of work, or information regarding materials and equipment Contractor proposes to furnish shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as assumption of risks or liability by Architect or the County, or any officer or employee thereof, and Contractor shall have no claim under Contract on account of failure or partial failure or inefficiency or insufficiency of any plan or method of work or material and equipment so accepted. Favorable review shall be considered to mean merely that Project Management or the County has no objection to Contractor using, upon his own full responsibility, plan or method of work proposed, or furnishing materials and equipment proposed.

P. Architect's review will not extend the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

Q. Submit complete initial submittal for those items where required by individual

specification Sections. Complete submittal shall contain sufficient data to demonstrate that items comply with Specifications, shall meet minimum requirements for submissions cited in technical specifications, shall include motor data and seismic anchorage certifications, where required, and shall include necessary revisions required for equipment other than first named. If Contractor submits incomplete initial submittal, when complete submittal is required, submittal may be returned to Contractor without review.

R. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to copy, conform and distribute reviewed submittals in sufficient numbers for Contractor's files, subcontractors and vendors.

S. After Architect review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required. Identify changes made since previous submittal.

1. Begin no fabrication or work which require submittals until return of submittals not requiring resubmittal.

2. Normally, submittals will be processed and returned to Contractor within [15] working days of receipt.

T. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

123


1.4 SAFETY PLAN

A. Submit two (2) copies of Safety Plan specific to this Contract to Architect within fifteen (15) calendar days after Start Date of the Contract Times.

B. (1) copy of accepted Safety Plan will be returned to Contractor.

C. No on-site work shall be started until Safety Plan has been reviewed and accepted by Architect and/or Local Building Official. Acceptance of Safety Plan shall not affect Contractor's responsibility for maintaining a safe working place and instituting safety programs in connection with project.

1.5 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. See Section 013200, Construction Progress Documentation: Schedules and Reports, for schedule and report requirements.

B. Submit three (3) print copies of schedule at each of the following times:

1. Original CPM (Critical Path Method) Schedule within thirty (30) days of the Notice to Proceed.

2. Adjustments to the CPM Schedule as required.

3. CPM Schedule updates monthly, five (5) days prior to monthly progress meeting.

C. Progress Schedules and Reports shall be submitted on floppy disks in addition to hard copies specified above.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Minimum Sheet Size: 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. All others: Multiples of 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, 34 inches by 44 inches maximum.

B. For 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch and 11 inch by 17 inch sheets, submit number of copies which Contractor requires, plus [3] copies which will be retained by Architect.

C. For 17 inch by 22 inch through 34 inch by 44 inch sheets, submit 1 reproducible transparency and [3] prints. After review, reproduce and distribute.

D. Original sheet or reproducible transparency will be marked with Architect's review comments and returned to Contractor.

E. Mark each copy to identify applicable Products, models, options, and other data; supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to Work.

F. Include manufacturers' installation instructions when required by specification Section.

124


1.7 SAMPLES

A. Submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect's selection.

B. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work.

C. Include identification on each sample, giving full information.

D. Submit two (2) samples unless otherwise specified. One (1) will be retained.

E. Sizes: Unless otherwise specified, provide the following:

1. Paint Chips: Manufacturers' standard.

2. Flat or Sheet Products: Minimum 6 inches square, maximum 12 inches square.

3. Linear Products: Minimum 6 inches, maximum 12 inches long.

4. Bulk Products: Minimum 1 pint, maximum 1 gallon.

F. Full size samples may be used in Work upon approval.

G. Mock-ups:

1. Erect field samples and mock-ups at Project site in accordance with requirements of specification Sections.

2. Modify or make additional field samples and mock-ups as required to provide appearance and finishes approved by Architect.

3. Approved field samples and mock-ups may be used in Work upon approval.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS

A. Design Data: N/A.

B. Test Reports: Three (3) copies. One (1) copy will be marked with Architect's review comments and returned to Contractor.

1. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

2. Reports may be from recent or previous tests on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. Comply with requirements of each individual specification Section.

C. Certificates: Three (3) copies. One (1) copy will be marked with Architect's review comments and returned to Contractor.

125


1. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

2. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

3. Certificates may be recent or from previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect.

D. Manufacturers' Instructions: Three (3) copies. One (1) copy will be marked with Architect's review comments and returned to Contractor.

1. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, startup, adjusting, and finishing.

2. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents.

1.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Submit 2 copies of manufacturers' operations and maintenance manuals. If necessary, both copies will be marked with Architect's review comments and returned to Contractor for correction until satisfactory information is provided. The County will retain satisfactorily corrected manuals for its own use.

B. Operations and maintenance manuals shall include the following as appropriate:

1. Operating instructions.

2. Preventive maintenance instructions.

3. Cleaning instructions.

4. Safety precautions.

5. Trouble shooting procedures.

6. Theory of operation to discrete component level.

7. Schematic diagrams, flow diagrams, wiring diagrams, logic diagrams, and so on, to discrete component level.

8. Parts lists showing all discrete components with part number, current prices and availability.

9. List of replaceable supplies; paper, ink, ribbon, etc. with part numbers, current prices and availability.

10. Recommended levels of spare parts and supplies to keep on hand.

126


11. Manufacturers' service and maintenance technical manuals.

12. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of service and repair firms for the equipment.

C. Manuals shall be the same as are used by manufacturers' authorized technicians to completely service and repair the equipment.

1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit one copy of each of the Project Record Documents listed in Section 017700, Contract Closeout Procedures.

1.11 DELAY OF SUBMITTALS

A. Delay of submittals by Contractor is considered avoidable delay. Liquidated damages incurred because of late submittals will be assessed to Contractor.

2.0 PRODUCTS


3.0 EXECUTION


END OF SECTION

127


SECTION 015639 – TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, operations, or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings and/or herein specified, including all incidentals necessary and required for completion of work under this Section.

B. Provide the following services:

1. TREE PROTECTION

2. TREE IDENTIFICATION

3. TRIMMING TREE LIMBS AND BRANCHES

4. ROOT PRUNING

5. RAISING FRINGE OF TREES

6. GRADING AROUND TREES

7. INCIDENTAL EXTRA WORK

8. DEBRIS REMOVAL

9. PROTECTIVE CHAIN-LINK FENCE RELOCATION OR REMOVAL



B. Division 31 - Earthwork C. Division 32 – Exterior Improvements

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards of workmanship shall conform to those recommended by:

128


1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI), SECTION 133.1, "TREE TRIMMING AND REMOVAL."

2. INTERNATIONAL SOCIETY OF ARBORICULTURE (ISA)

3. NATIONAL ARBORIST ASSOCIATION

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Visit Project site and determine conditions under which work will be performed.

B. Do not begin work until meeting with the County's Representative on the Project site to confirm tree locations and work to be performed.

C. Protection: Provide adequate protection of existing trees against damage from construction operations.

1. INSTALL BARRICADES FOR ALL TREES, A 6 FOOT HIGH CHAIN-LINK FENCE. LOCATE FENCE AT OR BEYOND TREE DRIP LINES (OUTSIDE EDGE OF TREE BRANCHING).

2. ESPECIALLY PROTECT ROOTS, TRUNK, AND FOLIAGE OF EXISTING TREES.

3. DO NOT PERMIT THE FOLLOWING:

a. Using trees as support posts, power poles, sign posts, or anchorage for ropes, guy wires and power lines or other similar functions.

b. Poisoning items by disposing of paint, petroleum products, dirty water or other deleterious materials on or around trees.

c. Compaction of tree root area by moving trucks, grading, machines, storage of equipment, gravel, earthfill, supplies, etc.; within the tree drip line (outside edge of tree branching).

d. Damage to trunk or limbs caused by maneuvering vehicles or stacking material and equipment too close to them.

D. Compensation for planting loss: Any tree to remain that is damaged or destroyed due to the Contractor's negligence or failure to provide adequate protection shall be compensated for in accordance with the following schedule of values, using "tree-caliper" method (greatest trunk diameter measured 30-inches above ground):

129


1. FOR TREES OR SHRUBS WITH DIAMETERS UP TO AND INCLUDING 6 INCHES, ACTUAL COST OF REPLACEMENT WITH ITEMS SIMILAR IN SPECIES, SIZE AND SHAPE, INCLUDING:

a. Actual cost of item boxed out of ground.

b.Transportation or delivery of boxed item to the Project site.

c. Planting and staking.

d. Maintenance in watering, fertilizing, pruning, pest control and other care to bring replacement to same general conditions as original item.

2. FOR TRUNKS UP TO:

Size (in inches) $ Amount 7 1,200.00 8 1,700.00 9 2,200.00 10 2,600.00 11 3,100.00 12 3,600.00 13 4,100.00 14 4,600.00 15 5,000.00 16 5,500.00 17 6,000.00 18 and over, add for each caliper inch: 600

1.4 MATERIALS

A. Tree wound Dressing: Prior to any application, the County's Representative shall approve material and application.

B. Protective fencing: 6 foot high galvanized chain link. Refer to Section 323113, Chain Link Fences and Gates.

1.5 TREE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification of trees to be removed or to remain, that have not been so marked on the drawings, is subject to the County's Representative approval.

B. No trees are to be removed without prior approval of the County's Representative.

130


1.6 TRIMMING TREES

A. No limbs are to be removed without prior approval of the County's Representative.

B. Notify the County's Representative when a tree limb is in conflict with the construction.

C. "Trim" shall be interpreted as follows:

1. REMOVAL OF DEAD BRANCHES 1/4 INCH AND OVER IN DIAMETER.

2. REMOVAL OF ALL DEAD AND LIVE STUBS 1/4 INCH AND OVER IN DIAMETER.

3. REMOVAL OF ALL BROKEN BRANCHES, ALL LOOSE BRANCHES AND OTHER DEBRIS LODGED IN TREES.

4. REMOVAL OF UNDESIRABLE SUCKER GROWTH.

5. REMOVAL OF ALL LIVE BRANCHES WHICH INTERFERE WITH THE TREE'S STRUCTURAL STRENGTH AND HEALTHFUL DEVELOPMENT. THESE INCLUDE:

a. Limbs which rub and abrade a more important branch.

b. Limbs of weak structure which are not important to the frame work of the tree.

c. Limbs with twigs and foliage obstructing development of more important branches.

d. Limbs near the end of limbs which produce more weight than the limb is likely to support.

1.7 ROOT PRUNING

A. Avoid root cutting to prevent disruption of the trees water and nutrient carrying capacity and the natural stability based on balance of radial or sinker root system.

B. Notify the County’s Representative if root cutting becomes necessary.

131


C. Avoid tearing or ripping tree roots due to excavation activities.

1. WHERE ROOT CUTTING IS NECESSARY, NO ROOTS ARE TO BE CUT WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE COUNTY'S REPRESENTATIVE.

2. WHERE ROOT CUTTING BECOMES NECESSARY, ALL ROOTS ARE TO BE CLEAN CUT WITH A SAW, LOPPING SHEARS OR PROPER TREE PRUNING DEVICE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCE ARE TREE ROOTS TO BE LEFT SPLINTERED OR THE ENDS SHREDDED.

1.8 REMOVING TREES

A. No trees are to be removed without prior approval of the County's Representative.

B. "Removing Trees" shall be interpreted as removing tree to the ground level and reducing the stump two (2) feet below grade, using a suitable mechanical stump chipper. In order to prevent damage to root systems of remaining adjacent trees, use of a tractor for reduction of stumpage will not be permitted. Trees which are to be removed are indicated on the drawings.

1.9 RAISING SOIL LEVEL

A. Soil placed on the surface around existing trees can create problems involving gaseous exchange in the root zone, crown rot and soil moisture. Soil aeration is a critical factor. Notify the County's Representative of any soil work under trees or adjacent to tree drip lines (outer edge of tree branching).

1.10 LOWERING SOIL LEVEL

A. Removing soil from under a tree canopy can seriously damage roots and may even impair the stability of the tree, Notify the County's Representative of any soil work under a tree.

1.11 DEBRIS REMOVAL

A. Dispose of all fallen debris present around trees subject to work under this Section. All wood and debris resulting from the Contractor's operations shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of by the Contractor off the County property.

1.12 TREE PROTECTIVE FENCING

A. Provide fencing as indicated on the drawings and as called out for in this Section.

132


B. Install protective fencing and plywood protection adjacent to tree areas and utilities installation areas prior to commencing work in these locations.

C. Relocation of protective fencing as a sequence of construction, requires no additional cost to the County.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 017400 - CONSTRUCTION CLEANING & WASTE MANAGEMENT

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Waste Management Goals

2. Waste Management Plans

3. Waste Management Plan Implementation

4. Special Programs



B. Section 013119, Project Meetings

C. Section 013300, Submittals

D. Section 017700, Contract Closeout Procedures

E. Division 31 – Earthwork

1.3 REFERENCES

A. City of San Jose Certified Recycling Facilities List available at www.sjrecycles.org/business/cddd.htm.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes such as building materials, packaging and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, demolition and repair of buildings/facilities, paving and infrastructure.

133

http://www.sjrecycles.org/business/cddd.htm


B. Recyclable Materials: Products and materials that can be recovered and manufactured into new products. Recyclable materials include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Asphaltic paving

2. Portland cement concrete

3. Brick and masonry

4. Land-clearing debris

5. Native rock and granular fill

6. Wood products

7. Ferrous materials

8. Non-Ferrous metals including copper and aluminum

9. Mechanical and electrical products and equipment

10. Gypsum products

11. Acoustical ceiling tile

12. Cardboard and plastic film

13. Office recycling, including paper, glass, plastic and cans

14. Carpet and padding

15. Oil used for equipment

16. Fluorescent lights and ballasts

17. Batteries

C. Recycling Facility: A business that specializes in collecting, handling, processing, distributing, or remanufacturing waste materials, generated by demolition and new construction projects, into products or materials that can be used for this project or by others.

1. Source: South Valley Disposal, 408-842-3358.

D. Trash: Product or material unable to be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused, returned, or recycled.

E. Waste Materials: Product or material that can be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused, returned to vendors, or recycled.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

134


A. The Contractor shall use all means available to divert at least 75% construction and demolition waste from landfills.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT OPERATIONS

A. Take a proactive, responsible role in management of construction waste and require all subcontractors, vendors and suppliers to participate in the effort. Establish a construction waste management program that includes the following categories:

1. Waste prevention including minimizing packaging waste

2. Salvage and reuse

3. Salvage for resale and donation

4. Recycling

5. Disposal

B. Encourage waste prevention practices as an efficient waste management strategy when sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials. Salvage and reuse is a better waste management method than recycling because little or no reprocessing is necessary; less pollution is created when items are reused in their original form. Therefore a diligent effort shall be made to salvage and reuse product and materials. Waste materials that cannot be salvaged and reused yet have value as recyclables, shall be recycled. Only trash shall be transported to a landfill.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. Perform a waste analysis to determine the types and quantity of construction waste anticipated and identify salvage for resale, salvage and reuse, recycling, and disposal options available. Within 10 days after contract award and prior to performing any demolition work, submit a Waste Management Plan for review and approval. The Waste Management Plan shall include the following:

1. Waste Materials: A list of waste materials that will be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused, and recycled. A list to address packaging materials including banding, crates, pallets, plastic film, polystyrene and cardboard (packaging waste consumes 15% of the waste stream).

2. Haulers: Name, address and phone number for each hauler providing service.

3. Facilities: Identification of each recycling facility to be utilized.

4. Separation and Protection: Description of the method to be employed in handling waste materials and description of the method that will be used to protect recycled materials from contamination.

5. Transportation: Description of the means of transportation of waste materials and the destination of the materials.

135


6. Subcontractor Participation: A description of requirements for subcontractors to adhere to that includes waste prevent measures such as salvage for resale or reuse and recycling for the waste materials generated by each subcontractor’s scope of work, including packaging and shipping materials.

7. Meetings: A description of the regular meetings held in which waste management will be addressed. Refer to Section 013119, Project Meetings.

2.0 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 PROGRAM IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING

A. Implement and maintain, for the duration of the project, the construction waste management program.

1. Manager: The Contractor shall designate an onsite party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the Project.

2. Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to the Contractor, each Subcontractor, the County, and Architect.

3. Instruction: The Contractor shall provide onsite instruction of appropriate separating, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.

4. Separation Facilities: The Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse, and return. Provide a site map that calls out areas identified. Provide the necessary containers and bins to facilitate the waste management program. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. Separate construction waste at the project site by one of the following methods:

a. Source Separated Method: Waste products and materials that are recyclable are separated from trash and sorted into appropriately marked separate containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for further processing. Trash is transported to a landfill.

b. Co-Mingled Method: Selected waste materials are placed into a single container and then transported to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are sorted and processed and the remaining trash and waste materials are handled separately.

136


c. Other methods proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer.

END OF SECTION

137


SECTION 017700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes contract closeout procedures including:

1. Removal of temporary construction facilities.

2. Substantial completion.

3. Final completion.

4. Completion of DSA form DSA-6 and all DSA-related Change Orders.

5. Final cleaning.

6. Project record documents.

7. Material, equipment and finish data.

8. Project guarantee

9. Warranties

10. Turn-in.

11. Release of claims.

12. Guaranty and Maintenance Bonds

1.2 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to Substantial Completion Inspection.

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.

C. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When Contractor considers Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, submit written notice, with list of items to be completed or corrected.

138


B. Within reasonable time, Architect will inspect to determine status of completion.C. Should Architect determine that Work is not substantially complete, Architect will

promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing all defects and omissions.

D. Remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial completion. Architect will reinspect the Work.

E. When Architect determines that Work is substantially complete, Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion.

F. Manufactured units, equipment and systems which require startup must have been started up and run for periods prescribed by Architect before a Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. When Contractor considers Work is complete, submit written certification that:

1. Contractor has inspected Work for compliance with Contract Documents.

2. Work, except for Contractor maintenance after Final Acceptance, has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies listed with Certificate of Substantial

3. Completion has been corrected.

4. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.

B. In addition to submittals required by conditions of Contract, provide submittals required by governing authorities and submit final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

C. When Architect finds Work is acceptable and final submittal is complete, Architect will issue final change order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by Change Order.

1.5 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.

B. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

1. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment operated during construction, clean ducts, blowers and coils of units operated without filters during construction.

139


2. Employ skilled workers for final cleaning.C. Clean Site; mechanically sweep paved areas.

D. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from Site.

1.6 PROJECT GUARANTEE

A. Requirements for Contractor's guarantee of completed Work are included in Article 3.5 Warranty from General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-1997 (included in Part A of this book). Contractor shall guarantee Work done under Contract against failures, leaks or breaks or other unsatisfactory conditions due to defective equipment, materials or workmanship, and perform repair work or replacement required, at Contractor's sole expense, for period of [1] year from date of Final Acceptance, as required by Article 3.5.

B. Neither recordation of final acceptance nor final certificate for payment nor provision of the Contract nor partial or entire use or occupancy of premises by Santa Clara County Office of Education shall constitute acceptance of Work not done in accordance with Contract Documents nor relieve Contractor of liability in respect to express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.

C. Santa Clara County Office of Education may make repairs to defective Work as set forth in Article 3.5 Warranty from General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-1997 (included in Part A of this book), if, within 5 working days after mailing of written notice of defective work to Contractor or authorized agent, Contractor shall neglect to make or undertake with due diligence repairs; provided, however, that in case of leak or emergency where, in opinion of Santa Clara County Office of Education, delay would cause hazard to health or serious loss or damage, repairs may be made without notice being sent to Contractor, and Contractor shall pay cost thereof.

D. If, after installation, operation or use of materials or equipment to be furnished under Contract proves to be unsatisfactory to Architect, Santa Clara County Office of Education shall have right to operate and use materials or equipment until it can, without damage to Santa Clara County Office of Education, be taken out of service for correction or replacement. Period of use of defective materials or equipment pending correction or replacement shall in no way decrease guarantee period required for acceptable corrected or replaced items of materials or equipment.

E. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to limit, relieve or release Contractor's, subcontractors' and equipment suppliers' liability to Santa Clara County Office of Education for damages sustained as result of latent defects in equipment caused by negligence of suppliers' agents, employees or subcontractors. Stated in another manner, warranty contained in the Contract Documents shall not amount to, nor shall it be deemed to be, waiver by Santa Clara County Office of Education of any rights or remedies (or time limits in which to enforce such rights or remedies) it may have for defective workmanship or defective materials under laws of this State pertaining to acts of negligence.

140


1.7 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Execute Contractor's submittals and assemble documents executed by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

1. Provide table of contents and assemble in 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches three-ring binder with durable plastic cover.

2. Assemble in Specification Section order.

B. Submit material prior to final application for payment.

1. For equipment put into use with Santa Clara County Office of Education's permission during construction, submit within ten (10) working days after first operation.

2. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) working days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

C. Warranties are intended to protect Santa Clara County Office of Education against failure of work and against deficient, defective and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources.

D. Limitations: Warranties are not intended to cover failures which result from the following:

1. Unusual or abnormal phenomena of the elements.

2. Vandalism after substantial completion.

3. Insurrection or acts of aggression including war.

E. Related Damages and Losses: Remove and replace Work which is damaged as result of defective Work, or which must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

F. Warranty Reinstatement: After correction of warranted Work, reinstate warranty for corrected Work to date of original warranty expiration or to a date not less than 365 days after corrected Work was done, whichever is later.

G. Replacement Cost: Replace or restore failing warranted items without regard to anticipated useful service lives.

H. Warranty Forms: Submit drafts to Architect for approval prior to execution. Forms shall not detract from or confuse requirements or interpretations of Contract Documents.

141


1. Warranty shall be countersigned by manufacturers.2. Where specified, warranty shall be countersigned by subcontractors and

installers.

I. Rejection of Warranties: Santa Clara County Office of Education reserves right to reject unsolicited and coincidental product warranties which detract from or confuse requirements or interpretations of Contract Documents.

J. Term of Warranties: For materials, equipment, systems and workmanship warranty period shall be two (2) years minimum from date of substantial completion of entire Work except where:

1. Detailed specifications for certain materials, equipment or systems require longer warranty periods.

2. Materials, equipment or systems are put into beneficial use of Santa Clara County Office of Education prior to Substantial Completion as agreed to in writing by Architect.

K. Warranty of Title: No material, supplies, or equipment for Work under Contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage, security agreement, or under a conditional sale or other agreement by which an interest therein or any part thereof is retained by seller or supplier. Contractor warrants good title to all material, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in Work and agrees upon completion of all work to deliver premises, together with improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by Contractor, to Santa Clara County Office of Education free from any claim, liens, security interest, or charges, and further agrees that neither Contractor nor any person, firm, or corporation furnishing any materials or labor for any Work covered by Contract shall have right to lien upon premises or improvement or appurtenances thereon. Nothing contained in this Paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair right of persons furnishing materials or labor under bond given by Contractor for their protection or any rights under law permitting persons to look to funds due Contractor in hands of Santa Clara County Office of Education.

1.8 TURN-IN

A. Contract will not be closed out and final payment will not be made until all personnel Identification Media, vehicle permits and keys issued to Contractor during prosecution of Work are turned in to Santa Clara County Office of Education.

2.0 PRODUCTS


3.0 EXECUTION


142


END OF SECTIONSECTION 018119 - CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY

MANAGEMENT

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedures for achieving an environmentally conscious Work Product. The Contractor shall:

1. Prepare a Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan (IAQ) in accordance with this Section (refer to parts 1.2 and 1.3 below).

2. Adhere to the methods and procedures outlined in the Construction IAQ during construction and closeout.

3. Document compliance with the Construction IAQ during construction.

4. Submit certification to the County at closeout demonstrating compliance with the Construction IAQ requirements.

1.2 SPECIAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan (IAQ): Not less than 21 days prior to installation of HVAC ductwork or equipment, or application of coatings, sealants and/or finishes inside the enclosed building shell.

B. Revise and resubmit IAQ as required by the County or Architect.

1. Approval of the Contractor’s Environmental Procedures Compliance plans will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for adequate and continuing control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures required by Federal, state, county or local agencies.

1.3 PROVIDE A CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT PLAN THAT INCLUDES:

A. Procedures for meeting the applicable SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Design/Builders Association) Construction IAQ requirements.

B. Procedures for protection and remediation plans for damaged absorptive materials.

C. Training sessions for all contractors and subcontractors that they understand and agree to comply with the Construction IAQ Management Plan requirements.

143


1. Schedule and sequence of events for HVAC system installation/startup, application of interior coatings and finishes, and installation of building furnishings.

2.0 PRODUCTS

A. Not Applicable to this Section.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION THE CONTRACTOR SHALL:

A. Meet or exceed the applicable minimum requirements of the SMACNA and the IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3, for the items listed below which the contractor shall supply during construction:

1. HVAC Protection:

a. Protect all air handling and distribution equipment, and air supply and return ducting during construction.

b. Adequately cover and protect all exposed air inlet and outlet openings, grilles, ducts, plenums, etc., to prevent water, moisture, dust, and other contaminant intrusion.

c. Apply protection immediately after installation of equipment and ducting.

d. Ducting runs that require more than a single day to install shall be protected at the end of each day’s Work.

2. Source Control:

a. Protect stored onsite or installed absorptive or porous materials including, but not limited to, batt insulation, drywall, and carpeting from exposure to moisture.

b. Do not use moisture-damaged porous materials in the building.

c. Provide adequate ventilation of packaged dry products prior to installation to allow for gassing of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Remove from packaging and ventilate in a a secure, dry, well-ventilated space free from strong contaminant sources and residues. Provide a temperature range of 60 degrees F minimum to 90 degrees F maximum continuously during the ventilation period. Do not ventilate within limits of Work unless otherwise approved by the Architect.

3. Housekeeping:

a. Minimize accumulation of dust fumes, vapors, or gases in the building.

144


b. Suppress dust with wetting agents or a sweeping compound.

c. Clean up dust using a wet rag or damp mop.

d. Increase the cleaning frequency when dust buildup is noted.

e. Remove spills or excess applications of solvent-containing products as soon as possible.

f. Remove accumulated water and keep work areas as dry as possible.

g. Vacuum using HEPA-filtered vacuum cleaners.

h. Store volatile liquids, including fuels and solvents, in closed containers and outside of the building when not in use.

i. Keep volatile liquid containers closed when the container is inside of the building and not in use.

4. Scheduling:

a. Develop schedule for application of interior finishes including time frames for the application of wet materials onto dry materials, dry materials onto wet materials, and expected curing times for applied wet materials.

b. Schedule application of wet material floor coverings, wall coverings, and other porous finish materials after activation of building HVAC and exhaust systems.

c. Wet materials include all paints, adhesives, sealants, coatings, finishes and spray-applied materials.

d. Insure that all wet applied interior finish materials are properly and fully cured before installing other finish materials over them.

e. Install carpets and furnishings after all other interior finish materials have been applied and fully cured.

f. Provide sufficient ventilation, air circulation and air changes to properly cure materials. Run HVAC system and exhaust fans 24 hours per day during this period. Return air dampers shall be closed to provide 100% fresh air intake. Temperatures shall be maintained at approximately 75 degrees F (verify specific recommended temperature settings with coating and finish manufacturer’s product data). Filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 must be used at each return grill, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999.

145


g. Provide sufficient ventilation, air circulation and air changes to dissipate excess humidity when present. Relative humidity shall not be allowed to exceed 40%.

B. Use nontoxic cleaning materials and procedures to avoid the release of toxic fumes and VOCs into finished spaces within the building.

C. Replace all filtration media immediately prior to occupancy.

1. Filtration media shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Valve (MERV) of 13, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999 for media installed at the end of construction.

2. Provide cut sheets of filtration media used during construction and installed prior to occupancy with MERV highlighted.

3. Provide a letter declaring that all filtration media was replaced prior to occupancy.

D. During construction provide photographs of Construction IAQ management measures such as protection of ducts and onsite stored or installed absorptive materials to document compliance with the Construction IAQ management plan.

END OF SECTION

146


SECTION 019100 – COMMISSIONING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes all incidentals necessary and required for completion of project Commissioning as specified herein.

B. The commissioning process is intended to verify and ensure that the fundamental building elements and systems are designed, installed and calibrated to operate as intended.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor will implement or have a contract in place to implement the following fundamental best practice commissioning procedures:

1. Appoint a commissioning agent or team that does not include individuals directly responsible for project design or construction management. This could be a qualified member of the design firm.

2. Document the design intent and the basis of design documentation. For each commissioned feature or system, and for features or systems that significantly interact with commissioned features, the commissioning agent will develop a written list of the County’s requirements and basis of design.

a. Address the general HVAC, lighting, indoor environment, energy efficiency, siting and environmental responsiveness of the facility. This document should include performance criteria.

b. The basis of design includes primary assumptions such as occupancy, space and process requirements; applicable codes, policies and standards; load and climatic assumptions that influence design decisions. The document also includes a narrative of the key design concepts and design features aimed at meeting the County's requirements.

3. Create a Commissioning Plan. This document must include the following:

a. A brief overview of the commissioning process.

b. A list of all commissioned features and systems.

c. Identification of primary commissioning participants and their responsibilities.

147


d. A description of the management, communication, and reporting of the commissioning plan.

e. An outline of the commissioning process scope including submittal review, observation, startup, testing, training, O&M documentation, and warranty period activities.

f. A list of the expected written work products.

g. An activity schedule.

h. A description of the rigor and scope of testing.

4. Include the Commissioning Requirements in Bid Documents. These should include the following:

a. The scope of commissioning.

b. The features and systems to be commissioned.

c. Requirements for submittal review, inspection, startup, testing, training, O&M documentation, and warranty period activities, commissioning documentation requirements, schedule and rigor and scope of testing.

B. Installation Observation:

1. The Commissioning agent must sufficiently observe installation of each type of commissioned feature and system to ensure that they are properly installed according to the contract documents and manufacturer's instructions, and that other building systems or components are not compromising the performance of the feature.

C. Startup and Checkout:

1. The contractor completes the startup and initial checkout of all items listed in the contract documents. These results must be clearly documented according to the manufacturer's written instruction and the contract documents.

D. Sampling:

1. The commissioning authority applies appropriate sampling techniques to verify that startup and initial checkout of all commissioned equipment is successfully completed:

a. That each control point is commanding, reporting, and controlling according to the intended purpose

148


b. That all sensors have been calibrated to ensure that the reported value in the control system represents the actual local value

c. That all actuators have been adjusted to fully close and open dampers and valve

d. And that the reported values in the control system are correct by verifying through visual observation.

E. Functional Testing:

1. Written, repeatable test procedures, prepared specifically for each project must be used to functionally test components and systems.

2. These tests must be documented to clearly describe the individual systematic test procedures, the expected system response or acceptance criteria for each procedure, the actual response or findings, and any pertinent discussion.

3. After the initial checkout has been approved by the Commissioning authority, the modes described in the following paragraphs must be tested:

a. Test each sequence in the sequence of operations and other significant modes:Sequences and control strategies include startup, shutdown, unoccupied and manual modes, modulation up and down the unit's range of capacity, power failure, alarms, component (unit and pump) staging and backup upon failure, interlocks with other equipment, and sensor and actuator calibrations.

b. Test all larger equipment individually. Heating equipment must be tested during the winter and air conditioning equipment must be tested during summer, as appropriate, to demonstrate performance under near-design conditions.

F. Training:

1. The Commissioning agent must assemble written verification that training was conducted for all commissioned features and systems.

2. The training must be performed by qualified individuals for a sufficient duration to ensure that facility staff has all the information needed to optimally operate, maintain, and replace the commissioned features and systems.

G. O&M Manuals:

1. The Commissioning authority must review the O&M manuals for all commissioned features and systems for completeness and applicability.

a. The O&M data shall be bound in labeled binders liberally divided with tabs to provide efficient access.

149


b. The manuals will include the following:

1) Name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer or vendor and installing contractor.

2) Submittal data.

3) Operations and maintenance instructions with the model and features for this site clearly marked.

a.) Data requirements include the following:

i.) Instructions for installation, maintenance, replacement, startup, special maintenance and replacement sources.

ii.) A parts list.

iii.) List of special tools.

iv.) Performance data.

v.) Warranty information.

b.) Documentation package on as-built controls including a narrative for normal operation, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, manual operation, controls setup and programming, troubleshooting, alarms, control drawings and schematics, and final sequences of operation.

H. Commissioning Report:

1. A commissioning report must be presented to the County after all but seasonally-deferred functional testing is complete. The report must include a list of each commissioned feature or system, and the disposition of the commissioning agent regarding the feature or system's compliance with the contract documents.

2. Required components of the report include the following:

a. Meeting Design Intent

b. Meeting Specifications

c. Ensuring Proper Installation

d. Functional Performance and Efficiency

e. O&M Documentation

f. Operator Training

150


3. In addition, a written list of all outstanding commissioning issues and any testing that is scheduled for a later date, justified by seasonal conditions, must be included.

4. All outstanding environmentally responsive feature deficiencies must be corrected or listed in the commissioning report.

5. All completed functional tests should be listed in an appendix to the report.

1.3 SYSTEMS TYPICALLY COMMISSIONED

A. Site features that require commissioning include exterior lighting fixtures and systems.

B. Water commissioning includes irrigation systems, plumbing fixtures, and plumbing infrastructure.

C. Energy commissioning covers HVAC systems, lighting, energy generation equipment.

D. Commissioning activities that affect indoor environmental quality include temperature and humidity controls, ventilation systems, monitoring equipment, occupant controls, and day lighting systems.

END OF SECTION

151


SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work under this Section includes the furnishings and installing of all concrete work, complete, with all related accessories, items and incidentals required.

B. Coordinate installation of all inserts and embedded items required or indicated.

1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS (latest editions apply)

A. ACI- American Concrete Institute:

1. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.

2. 305, Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting.

3. 306, Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.

4. 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. ASTM- American Society of Testing and Materials, Referenced Standards.

C. ICC- International Code Council:

1. CBC - 2010 California Building Code (California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Mix Design and Tests:

1. Submit mix designs and compressive strength test reports from previous applications for specified types of concrete.

2. One copy of all test reports shall be forwarded to DSA, the Architect, the Structural Engineer, the Inspector of Record within fourteen days of the test. Test reports shall comply with all requirements of CCR Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-335.

3. The concrete mixes shall be based on designs of a professional testing laboratory, verified by test.

152


2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Materials for cast-in-place concrete shall be set as forth in ACI 301 except as modified herein and as otherwise indicated in project documents.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type II modified, with maximum alkali content of 0.6 percent (from only one source). Comply with Title 24, Section 1903A. Test cement per Title 24, Section 1916A

C. Aggregates: ASTM C33, (from source as approved by the Testing Agency). Comply with Title 24, Section 1903A.3

D. Water: clean, potable, free of injurious materials.

E. Admixtures: Only brand products documented to have had not less than five years of satisfactory performance shall be used. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used. Comply with Title 24, Section 1904A.

1. Air Entraining: ASTM C260

F. Grout: Manufactured pre-mixed. Non-ferrous, non-staining, flowable grout which will not shrink as it cures, 5000 psi @ 7 days.

G. Fly Ash: Shall conform to CBC Section 1903A.5

2.2 CONCRETE MIX

A. Ready-Mix Concrete: ASTM C94.

2.3 PROPORTION AND MIXTURE

A. Proportioning mixtures and production of concrete shall be in accordance with CBC, Section 1905A.2 and shall be in accordance with mix designs submitted by Laboratory and approved by the Owner’s Testing Agency. All concrete shall have at least 5 sacks of cement per cubic yard of mix.

B. Concrete shall have 3% +/- 1%, air entrainment when approved by Testing Agency.

C. Water reducing admixtures may be used in concrete when approved by Testing Agency. Such admixtures shall not interfere with or reduce required air content dosage of air-entrained concrete.

153


D. Use a minimum of 5 sacks of cement per cubic yard for all concrete.

E. Concrete Mix Requirements: The following table presents a schedule of elements of concrete, compressive strength in psi after 28-days when tested in accordance with ASTM C39, maximum aggregate and maximum slump, which shall be as follows:

Concrete ElementStrength Max. Size Aggregate

(Inch)Max. Slump (Inch)

All Concrete per drawings 1” 4”

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Areas in which concrete is to be placed shall be inspected by Contractor for defects which would prohibit satisfactory placement of concrete or related miscellaneous items. Such defects shall be corrected prior to commencement of work.

B. Concrete shall not be deposited or placed until all forms, reinforcing steel and construction joints have been inspected by Owner’s Testing Agency and accepted in advance within the entire extent of the pour. Architect shall be notified 48 hours prior to first pour.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Owner’s Testing Agency will:

1. Review concrete mix designs.

2. Perform testing in accordance with ACI 318 and CBC Sections: 1903A and 1905A.

3. Continuously monitor concrete temperature and inspect concrete placement.

4. Test concrete to control slumps according to ATSM C143.

5. Test concrete for required compressive strength in accordance with CBC Section 1905A.6:

a. Make and cure three specimen cylinders according to ATSM C31 for each 50 cubic yards per CBC 1905A.6.2, or fraction thereof, of each class poured at site each day.

b. Retain one cylinder for 7-day test and two for the 28-day test.

154


c. Number each cylinder 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B, 2C, etc; date each set; and keep accurate record of pour each set represents.

d. Transport specimen cylinders from job to laboratory after cylinders have cured for 24-hours on site. Cylinders shall be covered and kept at air temperatures between 60 and 80 degrees Fahrenheit.

e. Test specimen cylinders at age 7-days and age 28-days for specified strength according to ASTM C39.

f. Base strength value on average of two cylinders taken for 28-day test.

B. The Contractor shall:

1. Submit ticket for each batch of concrete delivered to job site. Ticket shall bear the following information:

a. Design mix number.

b. Signature or initials of ready mix representative.

C. Comply with Title 24, CBC Section 1905A

3.3 WORKMANSHIPA. All concrete shall be placed, finished and cured, and all other pertinent construction

practices shall be in accordance with the Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings (ACI 301) hereby made a part of these specifications.

B. In addition to the requirements of ACI 301, the following shall prevail:

1. Concrete shall be placed so that a uniform appearance of surface will be obtained.

2. The concrete shall be free of all rock pockets, honeycombs and voids.

3. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practical in its final position.

4. The sub-grade shall be slightly moist when the concrete is placed for floor slabs to prevent excessive loss of water from the concrete mix.

5. Place concrete within 90 minutes of mixing.

C. Vibrators and Vibrating:

1. Employ as many vibrators and tampers as necessary to secure the desired results. Minimum: one per each 20 cubic yards of concrete placed per hour.

2. Eliminate the following applications:

155


a. Pushing of concrete with vibrator.

b. External vibration of forms.

c. Allowing vibrator to vibrate against reinforcing steel where steel projects into green concrete.

d. Allowing vibrator to vibrate contact faces of forms.

3. Vibrators shall function at a minimum frequency of 3600 cycles per minute when submerged in concrete.

4. Supplement vibration by forking and spading along the surfaces of the forms and between reinforcing whenever flow is restricted.

D. Curing:

1. General: Freshly deposited concrete shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures and shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete.

2. Initial Curing: Initial curing shall immediately follow the finishing operation. Concrete shall be kept continuously moist at least over night. One of the following materials or methods shall be used:

a. Ponding or continuous sprinkling.

b. Absorptive mat or fabric kept continuously wet.

3. Final Curing: Immediately following the initial curing and before the concrete has dried, additional curing shall be accomplished by one of the following materials or methods:

a. Continuing the method used in initial curing.

b. Slabs to receive finish flooring materials to be continuously wet cured for 7 days.

c. Waterproof paper conforming to “Specifications for Waterproof Paper for Curing Concrete” (ASTM C171).

d. Curing compounds conforming to “Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete” (ASTM C309). Such compounds shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and shall not be used on any surfaces against which additional concrete or other cementitious

156


finishing materials (such as ceramic tile) are to be bonded, nor on surfaces on which such curing is prohibited by the project specifications.

e. Other moisture-retaining coverings as approved.

4. Duration of Curing: The final curing continue until the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F., has totaled 7 days.

5. Formed Surfaces: Steel forms heated by the sun and all wood forms in contact with the concrete during the final curing period shall be kept wet. If forms are to be removed during the curing period, one of the above curing materials or methods shall be employed immediately. Such curing shall be continued for the remainder of the curing period.

E. Construction Joints

1. Joints not shown on the drawing shall be so made and located as to least impair the strength of the structural element and shall be approved by the Owner and Structural Engineer.

2. The surfaces of all concrete at all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all laitance removed by sandblasting.

3. Concrete surfaces at designated joints shall be roughened to ¼” relief with roto hammer or similar method.

4. Moisten all joints immediately prior to placement of concrete.

F. Embedded Items:

1. All sleeves, inserts, anchors and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior to concreting. Embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement. Voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor bolt slots shall be filled temporarily with a readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete into the voids.

G. Grouting Column Bases:

1. The grout shall be mixed and placed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Care shall be taken in the grouting to insure that there is full bearing between the base plates and the grout.

157


1. DEFECTIVE WORK: Work considered to be defective may be ordered to be replaced, in which case the Contractor shall remove the defective work at his expense. Work considered to be defective shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

A. Concrete in which defective or inadequate reinforcing steel has been placed.

B. Concrete incorrectly formed, or not conforming to details and dimensions on the drawings or with the intent of these documents, or concrete the surfaces of which are out of plumb or level.

C. Concrete below specified strength.

D. Concrete containing wood, cloth or other foreign matter, rock pockets, voids, honeycombs, cracks or cold joints not scheduled or indicated on the drawings.

3.5 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK

A. The Contractor shall, at his expense, make all such corrections as directed by the engineer.

B. Concrete work containing rock pockets, voids, honeycombs, cracks or cold joints not scheduled or indicated on the drawings shall be chipped out until all unconsolidated material is removed.

3.4 SLAB FINISH

A. Covered interior slabs shall receive a smooth, steel troweled finish. Tolerance shall be 1/8” in 10’-0”.

B. Slabs under ceramic tile shall receive a roughened finish.

C. Exposed interior & exterior slabs receive a broom finish as directed. Edges shall be smooth troweled. See drawings for specifics.

END OF SECTION

158


SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMWORK

1.0 GENERAL


A. Work under this section includes the furnishing and installing of all form work for cast-in-place concrete, complete, with all related accessories, items and incidentals required.

1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS (LATEST EDITIONS APPLY)

A. ACI- American Concrete Institute



3. 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

B. ICC – International Code Council, Inc.

2. CBC - Section 1906A - 2010 California Building Code (California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2)

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMING MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, materials for formwork shall be wood, steel, fiber or reinforced plastic and of suitable quality to achieve required finishes. Contractor shall conform with considerations and recommendations in ACI-347, Chapter 3, Materials for Formwork.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, contact surfaces in fabricated forms shall be smooth and uniform without warps, bends, dents, sags or irregular absorptive conditions and imperfections which might telegraph or product objectionable irregularities in the exposed concrete finish.

C. Form ties and spreaders shall leave a hole not larger than 7/8-inch nor less than ½-inch in diameter in the concrete surface. The portion of the tie remaining in the

159


concrete shall be at least 1-inch back from the concrete surface that will be exposed to view, painted, damp proofed or waterproofed.

D. Chamfer strips: Milled from clear straight-grain lumber, surfaced on all sides. Other material of equal quality may be used only as authorized by Architect.

E. Round Column Forms: Sonotube or equal

2.2 FORM COATINGS: Form coating and bond breaking materials shall be non-staining and completely compatible with finish materials and other surface treatment materials to be used.

2.3 OTHER MATERIALS:

A. Sand Cushion & Membrane: Sand shall be clean, sharp and moist. Membrane shall be 10 mil. polyethylene sheet. Lap joints 6”.

B. Rock Base: Caltrans Class II, ¾” aggregate max.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS:

A. The forms shall be constructed smooth, mortar-tight, true to the required lines and grade, and with sufficient strength to resist springing out of shape during the placing and vibrating of concrete. All dirt, chips, sawdust and other foreign matter shall be completely removed before concrete is placed. Forms previously used shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, mortar and foreign matter before being used.

B. Before reinforcing steel is placed in forms, all inside surfaces of the forms shall be thoroughly coated with an approved form sealer. The form sealer shall be of high penetrating quality leaving no film on the surface of the forms that can be absorbed by the concrete or be incompatible with concrete paint.

C. All exposed edges shall be chamfered with triangular fillets ½-inch by ½-inch.

D. Joints in formwork for exposed walls and curbs shall be taped, where directed by Architect.

3.2 EARTH FORMS:

A. Foundation concrete may be placed directly into neat excavations provided the foundation trench walls are stable as determined by the architect (Structural Engineer) subject to the approval of the Division of the State Architect. In such case the minimum formwork shown on the drawings is mandatory to insure clean excavations immediately prior to and during the pour.

B. Remove loose dirt and debris prior to placement of concrete.

160


3.3 STRIPPING:

A. Forms shall be removed in such manner as to insure the complete safety of the structure. Conform to minimum requirements established by ACI 347 for specific conditions.

B. Formwork for walls and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations.

C. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be protected and cured by one of the methods specified in Section 03 30 00.

END OF SECTION

161


SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

1.0 GENERAL


A. Work under this Section includes the furnishing and installing of all steel reinforcing for cast-in-place concrete, complete, with all related items, accessories and incidentals required, such as ties, spacing devices inserts and all other material required to complete installation.


A. ACI- American Concrete Institute:


2. 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.


B. ASTM- American Society for Testing and Materials, Referenced Standards

C. AWS- American Welding Society:

1. AD1.4 Structural Welding Code- Reinforcing Steel

2. A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes

D. CRSI- Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:

1. Manual of Standard Practice

2. Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars

E. ICC- International Code Council:

1. CBC – 2007 California Building Code (California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings of all reinforcing steel shall be submitted for approval.

162


B. Mill Reports for each different heat to be used on the job shall be submitted for approval. Comply with CBC, Section 1916A.2.

1.4 Quality Assurance

A. Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.4.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing bars: Deformed, new billet-steel bars conforming to ASTM Designation A615, Grade 60 or ASTM A706 unless noted otherwise.

B. Reinforcing mesh: Welded wire fabric conforming to ASTM A185.

C. Tie wires and spirals: ASTM A82.

D. Reinforcement supports

1. At reinforcing placed over sand or earth, use precast concrete cubes.

2. At reinforcing placed over forms, provide supports with legs which are hot dip galvanized, stainless steel or plastic protected.

E. Mechanical Bar Splice: Xtender by Headed Reinforcement Corp. or equal to develop a minimum of 125% of yield strength of bar.

2.2 FABRICATION: Except where specified otherwise herein or shown otherwise on the plans, reinforcing steel shall be cleaned, fabricated, placed, tied and supported in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 315.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed and shall be supported and secured against displacement by the use of adequate and proper supporting and spacing devices, tie wire, etc., so that it will remain in its correct location in the finished work. No supporting devices shall be used that will impede the flow of concrete.

B. Do not bend or straighten reinforcing in any manner that will injure the material.

C. Install splices for reinforcing bars in accordance with drawings and ACI 318. Stagger splices in adjacent bars 5’ – 0".

163


D. Reinforcing mesh shall be laid flat in place. Lap mesh at sides and ends 12 inches. Wire mesh together at 24 inches on center.

3.2 CLEARANCES

A. Where not shown otherwise on the drawings, the minimum concrete coverage for steel reinforcement shall be as follows:

1. Where concrete is deposited against ground 3”

2. Concrete in forms exposed to earth or weather 2”

B. The clear spacing between parallel bars shall be not less than 1-1/2 times the normal diameter of the maximum size aggregate, and in no case less than 1-1/2 inches, except at splices which may be wired together.

3.3 WELDING: Perform all welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.


A. Contractor shall examine placement of all reinforcement and embedded items prior to inspection by city inspector

B. The Owner’s Testing Agency will inspect

1. In-place reinforcing steel

3.5 NOTIFICATION: Notify the Architect two working days in advance of concrete placement.

END OF SECTION

164


SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

1.0 GENERAL


A. Work Included:

1. Wood framing and sheathing systems.

2. Wood furring, blocking and nailers.

3. Backing for wall mounted equipment, railings, toilet partitions, toilet accessories, etc.

4. Rough hardware, including tie-downs, post caps, etc.

5. Acoustical sealant, where indicated, at wood plates and plywood.

6. Prefabricated wood products


A. AITC- American Institute of Timber Construction Standards

1. 110 – Standard Appearance Grades for Structural Glued Laminated Timber.

2. 111 – Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage and Erection.

3. 113 – Standard for Dimensions of Glued Laminated Structural Members.

4. 115 – Standard for Fabricated Structural Timber

5. 103 – Standard for Structural Glued Laminated Timber

B. ANSI- American National Standards Institute

ANSI/AITC A190.1 Structural Glued Laminated Timber

ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)

ANSI/ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series)

165


C. APA- American Plywood Association Product Standard PS 1-83.

D. ASTM- American Society for Testing and Materials: D05055-90, Establishing and monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I Joists.

E. AWPA- American Wood Preservers Association Standards

F. AWPI- American Wood Preservers Institute LP-2

G. ICC- International Code Council, Inc.

1. CBC- California Building Code, 2010 Edition

H. FS- Federal Specifications

I.TPI- Truss Plate Institute: Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.

J. WCLIB- West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Grading Rule No. 17

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product information for rough hardware.

1.4 STORE LUMBER AND PLYWOOD OFF GROUND IN MANNER TO INSURE PROPER VENTILATION AND PROTECTION from weather; and to prevent damage by either decay or insects. Store plywood under cover and cover lumber as required to avoid twisting and warping.

1.5 COORDINATE WORK OF THIS SECTION WITH WORK BY OTHERS. CHECK LINES AND LEVELS INDICATED ON such other work as has been completed, before commencing work of this Section. Report discrepancies in writing to the Owner for correction and adjustment, or in the event of failure to do so, correct errors without additional cost to the Owner.

1.6 INSTALL TEMPORARY BRACING AS REQUIRED. MAKE PROPER PROVISION TO TAKE CARE OF STRESSES resulting from construction loads, whenever piles of materials, erection equipment or other loads are carried by frame during its erection.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD: Materials shall conform to grades and grading rules as hereinafter specified. Each piece of lumber and plywood shall be grade-stamped or certified by a competent agency approved by the Owner.

A. Plywood: (APA Grade) Structural I, CDX with exterior glue, 5-ply construction, all Group 1 wood, minimum span rating 24/0 for roof sheathing.

166


B. Framing Lumber: Douglas Fir – Larch conforming to “WCLIB Standard Grading and

Dressing Rules No. 17” as follows:

1. Structural Light Framing: 2” x 6” D.F. No. 1

2. Structural Joists & Planks: 2” x10” D.F. No. 1 or better

3. BEAMS & STRINGERS: 5” AND THICKER, RECTANGULAR WIDTH MORE THAN 2” greater than thickness D.F. No. 1, free of heart centers reswan

4. POSTS & TIMBERS: 6” X 6” AND LARGER D.F. NO. 1 FREE OF HEART CENTERS

5. SILLS: PRESSURE TREATED D.F. NO. 1, AWPB STAMPED, AMMONIACAL COPPER ZINC ARSENATE (ACZA) TREATED AWPA STANDARD C2, MINIMUM 4/10” PENETRATION, INCISED

C. Additional Grading Requirements

1. In order to qualify as “structural lumber”, each piece including plywood, shall be marked with the grade of the lumber by some competent and reliable organization whose regular business is to establish lumber grades and whose trade-mark shall also appear on each piece; except that, a certificate from such an organization may be accepted in lieu of such grade and trade-marks. All plywood must be grade stamped on each piece with the APA trade-mark.

2. There shall be no boxed heart in any framing lumber 4” and larger in the least dimension.

2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

A. Use waterborne preservatives complying with AWPI LP-2.

B. All preservative treated lumber shall be retreated where cut on site.

2.3 ROUGH HARDWARE

Nails, bolts, nuts, washers, lag bolts, screws, anchor and other fastenings as shown or as required for complete installation. Galvanized or cadmium-plate for exterior work. Comply with the following specifications:

A. Wire Nails: Common. Plywood nails are acceptable at diaphragms and walls. Provide minimum penetration as required for common nails.

B. Bolts, Nuts, ASTM A307, (upset threads are prohibited)

167


C. Lag Screws and Lag Bolts: FF-B-561.

D. Wood Screws: FF-S-111.

E. Framing Clips, Boots, Hangers, hold-downs etc.: by Simpson Strong Tie or approved equal.

2.D GLUE: AFG – 01 approved. PL Premium" polyurethane construction adhesive by Chem Pex, Inc., or equal.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL FRAMING

A. Joists, rafters and beams shall be cut as required to provide a full even and horizontal seating on the support, unless otherwise shown. Do not overcut.

B. Notches and bored holes in joists and beams shall be limited as shown on the drawings.

3.2 FRAMING FOR PIPES

A. Frame members for passage of pipes and ducts to avoid cutting structural members. Do not cut, notch or bore framing members for passage of pipes or conduits without architect's authorization.

B. Pipes 1” diameter or less may pass through a neatly bored hole in the center of the plates. Hole location is subject to the Architect’s acceptance.

3.3 FIRE STOPS: Provide 2” nominal fire stops in conformance with Section 708.2 of the CBC.

3.4 BLOCKING: Provide solid blocking in all walls for wall mounted items.

3.5 FURRING: Provide furring, stripping, blocking, backing and grounds where indicated or where necessary to support, or to furnish suitable spacings for finish materials and accessories.

3.6 NAILING:

A. All nailing shall conform to CBC Table 2304.9.1, except where more stringent requirements are shown on drawings.

B. Penetration of nails or spikes into piece receiving point shall be not less than 1/2 length of nail or spike, except, that 16 penny nails may be used to connect pieces of 2” thickness.

C. Drive nails and spikes no closer together than 2/3 their length nor closer to edge of member than ½ their length, except when detailed otherwise.

168


D. Place nails without splitting wood. Pre-drill holes whenever nailing tends to split wood or plywood. Replace split members.

E. Use of machine nailing is subject to a satisfactory job site demonstration. Authorization is subject to continued satisfactory performance. If nail heads penetrate the outer ply of plywood more than would be normal for a hand hammer or if the minimum allowable edge distances are not maintained the performance will be deemed unsatisfactory.

3.7 BOLTS AND LAG SCREWS:

A. Provide bolts and lag screws, bearing on wood, with malleable iron or steel plate washers of sizes indicated under heads and nuts. All nuts and screws shall be tightened when placed and re-tightened at completion of the job or immediately prior to closing with finish construction. Nuts shall be secured against loosening.

B. Except where otherwise indicated on the details, bore holes for bolts with a bit 1/32” to 1/16” larger than nominal diameter as the bolt.

C. Bore lag screw holes the same diameter and depth as shank, continue hole to depth equal to length of lag screw and with a diameter equal to 75% of the diameter of the shank.

D. Screw all lag screws; do not drive into place. Embed threaded portion of lag screws in each timber a minimum of seven (7) times their shank diameter.

3.8 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS: Remove all wood, including form lumber, chips, shavings and sawdust in or on the ground from the area under the floor. No wood shall be buried in any fill.

END OF SECTION

169


SECTION 061600 - ROOF FIBERBOARD SHEATHING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, operations, or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the plans and/or herein specified, including all incidentals necessary and required for completion of work under this Section.

B. Provide and install roof fiberboard sheathing as a protective overlayment for tapered foam roof insulation as indicated on the project Drawings and as specified herein.



B. Section 061000, Rough Carpentry

C. Section 072200, Roof and Deck Insulation

D. Section 075100, Built-Up Bituminous Roofing

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C208-95 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of Section 013300, Submittal Procedures.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the site and store in a safe dry place with all labels intact and legible at time of installation.

B. Use all means necessary to protect insulating materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

170


A. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, 55 Park Place, N.E., Atlanta, GA 30303, 1-800-BUILD-GP, www.gp.com/build, or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. High Density Roof Fiberboard, Type II, Grade 2:

1. R-Value: 1.28

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Inspection:

1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that installation of materials of this Section may be installed in accordance with the original design and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect and Distruct Representative.

2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect, install all insulation in accordance with instructions of the manufacturer.

B. Inspection:

1. Upon completion of the installation, visually inspect each insulated area and verify that all insulation is complete and properly installed.

3.3 CLEANUP

A. Upon completion, remove all debris resulting from work of this Section.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Product delivered shall be free of defects.

171


END OF SECTION

172


SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install all non-structural architectural wood items that are exposed to view as shown on project Drawings, including items not specifically installed under the work of other Sections.


A. Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 of Contract Documents.


C. Section 081300, Metal Doors and Frames

D. Section 099100, Painting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. APA - The Engineered Wood Association


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. All work shall conform to the California Building Code in effect at time of project approval.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: provide Shop Drawings showing layout of siding and trim pieces, including nailing schedule.

173


C. Samples: For each material/product used, provide a sample.1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Keep material dry at all times. Protect panels against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.

B. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.

C. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with water borne chemicals, provide for air circulation at each course.

D. Use all means necessary to protect finish carpentry materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

E. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary for the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the County.


A. Protect framing from moisture during construction. Allow framing to dry for as long as feasible before enclosing, to reduce conditions favorable to growth of mold. Construct framing assemblies to allow moisture to escape.

B. For individuals with chemical sensitivities, test proposed products before installation. Aromatic woods may also cause problems for individuals with chemical sensitivities.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer shall be an approved APA Engineered Wood Association manufacturer for the materials specified herein.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. All products shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the approval of the Architect.

2. All Exterior Wood Finish Materials are to be re-sawn Douglas Fir, Grade No. unless otherwise noted.

B. Exterior Trim/Siding Materials:

174


Grade/Species Surface Texture Finish2 1/2" x 8 1/2" Trim If required,

Douglas Fir #1Match Existing Prime and Painted

6x Corbel Douglas Fir #1 Resawn all exposed surfaces

Prime and Painted

4x8 Exterior Beams Douglas Fir #1 Resawn all exposed surfaces

Prime and Painted

Architectural Siding 3/8” Square Edge Rough sawn redwood or equal

Prime and Painted

2x6 Base trim Redwood “All Heart”

Match Existing Prime and Painted

2x6 Decking “V” Groove DF or equal

Match Existing Prime and Painted

2x Fascia/Rake Douglas Fir #1 Resawn all exposed surfaces

Prime and Painted

1x 2 Trim Douglas Fir #1 Resawn all exposed surfaces

Prime and Painted

C. Screws and Fasteners:

1. Wood Siding: #8 x 1-1/2” flathead, stainless steel screws, 12” o/c at all studs, stagger at plywood joints, 2” minimum/maximum from corners.

2. 1 x Trim: #8 x 2-1/2” flat head, stainless steel screws, 18” o/c.

3. 2 x Trim: #10 x 3-1/2” flat head, stainless steel screws. 2 rows – 1-1/2” from top and bottom @ 18” o/c.

3.0 EXECUTION


A. Inspection:

1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that finish carpentry may be completed in accordance with the original design and all pertinent codes and regulations.

B. Correction:

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.

175


2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install all items straight, true, level, plumb and securely anchored in place for long life under hard use.

2. Scribe and closely fit all items, concealing all fastenings and setting all nails for putty.

B. Architectural Wood Siding:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

2. Use fastening system as specified herein.

C. Trim:

1. Install all trim in pieces as long as possible and where joints are unavoidable, join only where solid fastening can be made.

2. Cope all interior angles; miter all exterior angles; miter or scarf all end- to-end joints.

3. Screw interior trim with screws of proper dimension to hold the member firmly in place without splitting the wood.

a. Use fastening system as specified herein.

b. Install continuous bead of construction glue prior to installation of trim pieces. Do not use glue over the ends of trim pieces.

4. Screw all exterior trim with screws, as noted herein, making all joints to exclude water. Seal in waterproof glue or caulking as described in Section 079000, Joint Protection: Sealants and Caulking.

D. Finishing:

1. No coarse grained sandpaper mark, hammer mark, or other imperfection will be permitted.

3.3 CLEAN UP A. Each day, or more often if required, during the execution of this portion of the work

thoroughly sweep down the areas in which finish carpentry is being performed and remove all debris resulting from this installation, leaving the buildings and site in a neat and orderly condition.

176


END OF SECTION

SECTION 072116 - BLANKET INSULATION

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install building insulation as indicated on the project Drawings and as specified herein, including insulation of new ceiling areas and insulation of exterior walls of new mechanical room.



B. Section 092900, Gypsum Board

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Deliver materials to the site and store in a safe dry place with all labels intact and legible at time of installation.

B. Use all means necessary to protect insulating materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. See Section 013543, Special Environmental Requirements and Procedures.

B. Provide materials that are low-emitting.

1. Materials shall meet the limits of the State of California DHS Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Compounds or shall be identified by the following certification programs:

177


1) Greenguard Environmental Institute

2) Scientific Certification Systems

2. Provide cut sheets and/or MSDS sheets showing VOC limits for each material specified herein.

C. Provide materials with highest possible recycled content.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Johns Manville, www.jm.com, 1-800-654-3103, or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Flame Spread for all insulation specified herein shall be 25. Smoke Developed shall be 50. Vapor retarder facer films shall be 0.5 Perms.

B. Thermal Insulation:

1. ComfortTherm - Poly-encapsulated formaldehyde-free Thermal and Acoustical fiber glass insulation:

a. R30 in Roof – wood framing

Thickness: 10 ¼ in.

Width: 24 in.

b. R21 in Exterior Walls and ceiling – wood framing

Thickness: 5 ½ in.

Width: 15 in.

c. R21 in Interior Walls and ceiling – wood framing

Thickness: 5 ½ in.

Width: 15 in.

3.0 EXECUTION


A. Inspection:

178


1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that building insulation may be installed in accordance with the original design and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect and County Representative.

2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect, install all insulation in accordance with instructions of the manufacturer.

B. Inspection:

1. Upon completion of the installation, visually inspect each insulated area and verify that all insulation is complete and properly installed.

3.3 CLEANUP


3.4 WARRANTY


END OF SECTION

179


SECTION 072613 – ABOVE-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install above-grade vapor barriers as shown on project Drawings and as specified herein, including:

1. Moisture-retardant membrane underlayment for roof deck

2. Air/weather resistant barrier over exterior of wall sheathing

3. All related accessories as required for complete installation




1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D226 – Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

2. ASTM D779 – Standard Test Method for Water Resistance of Paper, Paperboard, and Other Sheet Materials by the Dry Indicator Method

3. ASDM D882 – Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting

4. ASTM D4869 – Specification for Asphalt-Saturated (Organic Felt) Underlayment Used in Steep Slope Roofing

5. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

6. ASTM E1677-05 - Standard Specification for an Air Retarder (AR) Material

180


or System for Low-Rise Framed Building Walls

B. Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry (TAPPI)

C. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC)

D. International Code Council Evaluation Services (ICC-ES):

1. Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments – AC 188 and AC 48

2. Evaluation Report No. 1204

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product specifications, technical data and installation instructions for each type of membrane specified herein.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of material specified herein.

D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit either test reports or manufacturer’s certificates indicating materials comply with specified requirements.


A. Qualifications: Installer must have successful experience in the installation of air barrier/secondary weather resistant barriers.

B. Install job mock-up using specified air barrier/secondary weather resistant barrier with system of fastening and taping seams as per manufacturer’s instructions. Obtain Architect’s approval of system for appearance and workmanship standard.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. DuPont Weatherization Systems, 4417 Lancaster Pike, Building 728, Wilmington, DE 19805, 1-800-448-9835, www.tyvek.com.

B. Fortifiber Building Systems Group, 1-800-773-4777, www.fortifiber.com.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Air/Weather Resistant Plastic Sheet Air Barrier: Tyvek CommercialWrap - a high performance, spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated secondary weather resistant barrier. 1. Performance Characteristics:

181


a. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677

b. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B

c. Water Penetration Resistance: 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127

b. Basis Weight: 2.7oz/yd, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410

c. Air Resistance: Air Infiltration at >1500 seconds when tested in accordance withTAPPI T–460, Gurley Hill (sec/100cc)

d. Tensile Strength: 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A

e. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117

2. Sealing Tape/Fasteners:

a. Tyvek Tape.

b. Tyvek Wrap Cap Screws. 1 5/8” rust resistant screws with 2” diameter plastic cap

c. Caulks or Sealants: polyurethane or elastomeric sealants

1) OSI Quad Pro-Series, solvent release butyl rubber sealant

2) DAP Dynaflex 230

3) Other products as approved and recommended by air barrier/weather resistant barrier manufacturer.

B. Moisture-Retardant Membrane Underlayment: Catwalk 30 Synthetic Roofing Underlayment – non-breathable woven polypropylene membrane with U/V resistant polymer coating on each side.

1. Thickness: 12.5 mils

2. Performance Characteristics:

a. Water Vapor Transmission per ASTM E96: 0.6 perms (MVT)

b. Accelerated Aging per AC48: pass

182


c. Ultraviolet Exposure per AC48: pass

d. Water Ponding per AC48: pass

e. Tensile Strength per ASTM D882: MD-175 lb/inch / CD-125 lb/inch

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure items which pass through membrane are properly and rigidly installed and that substrate is free of projections and irregularities which may be detrimental to proper installation of membrane.

B. Inspect roof underlayment for any tape tears, perforations and similar damage and repair as necessary in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended methods prior to prior to application of finish material over underlayment.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install materials and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation.

B. Plastic Sheet Air Barrier:

1. Install barrier over exterior side of exterior wall sheathing after sheathing is installed and before windows and doors are installed.

2. Install lower level barrier prior to upper layers to ensure proper shingling of layers.

3. Overlap barrier at corners of building by a minimum of 12 inches and at vertical seams by a minimum of 6 inches.

4. Ensure barrier is plum and level with foundation, and unroll extending barrier over window and door openings.

5. Attach barrier to wood, insulated sheathing board or exterior gypsum with plastic cap nails every 12” to 18” on vertical stud line with wood stud framing, and screws with washers to metal stud framing.

6. Prepare window and door rough openings as follows:

a. Prepare each window rough opening by cutting a modified “I” pattern in the barrier.

1) Horizontally cut barrier along bottom of header.

183


2) Vertically cut barrier down the center of window openings from the top of the window opening down to 2/3 of the way to the bottom of the window openings.

3) Diagonally cut barrier from the bottom of the vertical cut to the left and right corners of opening.

4) Fold side and bottom flaps into window opening and fasten every 6 inches. Trim off excess.

7. Prepare each rough door opening by cutting a standard “I” pattern in the barrier.

a. Horizontally cut barrier along bottom of door frame header and along top of sill.

b. Vertically cut barrier down the center of door openings from the top of the door opening (header) down to the bottom of the door opening (sill).

c. Fold side flaps inside around door openings and fasten every 6 inches. Trim off excess.

8. Tape all horizontal and vertical seams of barrier and seal all tears and cuts with Tyvek Tape.

C. Moisture Retardant Membrane:

1. Apply membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, laid smooth without folds or bunches of material.

2. Seam Overlap: As recommended by roof underlayment manufacturer for specific roof underlayment material and application indicated.

3. Sealing: Seal edges and items projecting through vapor retarders and vapor barriers.

END OF SECTION

184


SECTION 075100 – BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes all labor, material, equipment, operations, or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the plans and/or herein specified, including all incidentals necessary and required for completion of work under this Section.

B. Provide and install a built-up bituminous roofing system as shown on Drawings and as specified herein, including all related accessories.



.B. Section 061000, Rough Carpentry

C. Section 061600, Roof Fiberboard Sheathing

D. Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection: All Sections.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete

2. ASTM C473 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products

3. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

4. ASTM C1177 – Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing

5. ASTM D41 – Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

6. ASTM D312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing

7. ASTM D2822 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement

185


8. ASTM D3909 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaced With Mineral Granules

9. ASTM D6221 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Bituminous Flashing Sheets for Roofing and Waterproofing

10. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

11. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

12. ASTM E661 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Wood and Wood-Based Floor and Roof Sheathing Under Concentrated Static and Impact Loads

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA).

D. National Roofing Contractors’ Association (NRCA).

E. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (FM).

F. Polyisocyanurate Insulation Manufacturers Association (PIMA).

G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. General: Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Quality Control Submittals specified below at the same time as one package.

1. All submittal packages must be submitted prior to the Pre-Installation conference.

C. Product Data: submit Catalog sheets and installation instructions for each material specified.

D. Shop Drawings: When there is a proposed deviation from the Contract Documents, submit the revised detail labeled as such for approval. On the revised detail show existing conditions and referenced directly to the related details on the Drawings.

1. Submit an accurate layout of the tapered insulation, designed and provided by the membrane manufacturer, showing the slopes to the drains.

a. Show cross section drawings illustrating the location and thickness of tapered insulation pieces and filler pieces.

186


b. Show the thickness of the insulation system at high and low points.

c. Submit an accurate layout of the wood nailers showing their required locations, and required spacing between nailers. Show the direction of the laps in relation to the slope of the deck and the wood nailers.

E. Samples: All submitted samples must be labeled and supplied by manufacturer of materials.

1. Roofing Membrane: One each type

2. Fasteners: Three each type

F. Quality Control Submittals: if requested, Contractor shall provide the following Test Reports:

1. Roof drain, gutter and/or leader test or submit plumber’s verification

G. Contract Closeout Submittals: provide the following at completion of work of this Section:

1. Final invoice for project

2. Close-out of any change orders

3. Final waivers of lien from all material suppliers and subcontractors

4. Completed punch list certification by Contractor and the District.

H. Warranty: Submit the roofing membrane manufacturer's warranty covering workmanship and materials that has been executed by authorized representative of roofing system manufacturer. See part 1.10 of this Section for Warranty requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANLDING

A. Deliver roofing materials to site in manufacturer's unbroken containers bearing the manufacturer's printed labels. Unlabeled cartons or packages shall not be stored on site.

1. All materials that arrive on site must have the following information clearly displayed on packaging:

a. Manufacturer

b. Type (ASTM)c. SP (Softening Point)

187


d. FP (Flash Point)

e. FBT (Finished Blowing Temperature)

f. EVT (Equiviscous Temperature)

2. For all bitumen delivered in tanker trucks, provide same manufacturer's certifications listed above.

B. Store materials a minimum of 6" off the ground, in a dry, well ventilated place protected from the weather.

1. Enclosed trailers are recommended.

2. Temperature conditioned storage is required for temperature sensitive items.

3. Mark for clear and evident identification all material that has been subject to moisture, and remove such damaged materials from site.

C. Handle roll goods with care.

1. Do not use roll goods which have been damaged.

2. Leave materials in their packaging until ready for use.

D. In event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements required by the District.

E. Disposal:

1. All removed materials become the property of the contractor.

2. Inspect ground areas surrounding roof on a daily basis for loose debris.

3. Immediately move all debris off roof and into approved dumpster.

4. Dumpster staging areas must be kept neat and tidy. Do not allow to overflow.

5. All debris must be transported to a legal dumpsite or recycling facility and documentation of each load must be maintained by the Contractor.

1.6 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by

188


roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Jobsite Safety: Execute all operations and provide a safe work environment in accordance to OSHA standards and regulations. This requirement applies to all contractor personnel, associated subcontractors, workers in other trades, and jobsite visitors.

1. Follow all industry fire prevention guidelines for storage of materials, staging areas, roof access, and application means and methods.

2. Any applicable local fire codes supersede industry guidelines.

D. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7-02.

E. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and/or FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "RoofNav" for Class 1 for noncombustible construction and Class A for exterior fire rating, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.

F. UL Listing: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test methods mandated by UL. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.


A. Certifications:

1. General: Provide letter from the roofing membrane manufacturer certifying the proposed roofing assembly, compatibility of materials and total R-value of the insulation system.

2. Contractor's Certification:

a. Provide a letter from the membrane manufacturer certifying that the applicator is licensed or approved to install the roof system.

b. Provide names, address, and telephone numbers of five buildings where the applicator has installed similar roof systems that have the manufacturer’s guarantee issued. Include the types of systems installed, the manufacturer's name, and the guarantee numbers.

c. Letter certifying that the job foreman or crew chief and at least one other member of the roofing crew have installed at least similar

189


systems and are thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the installation.

B. Contractor’s Qualifications:

1. Roofing Firm Qualifications:

a. Installation of a minimum of ten roofs of comparable size, scope, and complexity as the roofing system specified in the Contract Documents, including all related sheet metal work, if applicable. (List last five such jobs within 50 miles of the job site, including address, type of system and number of plies, if applicable, square footage, date installed and District/agent with whom contracted).

2. Project Foreman Qualifications:

a. Installation of a minimum of five roofs of comparable size, scope, and complexity as the Work of this Section of roofing system specified in the Contract Documents, for which this individual served as field foreman in direct, responsible charge of all roofing work crews. (List last five such jobs within 50 miles of the job site, including address, type of system and number of plies, if applicable, square footage, date installed and District/agent with whom contracted)

b. Successful completion of a formal instructional and training program for the installation of the specified roofing systems, as evidenced by one of the following:

1) A certificate of journeyman roofer as issued under a union apprenticeship-journeyman training program duly registered with the State Labor Department; or

2) A certificate or diploma issued by a vocational training school or national roofing manufacturer attesting to successful completion of an equivalent formal training program, (Submit copy of certificate for above); or

3) A minimum of five years of practical experience in the installation of all aspects and details of the specified roofing system(s) including related sheet metal work as determined from a pre-qualification interview.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to Manufacturer’s written instructions and guarantee requirements.

1. Do not start roofing if rain is imminent, or ambient temperature is below

190


45°F.

2. If rain occurs during roof membrane application, cease operations and protect deck, insulation, penetrations and membrane from water damage and intrusion.

B. Flame-heated Equipment:

1. Locate and use flame-heated equipment so as not to endanger the structure or other materials on the site or adjacent property.

2. Do not place flame heating equipment on roof.

3. Provide and maintain fire extinguisher.

C. Comply with all fire regulations. Ensure properly rated, charged, and inspected fire extinguishers are on the roof and staging area.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Comply with provisions of Section 013119, Project Meetings.

B. Prior to commencement of roof deck construction, a pre-installation conference shall be conducted at Project Site. Those in attendance shall include the Architect, the District and District’s insurer (if applicable), Testing and Inspecting Agency Representative, Roofing Contractor and/or Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

C. The following methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system installation shall be reviewed during the meeting:

1. Means, methods, and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Project Safety Plan for site conditions, enforcement, compliance, or District imposed restrictions that may be required.

3. Finalization of construction schedule and verification of availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examination of site for approved staging areas, disposal sites, and documentation of existing conditions prior to contractor mobilization. Establish scope of work for site restoration and responsibilities.

5. Examination of site for condition and completion of areas adjacent to work area. Establish protection required for existing surfaces.

6. Examination of deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

191


7. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing operations.

8. Base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

9. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

10. Temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

11. Work limitation(s) by contractor including; start times, end times, days of the week, noise mitigation, fume control and any part of the work that would effect normal building operations.

12. Trade coordination necessary for job completion.

13. Roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's twenty (20)–year standard roof system warranty issued by the manufacturer. Warranty shall run from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Roofing installer’s warranty shall be signed by Installer and shall cover entire work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system for a period of two (2) years.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Roof System: HAL Industries, Inc., or MFM Building Products Corp.

B. Surface Coating: Jones-Blair Neogard

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Recover Board: ½ - inch Fiberboard

B. Membrane Layers:

1. HAL PolyMax (Hal-43-FB-[c-ca]) or MFM PolyPly (MFM -42-FB-C-AC).

192


a. Polyester Membrane Ply Sheets: Ply sheet made from spunbonded, heat stabilized polyester fabric, pre-dipped in hot roofing grade asphalt bitumen to form a high strength, highly absorbent ply sheet for built up roofing.

C. Flashings:

1. Modified Base Flashing Sheet: A premium elastomeric, modified bitumen flashing sheet incorporating a fiber glass/polyester composite mat in a blend of SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene) rubber and high quality asphalt that is surfaced with ceramic-coated roofing granules, per ASTM D6221, Type I:

D. Surface Coating:

1. Emulsion, Chopped Glass

2. Elastacryl Acrylic Roof Coating: an elastomeric acrylic roof coating for use on built-up roof surfaces.

E. Accessories:

1. Cant: 3” Wood Fiber or Perlite type strip

2. High Penetration-Index Asphalt: A special high-softening point and high-penetration asphalt for use with high–performance BUR systems. Exceeds all ASTM D312 specifications and Federal Specification #SS-A-666. Type IV (steep). Penetration-Index Number (PIN) of 20–23.

3. Asphalt Primer: High–penetration, low viscosity. ASTM D41 / Federal Specification #SS-A-701.

4. Flashing Cement: Trowelable, fibrated asphalt mastic for flashing requirements on horizontal and vertical surfaces. ASTM D2822, Type I / Federal Specification #SS-C-153, Type I.

5. Nails: Square or round head cap nail (Simplex). Minimum 15/16” head diameter, annular thread.

6. Glass Fiber Reinforcement: MIL-V-1140F-Mod.

7. Asphalt Emulsion

8. Rosin Sized sheathing Paper

3.0 EXECUTION

193


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work of other trades which penetrate the roof deck or require personnel and equipment to traverse the roof deck have been completed.

B. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, and unevenness that would prevent the execution and quality of application and roofing system as specified.

1. Do not proceed with application of roofing system until defects are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Inspect wood deck closely for the following:

1. Proper securement of panels to joists

2. Proper space between panels

3. Damaged panels

4. Delamination

5. Warping or rotting

B. Unacceptable panels should be brought to the attention of the General Contractor, Architect and District and must be corrected prior to installation of roofing system.

C. Examine underside of deck to ensure all joints are blocked.

C. Insure that wood blocking has been installed at perimeter and as required by specifications and primary roofing manufacturer.

E. Make sure that all counterflashing receivers, curbs, etc., are constructed in such a manner as to provide a minimum 8-inch base flashing height measured from the finished roof's surface to the top of the base flashing membrane.

F. No Roofing work shall be attempted or completed during inclement weather other than installation of emergency water stops. Inclement weather shall be defined as, but not limited to: precipitation / fog / strong wind / frost.

1. Water stops must be cleanly removed prior to resumption of roof application.

2. Any and all standing water, should it be present, must be removed from the roof surface and the area(s) completely dried before roofing work commences or resumes.

3. No roofing materials shall be applied when the ambient temperature is below

194


40 degrees F.

4. The Contractor is responsible for materials or coatings that wash off or become damaged until such materials have achieved proper cure.

5. Any metal surface, metal flange or cementatious surfaces to receive membrane flashings shall be coated with asphalt primer. Primer must be applied and allowed to dry prior to covering with the membrane.

G. All mechanical equipment, HVAC ductwork supports, electrical conduit, water lines and gas lines that rest on the roof surface shall be raised and fitted with block sleepers. Block sleepers shall rest on protection pads (protection pads shall be set into a full bed of roof cement) ON TOP OF THE EW ROOF SYSTEM PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF EMULSION CHOPPED GLASS AND SURFACE COATING.

H. Any details or procedures not covered in the specifications shall be installed or performed using the recommended procedure found in the current NRCA Roofing & Waterproofing Manual.

3.3 HEATING BITUMEN

A. Use separate kettles or tankers for heating different types of asphalt.

B. Strictly regulate the heating process by means of an automatic thermostatic control of an approved type for positive temperature control.

C. Provide kettles or tankers with the following features:

1. Immersion tube

2. Fired by liquid propane gas

3. 100% safety shutoff

D. Equip each kettle or tanker with a recording thermometer that will graphically indicate and record on a chart the maximum and minimum temperatures to which materials have been heated.

1. Provide recording thermometers capable of accurately recording temperatures as high as 600°F and as low as 0°F.

2. Properly maintain the thermometer at all times. Do not use kettles or tankers without recording thermometers in good working condition.

3. At the end of each working day, turn the chart from the thermometer on each kettle or tanker over to the District.

195


a. If any bitumen is overheated, remove it from the site in the presence of the District.

b. If any under-heated or overheated bitumen has been applied on the roof, remove and re-apply that portion of the roof.

E. Preferred location for locating and heating the kettle is to place on the ground, with the asphalt pumped to the roof.

1. If kettle must be placed on the roof, place kettle on a heavy sheet metal tray on dunnage. Extend metal tray 18” beyond the sides and ends of the kettle and turn up 1” at all edges.

a. Verify deck construction. Obtain consent from structural Engineer.

2. Gas Cylinders:

a. Place only one gas cylinder on the roof at any one time.

b. Locate the cylinder at least four feet away from the kettle. c. Vertically brace the cylinder.

d. Shade cylinder from the sun.

3. Provide fire extinguishers on the roof in the vicinity of the kettles as required to ensure the safety of the roof.

F. Heat the bitumen in accordance with the Equiviscous Temperature information furnished by the bitumen manufacturer for that specific run of bitumen.

1. Do not heat the asphalt to or above the actual COC Flash Point (ANSI/ASTM D92); or the finished blowing temperature for more than 4 hours, in any circumstance.

2. Maintain the temperature of the bitumen at the point of application within the Equiviscous Temperature Range.

a. Use insulated pipes, buckets, luggers, and other insulated roofer’s equipment as required by the field conditions.

b. Contractor must have at least one hand held thermometer for each crew installing hot asphalt in order to ensure compliance with EVT.

3. The accepted application temperature range for asphalt is the equiviscous temperature (EVT), ±25°F. All felt installation must occur in this range to be acceptable.

196


3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install all components of roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation.

B. Verify that all requirements for examination and preparation have been met before commencing installation.

C. Application of Recover Board/Insulation/Cant Strip:

1. Over the entire roof area install insulation (NOTE: The insulation/recover board shall be installed OVER a rosin-sized sheathing paper.). Install only as much insulation/recover board as can be covered by roofing membrane the same day. Lay insulation/recover board in parallel courses. Stagger end joints in adjoining courses. Butt joints tightly; occasional joint widths up to 1/8” will be allowed. Fill all widths greater than 1/8” with scrap insulation/recover board to achieve a consistent surface. Install insulation flush to any parapets, curbs, or wood nailers. Secure each board with a minimum of one(1) approved nail per every two(2) square feet. The approved nail must be of sufficient length to penetrate the structural deck a minimum of ¾”. Set nail heads slightly below the surface of the board. Insulation shall be kept dry at all times.

2. At all angles of the roof deck, vertical walls and curbs, furnish and install 4-inch minimum cant strip. Nail in place or adhere in place with hot asphalt. Fit cant strip flush at ends and to wall/curb surfaces. Where scuppers occur, install cant strip two(2) inches back from scupper opening and bevel cant strip six(6) inches from the ends.

D. Roofing Membrane:

1. Over the prepared insulated surface install three (3) plies of HAL PolyMax Membrane in shingle fashion lapping plies 26½ inches. 26½ -inch lap will provide a 13-inch exposure. (The 26½ -inch lap and 13-inch exposure shall be uniform and consistent throughout the roof field beyond the full width starter strip. Follow lap lines provided). The polyester membranes shall be turned up two (2) inches above the top of the cant at all walls and vertical surfaces and shall be solidly mopped to the cant and vertical surface.

a. Starter strips of 13 inches, 26 inches and 39 inches (full width) shall be installed starting at the low point of the roof deck. The full width starter strip shall be lapped 26½ inches leaving a 13-inch exposure.

b. The polyester plies shall be laid so that flow of water is over or parallel to the laps, NEVER AGAINST THE LAPS.

c. All plies of the polyester membrane shall be set in Type IV asphalt bitumen applied at a rate of 30 – 35 lbs. per 100 square feet per ply.

197


The polyester membranes shall be completely mopped the full width of each lap. Interply asphalt bitumen shall be uniform and complete, i.e., in no place shall polyester membrane touch polyester membrane. NOTE: RECOMMENDED TEMPERATURE OF ASPHALT AT POINT OF APPLICATION IS 400 F – 440 . UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL APPLICATION TEMPERATURE EXCEED 450 F.

d. Care should be taken not to induce stretch into the polyester membrane.

e. While the bitumen is still hot, a light brooming may be required to solidly embed the seams of the polyester membrane.

f. All plies of the polyester membrane shall lay without wrinkles, buckles or kinks.

g. Any roof or extended roof area having slope greater than one (1) inch per horizontal foot requires mechanical attachment to the roof membranes to deck with approved metal capped roofing nails. The roofing nails shall be positioned on twelve (12) –inch centers, any required roofing nails shall be overlapped by the next two (2) plies of polyester membrane.

h. At the end of each day’s work install water stops to protect the substrate against water penetration. Detach water stops cleanly at the start of the next day’s work.

E. Horizontal Flashing:

1. Roof penetrations: All penetrations through the built-up roofing, e.g., vent pipes, stacks, duct work, etc., must have a proper sleeve flashing with flange, pan flashing with flange, or other flanged flashing installed. ROOF JACKS, COLLARS, PAN FLASHINGS, ETC. SHALL BE MADE OF LEAD OR, AT A MINIMUM, THE FLANGE SHALL BE LEAD.

2. Pitch Pans: Where column stubs, sign anchors, railing posts, tank supports, antenna support cables, or other projections extend through the roof surface, install a minimum 3-inch high flashing collar with a minimum 4-inch flange. Install flange on top of the completed roof assembly in a uniform bed of flashing cement and flash per instructions found in this section. Fill the pan with Neoprene Flashing Cement to a point slightly above the top edge of the pan collar. NOTE: INSIDE SURFACE OF PITCH PAN COLLAR SHALL BE CLEANED WITH MINERAL SPIRITS OR SOLVENT BASED CLEANER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

3. All flanges of metal flashing shall be primed with asphalt primer and allowed to dry before covering with membrane flashing

198


4. Roof Field.

a. All flanges of lead roof jacks, collars, pan flashings, etc., SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF SIX(6) INCHES..

b. All flanges shall be set in a uniform bed of flashing cement on top of the completed roof assembly.

c. All flanges shall be covered with two(2) plies of polyester membrane set in Type IV asphalt bitumen. The first ply of polyester membrane shall cover the flange and extend a minimum of six(6) inches beyond the edge of the flange onto the roof surface. The second ply of polyester membrane shall also cover the flange and extend a minimum of nine(9) inches beyond the edge of the flange onto the roof surface.

5. Roof Perimeter

a. All flanges of sheet metal gravel stop or other perimeter metal flashing shall be a minimum of three(3) inches.

b. The roof membrane assembly shall be installed to a point slightly beyond the roof edge. A suitable metal flashing of proper gauge and dimension shall be mechanically fastened to the wood nailer over the completed roof membrane assembly. The flange (top AND bottom of flange must be primed) of the metal flashing shall be set in a uniform bed of flashing cement prior to fastening.

c. Strip in flange of the metal flashing with two(2) plies of polyester membrane. The first ply of polyester membrane shall cover the flange and extend a minimum of six(6) inches beyond the edge of the flange onto the roof surface. The second ply of polyester membrane shall also cover the flange and extend a minimum of nine(9) inches beyond the edge of the flange onto the roof surface.

F. Vertical Flashing:

1. All cementatious surfaces and metal surfaces that are to receive membrane flashing shall be primed with asphalt primer applied at a rate of ¾ gallons per 100 sf. Primer shall be allowed to dry.

2. Base Flashing

a. Base flashing height shall not be less than six(6) inches or more than fourteen(14) inches above the roof surface.

b. Starting a minimum of four(4) inches out from the toe of the cant on the roof surface install one(1) ply of polyester membrane into a

199


uniform mopping of Type IV asphalt bitumen. Extend the first ply of polyester membrane over the cant and up the vertical surface a minimum of six(6) inches. Lap the end of each ply of polyester a minimum of four(4) inches. Cover the first ply with one(1) ply of mineral surfaced modified cap sheet also installed into a uniform mopping of Type IV asphalt bitumen. Lap the ends of the cap sheet a minimum of four(4) inches. (Note: i.e. End laps of the membrane and cap sheet shall be staggered .end laps shall not coincide). Inside and outside corners shall be lapped a minimum of eight(8) inches.

c. As applicable, install flashing membrane to the outside edge of the parapet walls.

d. Rub or brush flashing ply thoroughly to assure adhesion to the vertical surface and to eliminate any air form being trapped under the flashing membrane. The base flashing membrane shall be fully adhered to the roof, cant and vertical surface so that in no place does the flashing membrane drape, bulge, curl, ridge or wrinkle.

e. Mechanically fasten the base flashings at the top on six(6) inch centers using metal capped fasteners.

f. As applicable, reposition or install metal counter flashing and/or metal coping. Remove any hardened caulking at the reglet and at metal to metal joints. Scrape or wire brush to assure clean surface. Apply elastomeric caulking/sealant to reglet and to metal joints.

3. Wall Flashing

a. Vertical surfaces in excess of fourteen(14) inches shall be flashed only after the base flashing is in place.

b. Wall flashing shall overlap the top of the base flashing a minimum of six(6) inches.

c. Wall flashing membrane shall be full width plies installed vertically. Side laps of the wall flashing membrane shall be a minimum of four(4) inches. Inside and outside corners shall be lapped a minimum of eight(8) inches.

d. As applicable, install wall flashing membrane to outside edge of parapet walls

e. Rub or brush flashing ply thoroughly to assure adhesion to the vertical surface and to eliminate any air form being trapped under the flashing membrane. The base flashing membrane shall be fully adhered to the roof, cant and vertical surface so that in no place does the flashing membrane drape, bulge, curl, ridge or wrinkle.

200


f. Mechanically fasten the base flashings at the top on six(6) inch centers using metal capped fasteners.

g. As applicable, reposition or install metal counter flashing and/or metal coping. Remove any hardened caulking at the reglet and at metal to metal joints. Scrape or wire brush to assure clean surface. Apply elastomeric caulking/sealant to reglet and to metal joints.

3.5 ROOF SURFACING APPLICATION

A. Emulsion, Chopped Glass and Elastomeric Coating:

1. Spray apply ECG (emulsion, chopped glass) to the roof surface and base flashing membranes at a rate of nine(9) gallons of emulsion and three(3) lbs of chopped glass roving per 100 square feet. The ECG must be spray applied with equipment capable of dispersing the emulsion and chopped glass simultaneously (For-Tron-Gun). The ECG shall be applied with the spray directed at the ply laps. The ECG shall be applied in an even and uniform manner; glass fiber tufts will not be allowed in the finished surface. Allow the ECG coating to thoroughly dry; drying time may vary depending on ambient temperatures and humidity. Delay application of acrylic coating 5 – 7 days minimum.

2. Prior to application of acrylic coating, carefully power-wash roof surface; allow roof surface to dry. To a clean and dry roof surface, spray apply acrylic coating to the roof surface and flashing membranes at a rate of three(3) gallons per 100 square feet. The coating shall be applied in two(2) coats of 1 ½ gallons each in a “cross hatch” manner. Allow the first coat of acrylic to thoroughly dry before application of the second coat. The finished application shall be uniform and free of streaks. (Note: Application of acrylic coating may be performed with rollers providing the finished surface is uniform and free of streaks.).


A. Field Samples:

1. Draw a quart sample from each load of bitumen arriving at the job site in the presence of the Inspector of Record, Architect and/or the District, who will take it for laboratory analysis.

B. Test Strip (if requested by the Architect and/or the District):

1. When and where directed by the Architect and/or District, and before surfacing is applied to the completed membrane:

a. Cut a strip 3” wide by 40” long thru all plies of the roofing system.

201


Number of such test strips may be as required.

b. After removal of the strip, immediately repair the area by applying the same number of plies of the same kind of felt and bitumen over the filled strip with the first ply.

1) Lap each edge 12” and each succeeding ply lapping the preceding ply by at least 3” on all edges.

c. Approximate quantities of components within roofing membrane will be determined according to ASTM D3617.

2. Turn the test strips over to the District’s Representative for examination.

a. If the test strips indicate the roofing system complies with the specifications, the District shall bear the cost of the test strip work.

b. If the strips indicate the roofing system does not comply with the Specifications, the Contractor shall bear the cost of the test strip work, and shall repair or replace all roofing work as required to comply with the Specifications, at the Contractor’s expense.

C. Non-Compliance:

1. Failure of the bitumen samples or the test strip samples to meet the Specification requirements will be cause for rejection of the Work.

3.6 INSPECTION

A. After all roofing system work is completed, provide an inspection by the roofing system manufacturer's representative. Representative must be employed expressly as a technical employee and not concurrently function in a sales role. Provide, via the representative, documentation verifying that roofing system has been installed according to the Specifications.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Keep newly installed roofing membrane clean and new in appearance under the assumption that all areas of roofing are aesthetically essential. Contractor may be directed to remedy – and if no remedy available – replace, newly roofed areas that are not maintained as such during the balance of installation.

B. Restore all other building surfaces and areas affected by roofing application to same condition of aforementioned on day of job start.

C. Remove all debris from roof and staging areas.

202


END OF SECTION SECTION 076000 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install all sheet metal and all flashing, including items not specifically described in other Sections but required to prevent the penetration of water through the exterior shell of the building as shown on project Drawings, including:1. Gutters and Rainwater Leaders2. Stucco Reglets3. Any other roof penetrations



B. Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection: All Sections

C. Section 092423, Portland Cement Stucco

D. Section 092900, Gypsum Board

E. Section 099100, Painting

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASTM A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) for Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.

3. ASTM A792 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

4. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

203


B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA):

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition.

C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA):

1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, current edition.

1.4 LEED ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Not used

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: submit manufacturer’s product information, including installation instructions, product specifications and standard details, including manufacturer’s standard range of colors and finish options.

1. Submit color chips for Architect’s review and selection.

C. Samples: submit the following for Architect’s review and acceptance:

1. Gutter and downspout sample: 12" long, full section.

2. Hanger brackets, braces, and stiffeners: one of each type.

3. Fasteners: six of each type.

D. Shop Drawings: submit Shop Drawings and installation details showing methods of installation, sections and details, flashings and all other accessories.

1. Shop Drawings must show interface with all related work of other trades and proposed identification of component parts and finishes.

2. Submit large-scale Shop Drawings (minimum 3/4"=1’-0’).

E. Warrant: submit manufacturer’s standard warranty information for review and acceptance. Warranty shall cover corrosion of metal components.

1. Installer’s warranty shall cover fastener failure, water penetration at joints or failure to drain.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for storage and handling.

204


B. Use all means necessary to protect flashing and sheet metal before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

C. Stack materials to prevent twisting, bending and abrasion, and store in a manner that allows for proper ventilation.

D. Slope materials and components to ensure proper drainage.

E. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining.

F. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary for the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the City.


A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall specialize in manufacturing products specified in this Section.

B. Qualifications of Installers:

1. Installer shall be thoroughly experienced in the work of this Section, including all materials and methods required, and shall provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during the execution of work of this Section.

a. This qualified person shall direct the entire flashing and sheet metal fabrication and installation and shall ensure materials are installed in accordance with all pertinent local codes and regulations, including SMACNA’s Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition at time of construction.

C. Field Measurements: Verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of materials.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Gutters: shop provided

B. Fry Reglet Architectural Metals, www.fryreglet.com or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Where sheet metal is required and no material or gauge is indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install the highest quality commensurate with the referenced standards.

1. Minimum thickness of sheet metal shall be no less than 20 gauge galvanized metal.

205

http://www.fryreglet.com/


2. Galvanized Iron

a. Sheet metal or iron shall be a standard brand of openhearth copperbearing steel, copper-molybdenum iron, or pure iron sheets.

3. Zinc Coating:

a. All galvanized sheets shall have a zinc coating applied by hot dip process to all surfaces.

b. Zinc coating shall weigh not less than 1 1/4 ounces per square foot nor more than 1 1/2 ounces per square foot of surfaces covered and shall conform with ASTM A-93.

B. Gutters: See Section 075100 Built up Bituminous Roofing

1. Type: Standard B style beveled box per SMACNA

2. Size: see Drawings

3. Gauge: 20 gauge

C. Rainwater Leaders:

1. Sheet metal – 2” plain round – 22 gauge

D. Nails, Rivets and Fasteners:

1. Use only soft iron rivets having rust-resistance coating, galvanized nails, and cadium plated screws and washers in connection with galvanized iron and steel.

E. Flux:

1. All flux used for galvanized iron or steel shall be raw muriatic acid.

F. Solder:

a. All solder used on galvanized sheet steel shall conform with the current ASTM B-32.

G. Other Materials:

1. Fry stucco reglet model PCS-75-25/25. Submit finish samples to architect for approval

2. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of flashing and sheet metal shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the approval of the Architect.

206


3.0 EXECUTION


A. Inspection:

1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that flashing and sheet metal may be installed in accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, and the referenced standards.

B. Correction:



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Form all sheet metal accurately to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing all molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit and soldering securely.

2. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Architect, turn all exposed edges back 1/2 inch.

B. Expansion:

1. Form, fabricate, and install all sheet metal so as to adequately provide for expansion and contraction in the finished work.

C. Weatherproofing:

1. Finish watertight and weather tight where so required.

2. Make all lock seam work flat and true to line, and sweated full of solder.

3. All flat lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, shall be at least 1/2 inch wide.

4. Lap seams not soldered shall lap according to pitch but in no case less than three inches.

5. Make all flat and lap seams in direction of flow.

D. Joints:

207


1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or stiffness.

2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for all runs of more than 40 feet except where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper installation

E. Nailing:

1. Where ever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats without nailing through the metal.

2. In general, space all nails, rivets, and screws not more than eight inches apart and, where exposed to the weather, use lead washers.

3. For nailing into wood, use barbed roofing nails 1-1/4 inches long by 11 gauge.

4. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs.

F. Embedment:

1. Embed all metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of caulking, using the materials and methods described in Section 079000, Sealants and Caulking.

G. Soldering:

1. General:

a. Thoroughly clean and tin all joint materials prior to soldering.b. Perform all soldering slowly with a well heated copper in order to heat the

seams thoroughly and to completely fill them with solder.

c. Perform all soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinned for use.

d. Make all exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat, full flowing, and smooth.

3.3 TESTS

A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate by hose or standing water that all sheet metal is completely watertight.

3.4 CLEAN UP


3.5 WARRANTY

A. The products delivered shall be free of defects.

208


B. Manufacturer’s standard performance warranty, as available for specified installation and environmental conditions.

END OF SECTION

209


SECTION 079000 - SEALANTS AND CAULKING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install all sealants and caulking where required as shown on project Drawings and as specified herein.

1. Provide a positive barrier against the penetration of air and moisture at joints between items where caulking is essential to the continued integrity of the barrier.

2. Such caulking will normally be performed under the work of various Sections but shall be performed in strict accordance with the provisions herein.



B. Section 062000, Finish Carpentry

C. Division 9 – Finishes

D. Division 22 – Mechanical

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASTM E90 & C919

2. ASTM C834, Type C and Type OP, Grade -18 degrees C.

3. ASTM C1193, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

4. ASTM C1472, Standard Guide for Calculating Movement and Other Effects When Establishing Sealant Joint Width.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

210



B. Before work is started, a sample opening of each type of joint shall be caulked where directed. Samples shall show materials, workmanship, bond, and color or caulking material as selected for the work. The materials, workmanship, bond, and color of the caulking work throughout the project shall match that of the approved sample joints.


A. Storage:

1. Store all caulking materials and equipment under conditions recommended by its manufacturer.

2. Do not use materials stored for a period of time exceeding the maximum recommended shelf-life of the material.

3. Sealant must be stored in original unopened container between 50 and 80 degrees F.

B. Protection:

1. Use all means necessary to protect caulking materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

C. Repairs:

1. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the County.


A. Qualifications of Applicators:

1. Applicator of caulk and sealants shall be fully qualified with a minimum of five years’ prior experience in similar work and who have been specially trained in the techniques of caulking and who are completely familiar with the written recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being used.

2. Indication of lack of skill on the part of caulking installers shall be sufficient grounds for the Architect to reject installed caulking and to require its immediate removal and complete recaulking at no additional cost to the County.

B. Qualification of Manufacturer(s):

1. All caulking and sealant materials shall be new stock, manufactured not more than six months prior to use in the project.

2. Whenever the materials are specified by the name of the manufacturer, it shall be taken as intended to mean and specify the materials described, or any other

211


approved made equal thereto, for the purpose intended. the Architect shall be the sole judge as to such equality.

3. Where mixing is required, mix no more material than can be installed within four hours maximum and in amounts not to exceed 5-gallon-unit increments.





a) Greenguard Environmental Institute

b) Scientific Certification Systems

2. Provide cut sheet and MSDS showing VOC limits for each adhesive used in the building.

a. Adhesives must meet and/or exceed VOC limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168.

3. Provide cut sheet and MSDS showing VOC limits for each sealant used in the building.

a. All sealants used as filler must meet or exceed Bay Area Resources Board Re. 8, Rule 51.

b. Limits on VOCs for sealants for architectural use are 250 grams/liter (different levels for roadways, roofing material installation, PVC welding, and other).

c. Limits on VOCs for sealant primers for architectural-nonporous are 250 grams/liter; for architectural-porous are 775 grams/liter.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. GE - Silicones, 187 Danbury Road, Wilton, CT 06897, 1-800-255-8886, www.GESilicones.com, or approved equal.

B. Pacific Polymers International, Inc., 12271 Monarch Street, Garden Grove, CA 92841, 1-714-898-0025, www.pacpoly.com, or approved equal.

212


2.2 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. All caulking and sealant materials, unless otherwise specifically approved by the Architect, shall be a single or double component, primerless, non-sagging type in neutral color or other color approved by the Architect where exposed to view, and shall be one of the following or an equal approval by the Architect.

B. Joint Compound Sealant: ELASTO-THANE 230

1. Composition: Polyurethane-based joint sealant.

2. Basic Uses: For sealing and caulking all joints that are subject to contraction and expansion. Bonds to concrete, wood, glass, and metal.

3. Limitations: Containers that have been opened must be used up within one or two days since it is a moisture-reactive material. It sets up when exposed to air. All surfaces must be completely free of foreign matter. (White color may discolor from exposure to U.V. and also from fluorescent light.)

4. Sizes: Available in 5-gallon pails, 10.5 oz. cartridges and 20.3 oz. sausages

5. Standards: Federal Specification TT-S-230c. Type II, Class A. ASTM C-920-87, Type S, Class 25, Use NT, M, and A.

C. RCS20 SILICONIZED ACRYLIC SEALANT

1. Basic Uses: Sealant is designed to provide water and weather protection by airtight seal when used on interior and exterior surfaces. Sealant can be used for caulking window and door frames, vinyl, steel, aluminum, plywood siding, drywall, baseboards, bathroom and kitchen fixtures, primed fiber cement siding, and conventional stucco.

a. Sealant is useful as an acoustical sealant in construction of walls, windows, doors, ceilings, and floors to reduce sound transmission in wall partitions to maintain specified STC and OITC values.

2. Limitations:

a. Do not use for structural repairs.

b. Not recommended for below grade or water immersion applications.

c. Not to be used in applications where the surrounding materials will exceed sustained temperatures of 180 degrees F.

213


d. Do not expose to water or rain for at least 24 hours after application.

e. Application is recommended when temperature of air and surface is 50 degrees F or above for a 24 hour period.

f. Do not apply if relative humidity is above 90%.

g. Do not freeze.

3. Packaging & Sizes: Sealant is available in 10.1 fl. oz. plastic caulking cartridges and 5-gallon plastic pails.

4. Standards:

a. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM C834, Type C (clear) and Type OP (opaque colors), Grade -18 degrees C.

b. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM E90 and C919.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 CAULKING SCHEDULE

A. Carefully study the Drawings and furnish and install the proper caulking at each point where called for on the Drawings plus at all other points where caulking is required to maintain the continued integrity of the watertight barrier.


A. Inspection:

1. Prior to all caulking, carefully inspect the surface to which caulking is to be applied and verify that they are clean, sound, and free from deleterious material which might adversely affect the bond.

2. Verify that caulking may be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Corrections:

1. Clean all surfaces as necessary in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect and do not proceed with installation of caulking in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been resolved.

a. Non-structural shrinkage cracks larger than 1/16" and up to 1/4" must be treated and repaired accordingly prior to sealant application.

214


3. Use of a suitable latex or oil-based primer prior to application of sealant may be appropriate and shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and per the Architect’s approval.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install caulking in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, taking care to produce beads of proper width and depth, to tool as recommenced by the manufacturer, and to immediately remove all surplus caulking.

B. Joint Design:

1. Suitable for all properly designed joints following accepted engineering practices.

2. Joint width must be a minimum of 4 times the anticipated movement.

C. Surface Preparation:

1. All joints must be absolutely clean and all curing compounds, old caulks, grease, waterproofing compounds, etc., must be removed.

2. For non-porous surfaces such as glass, metal, etc., cleaning with M.E.K. or Toluene is recommended.

3. Polyethylene rod or polyurethane foam is recommended as a joint-filler and back-up material. Fillers treated with bituminous products, grease or oil, should not be used. Where present, they must be removed or separated by vinyl tape or polyethylene film. Some surfaces may require the Elasto-Thane Primer.

a. Backer rod must be installed when joint is larger than 3/8".

D. Application:

1. Apply by caulking gun, hand-pressure-type, or pour from container.

2. Bulk sealant can be applied by pumping equipment, trowel or putty knife.

3. Press firmly into joint to assure good contact to the sides of the joint.

3.4 CLEAN-UP


3.5 WARRANTY


215


B. All products proven to be defective in manufacture will be replaced at no cost to the County. Since the use of these products is beyond our control we cannot assume any risk or liability for results obtained, nor can we accept damages in excess of the purchase price of these products.

END OF SECTION

216


SECTION 081100 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install non-rated metal doors and frames as shown on project Drawings and as specified herein.




C. Section 087100, Door Hardware


E. Section 099100, Painting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A224.1 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames

2. ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

3. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames

4. ANSI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames

5. ANSI A115.IG - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

217


1. ASTM A366 - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality

2. ASTM A568 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled

3. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

4. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

5. ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

6. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

7. ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings

8. ASTM D1735 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Fog Apparatus

C. SDI 105-92 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames

D. DHI - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware

E. WHI - Warnock Hersey International, Division of Inchcape Testing Services


A. All materials shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A250.8 - "SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

B. Certification of Label Construction: For components exceeding Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), furnish inspection certificate stating that component construction conforms to UL rating requirements only if Architect is aware of such a limitation and has allowed the non-labeled unit.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

218


1. Indicate door and frame elevations and sections, materials, gauges, finishes, fabrication and erection details, and locations of finish hardware by dimension. Fabrication may not commence until all details are approved.

C. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Submit manufacturer’s information on standard finishes and colors for Architect’s selection.

E. Submit Technical Data information relating to materials used on the project.


A. Doors and frames shall be delivered cardboard-wrapped, crated, and palletized to provide protection while in transit and for the duration of site storage.

B. All materials shall be stored under cover in a dry, secure place, and shall be stored on a 4" elevation, such as wood blocking. The use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters should be avoided to prevent forming of humidity chambers thus causing rust.

C. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

D. Should the cardboard wrapping on the doors/framing become wet, the cartons should be removed immediately. In the event this occurs, provide 1/4" spacing between doors to provide proper air circulation.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Windsor Republic Doors, 155 Republic Drive, McKenzie, TN 38201, 1-800-733-3667, www.republicdoor.com, or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS – GENERAL

A. All doors and frames shall be in conformance with ANSI SDI-100.

B. All doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality steel per ASTM A366 and A568:

1. Cold Rolled Steel: Commercial Steel in accordance with ASTM A1008, ASTM A568 and ASTM A1011.

2. Galvannealed Steel: Commercial quality, hot dipped, A-40 galvannealed steel in accordance with ASTM A653, A-60 galvannealed steel, G-60, and G-90 galvanized steel shall be supplied when specified.

219


C. Coating Materials: Use manufacturer’s standard rust inhibiting primer or approved equal conforming to ANSI A224.1-1990.

2.3 FLUSH DOORS

A. DL Series Flush Doors:

1. Doors shall be 1-3/4" thick full flush, fabricated from 16 gauge steel.

2. Doors shall have a reinforced 3/4" cell honeycomb core 100% bonded to skins to ensure exceptional strength and flatness.

a. Honeycomb core shall have an STC rating of 38 standard and a U Factor of .342.

3. Lock edges shall be non-beveled and reinforced with a continuous 16 gauge steel channel and shall have 16 gauge reinforcements for integral cylindrical locks in accordance with ANSI A115 standards.

a. Doors shall be factory prepared to receive finish hardware per Schedule.

4. Hinge edges shall be non-beveled and shall be reinforced with a continuous 16 gauge channel projection welded to each skin at a maximum of 5" on center.

a. Hinge channels shall have an additional 9 gauge reinforcement at each hinge location, and shall provide over 3/16" reinforcement.

5. Channels shall be continuous flush 16 gauge projection welded to both face sheets every 2-1/2" on center:

a. Top channel shall be flush with visible seam

1) When required, top channel shall be filled with epoxy and ground smooth.

b. Bottom channel shall be inverted and reinforced

6. Design:

a. Painting: See Section 099100 – Painting

Metal Door ScheduleID Type Size (w x h) Material Finish Lites/Louvers

101A 2 3′ x 7′ metal paint N/A102A 2 3′ x 7′ metal paint N/A

2.4 FRAMES

A. General:

220


1. Frames shall have 2" face jambs and heads unless noted otherwise.

2. Frames shall be provided with 9/32" silencer preparation for field application after finish painting:

a. (3) per strike jamb

b. (2) per head for double openings

3. All frames shall be anchored with a minimum of six wall anchors and two base anchors.

a. Universal Wood Stud Anchor

4. Frames shall have 9 gauge steel universal hinge tap plate protection welded with provisions for 4 1/2" x 4 1/2" template type hinges and 14 gauge steel strike reinforcement plate, extruded and formed to the equivalent of 10 gauge, protection welded with provision for Universal ANSI A115.1 or ANSI 115.2 strike.

5. Frames shall have mitered corners and shall be of knockdown (for interior doors) or welded construction. Welded frames when specified shall be supplied with face welding only and ground smooth.

6. Reinforcement for surface closer for frames shall be 12 gauge steel.

7. Stops shall be 3" minimum.

B. ME Series Universal Three-Sided Frames for Metal Doors:

1. Frames shall be formed from 14 gauge cold rolled steel materials.

C. ME Series Drywall Frame for Wood Doors:

1. Frames shall be formed from 16 gauge cold rolled steel materials.2.5 FINISH

A. All door and frame components shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished as standard. One coat of oven cured rust inhibiting gray prime paint, shall be applied, capable of passing a 120 hour salt spray test in accordance with ANSI A250.10 or ASTM B117 and a 240 hour humidity test in accordance with ASTM D1735.

B. Finish painted doors shall be painted with a two-coat process, with each coat being oven cured in separate operations. The finish coat shall be alkyd acrylic enamel applied over standard oven cured primer. The two-coat finish paint process shall be capable of passing a 250-hour salt spray test and a 500-hour humidity test. Accelerated weathering in accordance with ASTM D822 shall yield less than a 10% color change after 500 hours of testing.

221


3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for complete installation.

2. Verify condition of openings for compliance with plans and shop drawings.

3. Correct any installation deficiencies as directed by the County’s Representative.

4. All clearances shall be, unless otherwise specified, subject to a tolerance of +/- 1/32".

B. Installation - Doors:

1. Doors shall be installed and fastened to maintain alignment with frames to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and appearance.

2. Doors shall be adjusted to maintain perimeter clearances as specified herein.

3. Shimming shall be performed by the installer as needed to assure the proper clearances are achieved.

4. Installation of hardware items shall be in accordance with the hardware manufacturer’s recommendations and templates. ANSI A115.IG shall be used as a reference for other pertinent information.

5. The clearance between the meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 1/8" +/- 1/16".

a. The clearance at the bottom shall be 3/4".

b. The clearance between the face of the door and door stop shall be 1/16" to 1/8".

C. Installation - Frames:

1. Set all frames in accordance with SDI 105-92.

2. Install frames using the door as template to assure perfect alignment of the door and frame. Provide a fastener at each clip.

3. All frames shall be installed plumb, level, rigid and in true alignment as recommended in ANSI A250.11 and ANSI A115.IG.

222


4. All frames shall be fastened to the adjacent structure so as to retain their position and stability.

a. Drywall slip-on frames shall be installed in prepared wall openings, and shall use pressure type anchors to maintain stability.

5. Set welded frames in position prior to beginning partition work. Brace frames until permanent anchors are set.

6. Set anchors for frames as work progresses. Install anchors at hinge and strike levels.

7. The clearance between the door and frame head and jambs shall be 1/8" for both types of frames specified herein.

3.2 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Remove all debris from opening and wipe frames to clean any dust or other foreign material from the frames.

B. Upon completion, remove all debris resulting from work of this Section.

C. Adjust moving parts to ensure a smooth operation. Use shims if necessary to allow for proper closing.

D. Before any finish coating is applied, fill all dents, holes, etc., with metal filler. Sand, smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.3 WARRANTY


B. Repair or replace any doors and frames shown to be defective or damaged prior to project close-out as stated in standard warranty.

END OF SECTION

223


SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install all door hardware and accessories as specified herein and as shown on Drawings, including all other finish hardware not described but required for a complete and operable facility.

1. “Hardware groups” have been assigned to the various doors required for this work, as indicated in the Door Schedule on the Drawings. The hardware groups are described in detail in the “Hardware Schedule," Section 3.2 A and B of this Section.



B. Section 081100, Metal Doors and Frames

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):

1. UL 10B - UL Standard for Safety Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

B. Warnock Hersey - Intertek Testing Services

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety CodeD. Door and Hardware Institute - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware


A. Qualifications of Supplier:

224


1. A recognized architectural door and finish hardware supplier shall be a direct factory contract supplier, with warehousing facilities within the project’s vicinity that has a record of successful in-service performance for a period of no less than 5 years. The firm shall have in their employment a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work and for project hardware consultation at no additional cost to the County, Architect or Contractor.

a. The supplier shall be an authorized factory distributor of the keying system specified herein.

b. The supplier is required to meet with the County to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

2. All devices shall conform with the CCR, Title 24 and the CBC, 2001 in addition to the requirements of the Division of the State Architect (DSA) in Chapters 10 and 11, and applicable NFPA regulations.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Materials List:

1. Within 15 days after award of Contract, and before any finish hardware is ordered or purchased for this work, submit to the Architect for approval a complete list of all finish hardware proposed to be furnished for this work, giving manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item.

2. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution of items for the items specified.


A. Delivery:

1. Deliver all finish hardware to the job site with all labels intact and legible.

B. Packaging:

1. Furnish all finish hardware with each unit marked or numbered in accordance with the Hardware schedule.

2. Pack each item complete with all necessary pieces and fasteners.

3. Properly wrap and cushion each item to prevent scratches during delivery and storage.

C. Protection:

225


1. Use all means necessary to protect materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

D. Replacement:

1. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary for the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the County.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. See Part 3.2A of this Section for full list of specified manufacturers.

2.2 FASTENINGS

A. Furnish all finish hardware with all necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for long life under hard use.

B. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts, hex bolts, and other anchors approved by the Architect, according to the material to which the hardware is to be applied and the recommendation of the hardware manufacturer.

C. When flush bolts occur in path of travel, provide accessible flush bolt (automatic).

D. Door closer shall comply with ADA 4.13.10, closer delay time. Maximum closer-effort: 5 pounds exterior doors, 5 pounds interior doors, minimum effort to latch door and 3 seconds minimum sweep period..

E. The Authority Having Jurisdiction may increase the maximum effort to operate fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15 lbs max.

F. All fastenings shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish.

2.3 DOOR HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to 3.2A & B of this Section for Schedule.

B. Thresholds in the path of travel shall conform with 1133B.2.4.1

C. Hand-activated hardware, including lever-type hardware, panic bars, push-pull activating, shall be between 30" to 44" AFF.

D. Lever handle for thumb turn dead bolt per 1133B.2.5.2.

E. Maximum effort to operate doors where door closers are used are 5 lb Max. for interior and exterior doors.

226


F. Maximum effort to unlatch panic hardware must be 15 lb. in direction of travel, and may be increased by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in order to provide positive latching.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

B. Doorstops must be mounted within 4-inches of wall in path of travel.

C. Kick plates shall be mounted on both sides of doors that require kick plate, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

3.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Manufacturer’s Symbols: ST STANLEY HINGESIVE IVES FLUSH BOLTS, KICK PLATES, DOOR

STOPS GLY GLYNN JOHNSON OVER HEAD STOPS/HOLDERSLCN LCN CLOSERSPE PEMKO THRESHOLDSCH SCHLAGE LOCKSETSVON VON DUPRIN PANIC HARDWAREKA KANT SLAM GATE CLOSERTOR TORMAX SWING DOOR OPERATOR

B. Finish Hardware Groups:

1. General:

a. Finish throughout shall be Satin Chromium Plated 626/US26D

b. Locksets shall be D-Series – Sparta Lever (SCH #SPA)

c. Hinges shall be 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" CB 1907/1909xNPR 1-1/12" pair U.N.O.

d. Kick Plates shall be 12" x 34" unless otherwise noted.

2. Hardware Groups:

a. Group A (101A,102A) Mechanical:227


Hinges (ST)Storeroom Lockset (SCH #ND96PD)Dummy Trim (SCH #ND170)Weatherstripping (PE #303)Threshold (PE #272A)Flush Bolt (IVE)Crash Chains

3.3 KEYING

A. Construction Keying:

1. Construction key all locks; provide six construction keys and one extractor key.

B. Final Keying System:

1. All locks keyed per County’s instructions.

C. Deliver all keys to the County.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Upon completion, clean the work of this Section in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers of the materials used.

B. Provide required protection of products to prevent damage and wear prior to acceptance of the work by the County.

3.5 WARRANTY

A. The products delivered shall be free from defects.


END OF SECTION






228


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit 6 brushouts of each color including the specific paint sheen specified.

C. Submit MSDS to verify that each paint and coating used complies with the current VOC and chemical component limits of Green Seal’s Standard GS-11 requirements.


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations.

B. Deliver, handle and store materials in accordance with their manufacturer’s instructions.







2. Provide cut sheet and/or MSDS showing VOC limits for each material specified herein.

C. Paint shall comply, at a minimum with the regulations of the California Air Resources Board for the Bay Area.

D. Water-Borne Latex Emulsion Paint: Shall not be formulated or manufactured with formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, aromatic hydrocarbons, mercury or mercury compounds, or tinted with pigments of lead, cadmium, chromium VI and their oxides.

1. Zero-low VOC paint: Flat and eggshell. VOC content less than .10g/l.

2. Low VOC paint: Semi-gloss and Gloss. VOC content less than 100 g/l.

E. Epoxy: Water-born epoxy. Durable finish suitable for floors. VOC content less than 200 g/l.

229


F. Conventional Pigments: Pigments used in conventional paints contain the following toxic compounds. Their use should be avoided. If used, avoid heavily pigmented paints:

1. White: Antimony oxide, titanium dioxide, rutile titanium dioxide

2. Yellow-orange-red: Cadmium, cadmium lihopone, chrome yellow, molybdate orange, strontium chromate, zinc chromate.

3. Blue: Phthalocyanine blue.

4. Green: Chrome green, Chromium oxide, hydrated chromium oxide, phthalocyanine green.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Kelly Moore Paint Company, or approved equal.


A. Use best quality grade for all systems.

B. Catalog names and numbers refer to products as manufactured by Kelly Moore Paint Company.

C. Match color chips selected by Architect.

2.3 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:

A. All wood to be back primed a minimum of 3 coats of paint/stain/sealer color on interior. Colors to be selected by Architect during course of work. Minimum color pallet of ten (10) TBD by Architect/County.

B. Gypsum Board and Trim:

1. Wall Paint - First Coat: 1505 Enviro-Cote Interior PVA Primer/Sealer

2. Wall Paint - Second Coat: 1510 Enviro-Coat Interior Eggshell Enamel

a. Match Existing Paint Color

3. Wall Paint - Third Coat: 1510 Enviro-Coat Interior Eggshell Enamel


230


2.4 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:

A. All wood to be back primed a minimum of 3 coats of paint/stain/sealer color on exterior. Colors to be selected by Architect during course of work Minimum color pallet of six (4) TBD by Architect/County.

B. Finish Trim (Fascia) - Douglas Fir:

1. First Coat: 255 Acry-Shield Exterior Wood Primer

2. Second Coat: 1245 Acry-Shield Exterior Low Sheen Paint

a. KM3349-2 – Majestic Mountain

3. Third Coat: 1245 Acry-Shield Exterior Low Sheen Paint


C. Galvanized Metal including Louvers:

1. First Coat: 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish

2. Second Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel 3. Third Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel

D. Door Frames - Metal:


2. Second Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel

a. KM3349-2 – Majestic Mountain 3. Third Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel


E. Door - Metal:



a. KM3694-3 – Mauve Medley 3. Third Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel

231


a. KM3694-3 – Mauve Medleyb.

F. Cement Plaster

1. Match existing

3.0 EXECUTION


A. Inspection- Number of Coats

1. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected and approved by the Project Inspector.


3. Verify that paint finishes may be applied in strict accordance with all pertinent regulations and the requirements of these Specifications.

4. Only inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the number of coats applied.

B. Correction

1. Do not proceed with work in areas of discrepancy until any discrepancies have been resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL METHODS: INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR

A. Inspect surfaces and correct unsatisfactory conditions. Beginning work means acceptance of substrates.

B. Comply with paint manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations for preparation, priming and coating work. Coordinate with work of other Sections.

C. Remove hardware, accessories and items in place and not to be painted; provide protection prior to surface preparation and painting, reinstall removed items.

D. Use a slightly different shade for each coat of paint so that it may be readily identified.

E. Primer and intermediate coats shall be unscarred and completely integral when succeeding coats are applied. Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5 feet.

232


F. Paint interior surfaces, which are a continuation of exterior surfaces, subject to exterior exposure (such as an out-swinging door), with the applicable exterior coating system.

G. Completely cover surfaces to be painted to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Painted surfaces with cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other imperfections will not be acceptable.

H. Wood: Clean wood surfaces of dirt, oil or other foreign substances; sandpaper smooth surfaces exposed to view, and dust off.

1. Smoothing: Unless specifically noted to be left rough, smooth all finished wood surfaces exposed to view by using sandpaper. Where so required, use varying degrees of coarseness in sandpaper to produce uniformly smooth and unmarred wood surfaces.

2. Knots: Use knot sealer before application of priming coat.

a. On small, dry, seasoned knots, thoroughly scrape and clean the surface and apply one coat of good quality knot-sealer before application of the priming coat.

b. On large, open, seasoned knots, scrape off all pitch and thoroughly clean the area, followed by an application of one coat of good quality knot-sealer.

3. Prime, stain or seal wood and plywood required to be site-painted immediately upon delivery to project; prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood; minimum one coat.

4. Provide second coat at end grain edges of any plywood close to grade and which serve as drip edge for siding system.

5. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler; sand paper smooth when dry.

6. When transparent finish is required, back prime with spare varnish.

7. Back prime paneling on interior partitions only when masonry, plaster or other wet wall construction occurs on backside.

I. Woodwork:

1. Hand sandpaper and dust clean. Sand interior woodwork between coats. Shellac or seal knot holes, pitch pockets and sappy areas. After first coat, putty nail holes, cracks and defects with putty or plastic compound.

233


J. Application: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Apply stain killing primer, when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until paint is a uniform finish, color and appearance.

2. Provide extra attention to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces; paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only.

4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.

5. Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

6. Finish all doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces.

7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

K. Drying:

1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats.

2. Modify the period as recommended by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions.

L. Moisture Content

1. Use a moisture-meter approved by the Project Inspector to test surfaces.

2. Do not apply the initial coating until moisture meter reading is within limits recommended by the paint materials manufacturer.

M. Defects

1. Sand and dust between coats to remove all defects visible to the unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet.

3.3 REINSTALLATION OF REMOVED ITEMS

A. Following completion of painting in each space, reinstall all items removed for painting, using only workmen skilled in the particular trade.

234


3.4 CLEAN UP

A. General

1. During progress of the Work, do not allow the accumulation of empty containers or other excess items in areas specifically set aside for that purpose.

2. Prevent accidental spilling of paint materials and, in the event of such spill, immediately remove all spilled material and the waste or other equipment used to clean up the spill, and wash the surfaces to their original undamaged conditions, all at no additional cost to the County.

3.5 WARRANTY

A. The product delivered shall be free from defects.


END OF SECTION

235


SECTION 092423 - PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes all labor, materials, equipment, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the plans and/or herein specified, including all incidentals necessary and required for completion of work under this Section.

B. Provide complete 3 coat system


A. Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 of these Contract Documents.

B. Section 07900, Sealants and Caulking

C. Section 099100. Painting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

1. AMST C144 - 04 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

2. AMST C206 - 03 Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals, procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01300.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating sizes, dimensions, thickness, trim, hardware, finishes, and installation details.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for materials, fabrication, finishing, fastenings, hardware, and installation details.

D. Samples: Submit samples of paint color, pattern, texture selected for verification.


A. Provide sufficient skilled workers and supervisors who shall be present at all times during the execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of work involved and the materials and techniques specified.

236


B. Comply with governing codes and regulations.C. Deliver, handle and store materials in accordance with their manufacturer’s

instructions.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver all lathing and plastering materials in their original containers with labels intact and legible.

B. Protection:

1. Store all materials and equipment for this portion of the Work only in the area designated for that purpose.

2. Do not allow the scattering of materials or equipment but use all means necessary to ensure neatness of the site at all times.

3. Perform all cleaning of equipment and tools only in the area designated for that purpose.

4. Use all means necessary to protect all materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades.


2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Fry Reglet Architectural Metals, www.fryreglet.com or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. BUILDING PAPER

1. All building paper shall comply with Federal Specification number UU-B-790, class D, and shall weigh not less than 9 pounds per 1200 square feet.

2. Two layers, grade "D".

B. STUCCO NETTING

1. All stucco netting shall be 17-gauge 1-1/2 inch mesh galvanized, or 18- gauge 1 inch mesh galvanized, or may be combined with the building paper as a self-furring paperbacked netting, subject to the approval of the Architect.

237

http://www.fryreglet.com/


C. STUCCO METAL LATH

1. 2.5 pounds per square yard with rust-prohibitive paint, self-furring.D. SCREEDS AND OTHER METAL/VINYL ACCESSORIES

1. All screeds and other metal accessories shall be Fry or approved equal.

a. Weep Screed FWS-875

b. J Molding - Fry JPM 75

c. Expansion Joints - Fry PCS 75-25

E. TEMPORARY WOOD GROUNDS

1. All temporary wood grounds, if used, shall be seasoned, of uniform thickness, and free of pitch and other content potentially damaging to the plaster. Permanent wood grounds will not be permitted.

F. LIME

1. All lime shall be dry hydrated lime conforming with ASTM C206. Lime putty, if used, shall weigh no more than 83 pounds per cubic foot.

G. SAND

1. All sand shall be clean and well graded from coarse to fine, conforming with ASTM C144.

H. WATER

1. All water shall be clean and free of deleterious amounts of acid, alkali, and organic materials.

I. STUCCO

1. All stucco shall be waterproof stucco, California Stucco, or approved equal.

J. BONDING ADDITIVE

1. Contractor shall mix according to manufacturer’s instructions. Use Thoro Systems Acryl 60.

K. OTHER MATERIALS

1. All other materials may be as selected by the Contractor provided they meet or exceed the "Referenced Standards" and have been specifically approved by the Architect.

238


3.0 EXECUTION


A. Inspection:

1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that finished plaster surfaces may be applied in a strict accordance with all pertinent regulations and the requirements of these Specifications.

B. Correction:


2. Do not proceed with work in other areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been resolved

3.2 WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply plaster when prevailing outdoor temperature is below 40 degrees F. If freezing is expected, do not apply plaster beyond the period required for proper hydration.

3.3 LATHING

A. Over all elements of the construction which are to receive plaster, apply building paper with the long dimension horizontal, lapping all upper courses over lower courses at least 2 inches, and lapping vertical joints of the building paper at least 6 inches.

B. Install stucco netting over all building paper with the long dimension horizontal, lapping all joints at least 1 mesh but not less than 1 inch, lapping all upper courses over lower courses, and lapping all ends.

C. At external corners, wrap netting around the corner and reinforce the corner with external corner reinforcement. At interior corners, fold the netting through the corner and reinforce the corner with interior corner reinforcement.

D. In general, attach stucco netting to supports at maximum 6-inch intervals both ways, furring the netting away from the felt at least 1/4 inch by use of standard fasteners with minimum penetration 3/4 inch into wood framing.

E. Attach control joints to the stucco netting and attach all other grounds and accessories to supports so as to provide true grounds for the plaster. Wire tie, nail, or staple all accessories to supporting surfaces sufficiently to hold the accessories in place during plastering.

239


F. Install expanded metal lath perpendicular to supports, lapped not less than 1/2 inch at sides and 1 inch at ends. Attach with approved concrete nails, 6 inch O.C.

3.4 PLASTERING

A. Mix the plaster for each coat in careful conformance with the "Referenced Standards."

B. Apply the scratch coat with sufficient material and force to form good keys, embedding and filling all spaces of the netting. Score horizontally.

C. Do not apply brown coat sooner than 48 hours after installation of scratch coat. Apply brown coat to scratch coat, bring out to grounds, straighten to a true surface, float, compact, and leave sufficiently rough to ensure adequate bond for finish coat.

D. Do not apply finish coat sooner than 7 days after installation of brown coat.

E. Do not locate cold joints in one coat over cold joints in the previous coat.

F. Final finish to be a light sand plaster finish to match existing building

3.5 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT SURFACES

A. Take particular care during the portion of the Work to prevent damage to the installed work of the other trades.

B. Protect by masking: aluminum frames, window glazing and thresholds from being scratched, dented, and filled with plaster.

C. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its final acceptance, carefully inspect all surfaces surrounding the plaster and remove all traces of plaster.

3.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s standard performance warranty, as available for specified installation and environmental conditions.

END OF SECTION

240


SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install gypsum board as indicated on the Drawings:

1. Standard, abuse-resistant and moisture-resistant, including all joint treatment products, accessories, and trim materials required for completion of work.




c. Section 099100, Painting

1.3 REFERENCES


1. C473, Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.

2. C514, Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board.

3. C840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

4. C1002, Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases.

5. C1047, Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Board and Gypsum Veneer Base.

6. C1396, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.

7. C1629, Specification for Abuse-Resistant Non-Decorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels.

8. D3273, Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

241


9. D5420, Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact).

10. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

11. E695, Standard Method of Measuring Relative Resistance of Wall, Floor, and Roof Construction to Impact Loading.

B. Gypsum Association (GA):

1. GA-214, Recommended Specifications: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.

C. California Building Code (CBC):

1. Chapter 25A

D. Division of the State Architect (DSA):

1. IR 25-3, Interpretations and Regulations

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each product specified.

C. Samples: Provide minimum 12" x 12" coated gypsum board panel of each type and texture of textured coating.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board panels, joint treatment products, and textured coatings from a single manufacturer.

B. Qualifications of Installers:

1. Use only skilled and experienced gypsum board installer for laying up the gypsum board, fastening, taping and finishing.

2. Helpers and apprentices used in this portion of the Work shall be under full and constant supervision at all times by thoroughly skilled gypsum board installers.

3. In the acceptance or rejection of installed gypsum board, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of installers.

242


1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage:

1. Deliver the materials to the job site in manufacturer’s original packages and store them in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use.

2. Store materials inside and protected from damage by the elements, and ensure materials will be kept dry before, during, and after installation.

3. Where it is necessary to store outside, stack the materials off the ground, properly supported on a level platform, and fully protected from the weather.

4. Stack gypsum panels neatly and flat, taking care to prevent sagging.

5. Protect all edge, ends, and faces of gypsum board panels from damage.

6. Protect steel studs and accessories from bending.

B. Protection:

1. Use all means necessary to protect gypsum board materials before installation, during, and until substantial completion.

2. Ensure the protection of the installed work and materials of all other trades.





a. Materials shall meet the limits of the State of California DHS Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Compounds or shall be identified by the following certification programs:

1) Greenguard Environmental Institute

2) Scientific Certification Systems2. Provide cut sheet and/or MSDS showing VOC limits for each material specified

herein.

C. Provide materials with highest possible recycled content.

D. Establish and maintain application of finishing environment in accordance with ASTM C840.

243


E. Control heating and ventilating during finishing operations to ensure the maintenance of 55 degrees F minimum temperature.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. National Gypsum Company, 2001 Rexford Road, Charlotte, NC 28211, 1-704-365-7300, www.nationalgypsum.com, or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General - All Gypsum panels shall meet the following requirements:

1. Shall comply with ASTM C1396

2. 5/8-inch interior panels shall comply with ASTM C1396, Type X, unless otherwise specified.

3. Surface Burning Characteristics, per ASTM E84:

a. Flame Spread Index: 15

b. Smoke Developed: 0

4. Tapered edge for finished surfaces; butt edge for concealed surfaces.

5. 4-feet wide by 8-feet long.

6. Recycled content of panels shall be as follows:

a. 100% recycled paper on front and back panels.

b. 10% (minimum) recycled content for inside material.

2.3 JOINT SYSTEM

A. General:

1. Compound / Gyp Mud shall be a minimum of 25% recycled content and must meet required maximum VOC standards.

2. A single compound may be used for embedment of tape, skim coating, and finishing if the compound is recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer of gypsum panels.

B. Compatibility:

1. Control Joints shall comply with ASTM C1047.

244


2. All joint systems, including reinforcement tape and compounds, shall be a system recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum panels as being compatible with the panels specified herein.

2.4 METAL BEADS AND TRIM

A. All metal beads, trim and accessory items shall be a system recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum panels as being compatible with the panels specified herein.

B. Corner bead shall be a formed galvanized steel angle with minimum base steel 0.014" thick, and shall comply with ASTM C1047.

C. Casing beads shall be a formed galvanized steel trim with minimum base steel 0.014" thick, and shall comply with ASTM C1047:

1. L-Bead

2.5 OTHER MATERIALS & ACCESSORIES

A. All other materials and accessories required for a proper and complete installation of gypsum board shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the approval of the Architect.

B. Fasteners: In addition to complying with all pertinent code requirements, fasteners shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of gypsum panels specified herein.

1. Screws:

a. Screws shall conform to ASTM C954 or ASTM C1002, or both, with heads, threads, points, and finish.

b. #8 x 1 3/8" @ 6" Edge, 12" Field

C. Acoustical Sealant:

1. Sealant shall be non-drying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, non-bleeding, gunnable type as recommended by the manufacturer of gypsum panels specified herein.

D. Floor and Ceiling Runners:

1. L-shaped runner(s) weighing 545 lbs. per 1,000 linear feet with a minimum base steel of 0.0329", galvanized.

E. Textured Coatings:

1. Refer to Drawings for a complete Schedule of textured coating finishes.

2. All textured coating systems shall be a system recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum panels as being compatible with the panels specified herein.

245


3.0 EXECUTION


A. Inspection:

1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that gypsum board may be installed and finished with all surfaces true to line and detail, level, plumb, and in accordance with the design but without excessive thicknesses of skim coating or texture.

B. Corrections:



3.2 INSTALLING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General:

1. Install all panels plumb, level, and with all vertical joints on bearing, and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended methods for installation.

2. Refer to Drawings for Schedule for all gypsum board installation required for project.

B. Cutting:

1. When cutting gypsum panels is required, cut by scoring and breaking or by sawing, working from the face side.

2. When cutting by scoring, cut through the face paper and then snap the panel back away from the cut face; then break the back paper by snapping the gypsum panel in the reverse direction or by cutting the back paper.

3. Smooth all cut ends and edges of panels as necessary to obtain a smooth joint.

4. For cut-outs on panels or pipes, fixtures, and other small openings, make holes and cut-outs by sawing or by such other method as will not fracture the core or tear the covering, and with such accuracy that plates, escutcheons, or trim will cover the edges.

5. The use of “score-and-knockout” method will not be permitted.

246


C. Fastening:

1. Properly space all fasteners in careful accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and code requirements, with heads driven slightly below the surface for proper cementing but without breaking the paper cover.

2. Loosely butt all joints to be taped; firmly butt all joints to be left exposed.

3. Stagger all end joints and the joints between panels to achieve a maximum of bridging, and a minimum of continued joints.

D. Caulking:

1. Using the materials and methods described in Section 079000, Sealants and Caulking, caulk at all points where gypsum panels are penetrated by the work of other trades; caulk solidly, using all necessary backing.

E. Taping and Finishing:

1. Finish shall be level 5 for all exposed surfaces.

2. Finish shall be level 2 for all other surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL TRIM

A. General:

1. Carefully inspect the Drawings and verify the desired location of metal trim. The drawings do not purport to show all metal trim required; verify with the Architect the precise locations and types of trim to be used.

B. Installation:

1. Install all trim in strict accordance with the manufacturer recommendations as submitted, paying particular attention to make all trim installation level, plumb, true to line, and with firm attachment to supports.

3.4 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION

A. General:

1. Do not allow the accumulation of scraps and debris arising from the work of this Section but maintain the areas in a neat and safe condition at all times.

B. Spillage:

1. In the event of spilling or splashing compound onto other surfaces, immediately remove the spilled or splashed material and all traces of the residue to the approval of the Architect.

247


C. Protect gypsum board installations from damage and deterioration until the date of Substantial Completion.

3.5 WARRANTY

A. The product delivered shall be free of defects.


END OF SECTION

248


SECTION 099100 – PAINTING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide surface preparation and painting for all unfinished interior and exterior surfaces as indicated on project Drawings.






1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit 6 brushouts of each color including the specific paint sheen specified.

C. Submit MSDS to verify that each paint and coating used complies with the current VOC and chemical component limits of Green Seal’s Standard GS-11 requirements.


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations.

B. Deliver, handle and store materials in accordance with their manufacturer’s instructions.




249





2. Provide cut sheet and/or MSDS showing VOC limits for each material specified herein.

C. Paint shall comply, at a minimum with the regulations of the California Air Resources Board for the Bay Area.

D. Water-Borne Latex Emulsion Paint: Shall not be formulated or manufactured with formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, aromatic hydrocarbons, mercury or mercury compounds, or tinted with pigments of lead, cadmium, chromium VI and their oxides.

1. Zero-low VOC paint: Flat and eggshell. VOC content less than .10g/l.

2. Low VOC paint: Semi-gloss and Gloss. VOC content less than 100 g/l.

E. Epoxy: Water-born epoxy. Durable finish suitable for floors. VOC content less than 200 g/l.

F. Conventional Pigments: Pigments used in conventional paints contain the following toxic compounds. Their use should be avoided. If used, avoid heavily pigmented paints:

1. White: Antimony oxide, titanium dioxide, rutile titanium dioxide

2. Yellow-orange-red: Cadmium, cadmium lihopone, chrome yellow, molybdate orange, strontium chromate, zinc chromate.

3. Blue: Phthalocyanine blue.

4. Green: Chrome green, Chromium oxide, hydrated chromium oxide, phthalocyanine green.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Kelly Moore Paint Company, or approved equal.


250


A. Use best quality grade for all systems.

B. Catalog names and numbers refer to products as manufactured by Kelly Moore Paint Company.

C. Match color chips selected by Architect.

2.3 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:

A. All wood to be back primed a minimum of 3 coats of paint/stain/sealer color on interior. Colors to be selected by Architect during course of work. Minimum color pallet of ten (10) TBD by Architect/County.

B. Gypsum Board and Trim:

1. Wall Paint - First Coat: 1505 Enviro-Cote Interior PVA Primer/Sealer

2. Wall Paint - Second Coat: 1510 Enviro-Coat Interior Eggshell Enamel


3. Wall Paint - Third Coat: 1510 Enviro-Coat Interior Eggshell Enamel


2.4 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS: Assume 4 paint colors

A. All wood to be back primed a minimum of 3 coats of paint/stain/sealer color on exterior. Colors to be selected by Architect during course of work Minimum color pallet of six (4) TBD by Architect/County. See painting legend on Drawing sheet A3.1.

B. Finish Trim (Fascia) - Douglas Fir:

1. First Coat: 255 Acry-Shield Exterior Wood Primer

2. Second Coat: 1245 Acry-Shield Exterior Low Sheen Paint

a. Match Existing

3. Third Coat: 1245 Acry-Shield Exterior Low Sheen Paint

a. Match Existing

C. Galvanized Metal including Louvers:


251


2. Second Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel 3. Third Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel

D. Door Frames - Metal:



a. Match Existing 3. Third Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel

a. Match Existing

E. Door - Metal:



a. Match Existing 3. Third Coat: 5885 DTM Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel

a. Match Existing

F. Cement Plaster – To match existing cement plaster on existing buildings. Submit color sample to architect at site meeting for comparison to existing.

3.0 EXECUTION


A. Inspection- Number of Coats

1. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected and approved by the Project Inspector.


3. Verify that paint finishes may be applied in strict accordance with all pertinent regulations and the requirements of these Specifications.

252


4. Only inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the number of coats applied.

B. Correction

1. Do not proceed with work in areas of discrepancy until any discrepancies have been resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL METHODS: INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR

A. Inspect surfaces and correct unsatisfactory conditions. Beginning work means acceptance of substrates.

B. Comply with paint manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations for preparation, priming and coating work. Coordinate with work of other Sections.

C. Remove hardware, accessories and items in place and not to be painted; provide protection prior to surface preparation and painting, reinstall removed items.

D. Use a slightly different shade for each coat of paint so that it may be readily identified.

E. Primer and intermediate coats shall be unscarred and completely integral when succeeding coats are applied. Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5 feet.

F. Paint interior surfaces, which are a continuation of exterior surfaces, subject to exterior exposure (such as an out-swinging door), with the applicable exterior coating system.

G. Completely cover surfaces to be painted to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Painted surfaces with cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other imperfections will not be acceptable.

H. Wood: Clean wood surfaces of dirt, oil or other foreign substances; sandpaper smooth surfaces exposed to view, and dust off.

1. Smoothing: Unless specifically noted to be left rough, smooth all finished wood surfaces exposed to view by using sandpaper. Where so required, use varying degrees of coarseness in sandpaper to produce uniformly smooth and unmarred wood surfaces.

2. Knots: Use knot sealer before application of priming coat.

a. On small, dry, seasoned knots, thoroughly scrape and clean the surface and apply one coat of good quality knot-sealer before application of the priming coat.

253


b. On large, open, seasoned knots, scrape off all pitch and thoroughly clean the area, followed by an application of one coat of good quality knot-sealer.

3. Prime, stain or seal wood and plywood required to be site-painted immediately upon delivery to project; prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood; minimum one coat.

4. Provide second coat at end grain edges of any plywood close to grade and which serve as drip edge for siding system.

5. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler; sand paper smooth when dry.

6. When transparent finish is required, back prime with spare varnish.

7. Back prime paneling on interior partitions only when masonry, plaster or other wet wall construction occurs on backside.

I. Woodwork:

1. Hand sandpaper and dust clean. Sand interior woodwork between coats. Shellac or seal knot holes, pitch pockets and sappy areas. After first coat, putty nail holes, cracks and defects with putty or plastic compound.

J. Application: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Apply stain killing primer, when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until paint is a uniform finish, color and appearance.

2. Provide extra attention to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces; paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only.

4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.

5. Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

6. Finish all doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces.

7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

254


K. Drying:

1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats.

2. Modify the period as recommended by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions.

L. Moisture Content

1. Use a moisture-meter approved by the Project Inspector to test surfaces.

2. Do not apply the initial coating until moisture meter reading is within limits recommended by the paint materials manufacturer.

M. Defects

1. Sand and dust between coats to remove all defects visible to the unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet.

3.3 REINSTALLATION OF REMOVED ITEMS

A. Following completion of painting in each space, reinstall all items removed for painting, using only workmen skilled in the particular trade.

3.4 CLEAN UP

A. General

1. During progress of the Work, do not allow the accumulation of empty containers or other excess items in areas specifically set aside for that purpose.

2. Prevent accidental spilling of paint materials and, in the event of such spill, immediately remove all spilled material and the waste or other equipment used to clean up the spill, and wash the surfaces to their original undamaged conditions, all at no additional cost to the County.

3.5 WARRANTY

A. The product delivered shall be free from defects.


END OF SECTION

255


SECTION 101400 – SIGNAGE

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install non-illuminated interior and exterior identifying devices herein referred to as "signage," including:

1. Wall-mounted exterior signage for room identification.

2. Wall-mounted architectural aluminum frames for signage.





E. Section 092900, Gypsum Board

F. Section 099100, Painting

G. Divisions 26 for coordination purposes

H. Divisions 31 and 32 for coordination purposes

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. 1998 ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings & FacilitiesC. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

256


2. ASTM D4956 - Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control

D. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specifications for Anodized Architectural Aluminum

2. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

F. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products

G. CalDAG - California Disabled Accessibility Guidebook.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit manufacturer’s descriptive literature and specifications, including brochures and color samples of material for selection, as applicable for approval

C. Submit shop drawings listing sign styles, lettering and locations, and overall dimensions of each sign, including methods of construction.

D. Submit full-size sample of sign type, style and color specified including method of attachment for verification and approval.

E. Submit Manufacturer’s standard warranty information

F. Submit full text of each sign by location for acceptance by the County and School District prior to fabrication.


A. Signage shall comply with all applicable provisions of the ADA and ANSI A117.1-1998.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer must submit 3 references showing comparable products for projects completed within the last 5 years.

C. Provide all signage systems from a single manufacturer.


A. Use all means necessary to protect signs before, during and after installation.

257


1. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the County.

B. Deliver materials to jobsite in manufacturer’s original unopened factory packaging.

C. Inspect materials at time of delivery to assure that specified products have been received.

D. Store materials in original packaging in a climate controlled environment and away from direct sunlight.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Exterior Signage (Metal): ComplianceSigns.com,Safeway Sign Co. (213) 321-4608, Zumar Industries (213) 233-8231, Western Highway (714) 761-4811, or approved equal.

B. Architectural Signage Frames: ASE Manufacturing, Inc., 10110 Hwy 12, Orofino, ID 83544, 1-800-599-8371, www.asesigns.com, or approved equal.

2.2 PLASTIC/ACRYLIC SIGNS

A. Acceptable Product: "MP Plastic"

1. Two-color scratch resistant, non-static, fire retardant, washable melamine laminate with a non-glare surface. Color to be selected by Architect.

2. Sign plaque material shall consist of melamine laminate with phenolic core, approximately 1/8" thick, with background painted a contrasting color.

3. Signs shall be of one-piece construction; added-on and/or engraved characters are unacceptable.

4. Lettering:

a. Tactile characters (letters, numerals, and symbols) on signs shall be raised 1/32" from sign plate face.

b. Character font style shall be "Sans Serif" in uppercase and be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille, per 1117B.5.5.1

c. Raised characters on all signs shall be between 5/8" and 2" high.

d. Characters shall be centered on sign.

258


e. Characters and background shall be eggshell, matte or other approved non-glare finish. Characters shall contrast with their background - either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background.

5. Sign Sizes:

a. Room identification signs shall be 8" x 6", or 12" x 6" 8 1/2" x 4"

2.4 ARCHITECTURAL SIGNAGE FRAMES

A. Wall Frame, Part No. 540: - frames are fabricated from continuous aluminum extrusion

1. Corner style shall be Square

2. Frame Depth shall be 1/2"

3. Frame Wall Thickness shall be 1/8"

4. Finish style: as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard options, per Section 013300, Submittal Procedures.

B. See Drawings for filler plate.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Vinyl foam tape.

B. Holes and screws.

2.6 BRAILLE SYMBOLS

A. Contracted California Grade 2 Braille shall be used wherever Braille symbols are specifically required.

1. Dots shall be 1/10 inch on centers in each cell with 2/10 inch space between cells.

2. Dots shall be raised a minimum of 1/40 inch above the background.

B. Mounting Location and Height: Where permanent identification is provided for rooms and spaces, raised letters shall be provided and shall be accompanied by Braille in conformance with Section 3105A.(e)7, The CalACS Accessibility Standards Interpretive Manual. Signs shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch outside of the door. Where there is no wall space on the latch side, including at double leaf doors, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall, preferably on the right. Mounting height shall be 60 inches above the finish floor to the center line of the sign. Mounting location shall be determined so that a person may approach within

259


3 inches of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door.

3.0 EXECUTION


A. Surface Conditions: Prior to installation of signs, examine areas and conditions in which the signage system(s) will be installed to verify that all surfaces are ready and painted.

1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before installing signage.

2. Wall surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease and loose paint.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions for installation.

B. Locate sign units and accessories as indicated on the Drawings. See interior and exterior sign schedules below.

C. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated.D. Mounting height for all door-mounted signage shall be 60" centered from floor,

centered to the center line of the sign.

E. Mounting location and height for wall-mounted signage:

1. Signs shall be installed on wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. Where there is no wall space on the latch side, sign shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall, preferably to the right.

2. Mounting height shall be 60" above finish floor, centered to the center line of the sign, unless noted otherwise.

a. Restroom wall signs shall be mounted 60" to center line of tactile part of sign.

b. Maximum Occupancy signs shall be mounted 80" above finished floor to center line of sign

3. Mounting location shall be determined so that a person may approach within 3" of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door.

4. Verbal description as to restroom usage, i.e. Men’s, Women’s, etc., shall be placed directly below the pictogram signage.

260


F. Adhesive: Follow manufacturer’s instruction for complete application of recommended adhesive to ensure proper bonding of signage to the surface specified on the drawings.

Table # 1: EXTERIOR MECHANICAL ROOM SIGNAGE

LOC.(BY RM #)

DOOR #

ROOM SIGN LOC.N(INT/EXT)

RESTROOM ACCESS. SIGN ON

DOOR

MAX. OCC. LOAD SIGN

EXIT SIGN

EXIT ROUTE SIGN

101 101A MECHANICAL ROOM #1

EXT

102 102A MECHANICAL ROOM #2

EXT

3.3 SIGN SCHEDULES

A. All signs shall be engraved 1/4" plastic laminate. For sign design (where lettering/symbols are to appear on sign), see Sheet A7.4 for details. All Signage in Table 1 will be of this type unless otherwise noted. Refer to part 2.2 of this Section.

3.4 CLEAN UP

A. Upon completion of installation, remove all debris resulting from work of this Section.

B. Clean all signage surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s clean-up and maintenance instructions.

3.5 WARRANTY


END OF SECTION

261


SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside andoutside the building and to locations indicated.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with thefollowing minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance withperformance requirements.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testingagency.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting,and joining materials.

B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping:ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping tobe joined and include corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

262


2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING

A. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant

fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666,Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

(1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch- (76-mm-)wide shield with 4 bands.

(2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-)wide shield with 6 bands.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section “Utility Trenching”.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materialsfor each size range:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 and DN 40): Use NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:

a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.

2. NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping andone of the following:


3. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipingand one of the following:


B. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materialsfor each size range:

1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of thefollowing:

263







3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basicpiping installation.

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect tobuilding sanitary sewers.

C. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsHandbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

D. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping usingappropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and shortsweep1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow isfrom horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittingsif 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not changedirection of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasersand reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainagepiping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system.Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according tomanufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and otherinstallation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint ascompleted.

F. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes,unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for

264


piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction offlow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction offlow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward ventstack.

G. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems in locationsindicated and as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

H. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabson-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

I . Do not install cleanouts at flooring transitions.

J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected andapproved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basicpiping joint construction.

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron SoilPipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe andFittings."

1. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 23 05 33 "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" forseismic-restraint devices.

B. Refer to Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and supportdevices. Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

265


a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevishangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable rollerhangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, springcushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer:MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontalspacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.

4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transitionfitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not

266


smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures."

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping insizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities havingjurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizesindicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve,if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unionsfor connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours beforeinspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping beforeconcealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities havingjurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance withrequirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass testor inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities havingjurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authoritieshaving jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping thathave been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed insegments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram ofportion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaceddrainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Exposework that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping,except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in

267


piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection startsto completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints forleaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been setand traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastightand watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drainswhere they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal topressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trapof water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portionthereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirtand debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Jet lateral lines to main sewer lines prior to final underground inspection.

END OF SECTION

268


SECTION 221413 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

1.0 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes storm-drainage piping outside the building and to locationsindicated.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with thefollowing minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testingagency.

2.0 PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting,and joining materials.

B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping:ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping tobe joined and include corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

269


2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING

A. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistantfasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral center pipe stop.

a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666,Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

(1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch- (76-mm-)wide shield with 4 bands.

(2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-)wide shield with 6 bands.

2.3 PLASTIC PIPING

A. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3034, Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) SDR-26material;inside nominal diameter of 4 t0 24 inches, bell and spigot style rubberring sealed gasket joint.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Utility Trenching" for excavating, trenching, andbackfilling.


A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressureratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following piping materials foreach size range:




a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.270


3. NPS 8 (DN 200): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.

C. Underground Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following piping materials for eachsize range:








A. Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basicpiping installation.

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect tobuilding storm sewers.

C. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainageforce-main piping.

D. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsHandbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

E. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends,and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes areconnected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Installtrue to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Placehub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer'swritten instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

271


Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

G. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwiseindicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for pipingNPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow forpiping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction offlow.

H. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basicpiping joint construction.

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron SoilPipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe andFittings."

1. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Usetransition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours beforeinspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.

272


2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirtand debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

273


C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION

274


SECTION 230000 -MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to the Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements.

B. This Section 230000, applies specifically to all other Sections of Division 22 and Division 23.

C. Where requirements of this Section exceed those in other contract documents, Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, apparatus and materials that are required to provide a complete installation as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications, including that reasonably inferred for proper execution of this Division.

B. Provide cutting and patching as required for execution of work performed under this Division and not provided under other sections.

C. Repair or replace any damage to work of this Division, damage caused by leaks or breaks in systems of this Division, and damage caused by work of this Division including that to landscaping, paving or other items which are to remain in use.

D. Valves and trim not specifically indicated but required for proper functioning of equipment shall be furnished and installed by the craft furnishing the equipment.

E. Coordinate all utility requirements for equipment furnished by the mechanical sections of this division. Rough-in required systems and make final connections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Above Grade: Not buried in ground and not embedded in concrete slab on ground.

B. Below Grade: Buried in ground or embedded in concrete slab on ground.

C. Concealed: Inside building, above grade and located within walls, furred spaces, crawl spaces, attics, above suspended ceilings, etc. In general any item not visible or directly accessible.

275


D. Connect: Complete hookup of item with required services.

E. Contractor: Mechanical Contractor unless stated otherwise.

276


F. Exposed: Either visible or subject to mechanical or weather damage, indoors or outdoors, including areas such as mechanical and storage rooms. In general any item that is directly accessible without removing panels, walls, ceilings or other parts of structure.

G. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to job site in new condition.

H. Install: Place, secure and connect as required to make fully operational.

I. Provide: Furnish and install as defined above; perform work.

J. Rough-in: Provide all indicated services in the necessary arrangement for making final connections to fixture or equipment.

K. Indoor: Enclosed within building structure, crawl spaces, etc.

L. Use (verb): Furnish and install as defined above.

M. Outdoor: Outside of building structure.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

A. Abbreviations contained in various sections of the specifications and drawings refer to the following organizations, societies, associations standards, publications, terms, etc.:

AABC: Associated Air Balance Council AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, Inc. ARI: Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning

Engineers ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials AWS: American Welding Society AWWA: American Water Works Association NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA: National Electric Manufacturers Association NFPA: National Fire Protection Association OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories

B. Other abbreviations and symbols are scheduled on the drawings.

277


Santa Clara County Office of Education HVAC and Roofing for Gateway School

1.5 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to install all work to meet or exceed minimum requirements stipulated in current issues of applicable standards, codes, or regulations. Where drawings or specifications prescribe requirements exceeding those minimums, the work shall be installed in accordance with the drawing or specification requirements. Particular attention is directed to the following. This list does not include all standards, codes, and regulations which may be applicable; other Federal, State, and local regulations may apply.

1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

2. State Fire Marshal and Local Fire Marshal.

3. Local Building, Mechanical, Plumbing, & Fire Codes, all volumes.

4. National Fire Codes published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

5. Factory Mutual Insurers.

6. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) -Guide Lines for Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Systems.

7. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)

8. California Building Code (CBC), California Plumbing Code (CPC), California Mechanical Code, California Electrical Code (CEC), and California Fire Code (CFC).

9. Division of State Architects (DSA).

10. Any other applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations.

Do not construct anything in these drawings and specifications to permit work not conforming to these requirements. The regulations shall govern where they require higher standards or are violated by the drawings and specifications. Consider rulings and interpretations of the enforcing agencies as part of these specifications. Comply with the drawings and specifications showing work exceeding minimum code requirements.

B. All regulations and standards shall be the latest issued unless the governing authority requires the use of an earlier issue. Provide all work required by the governing authority, even if it is not indicated on drawings or in the specifications, at no additional cost or time to the project.

278


1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Consider all drawings and all divisions of these specifications as a whole and provide work of this section as shown anywhere therein.

B. Absolute accuracy of the drawings and specifications cannot be guaranteed. While every effort has been made to coordinate the locations of equipment covered under other sections or divisions of these specifications, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate exact requirements governed by actual job conditions (see Coordination and Coordination Drawings below). Check all information and report any discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer before submitting bid or fabricating work ahead of time to avoid unnecessary rework.

C. The Contractor may modify duct sizes, transitions, and duct fittings and shift duct and equipment as required to meet field conditions. Duct sizes, where modified, shall be sized at a friction rate equal to the size shown. Pay particular attention to pressure losses through ductwork transitions and fittings as well. The Contractor shall indicate, and clearly note, all changes on the coordinated shop drawings and submit them to the Architect/Engineer for review prior to ordering or fabrication. The Contractor must obtain submittal review indication “No Exception Taken” for any proposed modifications.

D. The Contractor shall provide all necessary offsets, transitions, fittings, and modifications required to complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Follow equipment and material manufacturer's instructions where items are not specifically covered on the drawings or within the specifications. If instructions are in conflict, obtain clarification before starting work.

F. Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate and are for estimating purposes only. Before proceeding with the work, check and verify dimensions and assume responsibility for fitting materials, equipment, and other parts of equipment within the structure.

G. Confirm all slopes and inverts. Route and coordinate all piping locations as required to obtain necessary slopes and proper drainage. This is particularly important for drainage piping.

H. Where apparatus and equipment have been shown on drawings, dimensions have been taken from the manufacturer’s literature for the scheduled manufacturer. Check manufacturer’s certified drawings to see that equipment proposed for installation will fit into the building and into spaces provided.

1.7 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

279


B. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity.

C. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original and/or specified condition.

D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

E. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.

F. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect/Engineer.

G. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections.

H. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections.

1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Cutting and Patching”.

1.9 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING SERVICES

A. Contractor shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems, minor subsystems, and services provided under this section. He shall coordinate startup and commissioning procedures, meetings, calibration, and system checkout with all subcontractors and trades involved. Any system operational problems shall be diagnosed and all correctional procedures shall be initiated with the various subcontractors as required to bring the system into compliance with the design intent.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for preparing a written commissioning and startup procedure including check off list and report format showing design conditions and blanks for indicating actual operating conditions. The report format shall include each piece of equipment and all items that require adjustment.

C. Personnel performing commissioning and startup services shall be fully qualified, experienced, and normally engaged in this type of work. If the contractor does not have such personnel available from their own company, they shall hire, at their own expense, subcontractors who are qualified personnel.

280


D. Construction Manager shall regularly communicate with commissioning team through memos and progress reports to apprise them of progress and scheduling changes.

E. Commissioning and startup meetings: Construction manager shall schedule and conduct the meetings with team members in attendance as needed. These will include general, mechanical, controls, electrical contractors and subcontractors as appropriate.

F. Functional performance testing will not begin until startup, pre-functional testing and balancing are completed for given system.

G. The contractor shall designate one field person who has the overall responsibility for startup procedures which includes testing and balancing. He shall directly supervise that startup and commissioning operations and be available for required coordination before, during, and after.

H. Prior to startup, ensure that the systems are ready, including but not limited to the following: Proper equipment rotation; the systems are flushed and are clean; proper wiring; auxiliary connections; lubrication, venting; controls; all filters and strainers installed; and properly set relief and safety valves.

I. All electrical testing must be complete and test results submitted before equipment startup to avoid power interruptions during mechanical equipment startup and testing.

J. Equipment or systems shall not be started until systems are completed and/or when other continuing work could possibly damage completed systems if they are in operation.

K. Start and operate all systems. Provide the services of factory trained technicians for startup of major equipment and systems including, but not limited to, chillers, air conditioning units variable frequency drives (VFD), temperature controls, pumps, boilers, etc.

L. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and services necessary for the commissioning, startup and operation of all systems and equipment furnished and installed under this section. Contractor and commissioning team shall make every effort to expedite testing process and minimize unnecessary delays without compromising integrity of procedures.

M. The contractor and factory representative shall check all equipment during the initial startup to ensure correct rotation, proper lubrication, adequate fluids or air flows, non-overloading electrical characteristics, proper alignment, and vibration isolation. Systems shall be checked for air and/or water flows throughout without blockages. Air conditioning units and systems shall be checked for proper damper connections and positions, aligned and adjusted belt drives, proper lubrication, air filters installed, non-excessive electrical characteristics, and minimal vibration. Other miscellaneous equipment shall be started and operated as described above as applicable.

281


N. During initial operation of the system and unit substantial completion, qualified personnel shall be provided and designated for maintaining the equipment and systems in good running order. Failure of equipment during this period due to lack of proper supervision is the responsibility of the contractor and continued failures shall be grounds for the Owner to provide such services with back charges to the contractor.

O. Check all motor starters and verify that the heater sizing is correct, taking length of electrical feeders into consideration. Record amp readings on all motors.

P. Make sure all control systems are calibrated and functioning properly. Prepare a log to indicate the check, calibration, set point, etc. of each control device.

Q. Functional performance tests verify that components, equipment, systems, and interfaces between systems operate correctly. They include operating modes, interlocks, control sequences, and responses to emergency conditions.

R. Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by direct manipulation of system inputs (i.e. heating or cooling sensors), manipulation of system inputs by building automation system (i.e. softwar4e override of sensor inputs), trend logs of system inputs and outputs using building automation system, or short term monitoring of system inputs and outputs using stand-alone data loggers.

S. If retesting is necessary because any equipment or system reported to have been successfully started up or pre-functionally tested is found during functional testing to be faulty, the additional cost of retest shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

T. Commissioning and Verification of control system:

1. The control systems shall be completely commissioned to ensure all aspectsof the system are operating as intended and at optimum tuning.

2. All wiring connections shall be verified and traced from field device topanel to ensure proper connections.

3. All measured values shall be verified by a hand held calibrated device tovalidate that value indicated by the control system is in fact the actual

4. All loops shall be properly tuned to obtain the desired control value. Eachloop shall be “upset” and put back in control to demonstrate its ability tostabilize quickly.

5. A final point-by-point report shall be submitted that indicates the date ofeach verification, the results, and shall be initialed on each page by the person performing the reading.

282


U. A final and complete commissioning, startup report shall be submitted prior to final acceptance and payment. This report shall be signed by each person doing the commissioning/startup task and by the responsible field person. Report shall include, but not be limited to, date of test; instrument used; date of last calibration; temperatures; set points; rpm; voltage; amperage; pressures; stability; etc.

1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two (2) weeks prior to date of Training.

B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at designated location.

D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

E. The amount of time required for training on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections, or as noted below:

HVAC Equipment and Systems Two sessions at 8 hours each

Temperature Control System Two sessions at 8 hours each

Plumbing System 4 hours

1.11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

A. Mechanical Contractor will appoint and employ services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting and balancing.

B. The independent firm hired by the Mechanical Contractor will perform services specified in Section 23 05 93, “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing”.

C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

283


1.12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Closeout Procedures”.

B. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection.

C. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities.

1.13 FINAL CLEANING

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Closeout Procedures”.

B. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.

C. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum and clean all dust from air distribution system including ductwork and grilles.

D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.

E. Replace filters of operating equipment.

F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.

1.14 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Project record Documents”.

B. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:

1. Contract Drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda.

4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.

5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

284


C. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following:

1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.

2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.

3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.

F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:

1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum.

2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.

4. Field changes of dimension and detail.

5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

G. Delete Architect/Engineer title block and seal from all documents.

H. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer.

1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Operation and Maintenance Data”.

1.16 WARRANTIES


B. Provide duplicate notarized copies.

C. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

285


D. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three (3) D side ring binders with durable plastic cover.

E. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.

F. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

1.17 BUILDING CONTROL BOOKS


B. At the time Operation and Maintenance Data are submitted as specified, submit 3 loose, but bundled, sets of Building Control Information on 3 hole punched 8-1/2”X11” paper. The Building Control Information shall be organized as follows:

1. Table of contents with appropriate division tabs.

2. Contractors (Name, Address, Telephone and Contact).

3. Sub-Contractors (Name, Address, Telephone and Contact).

4. Material Suppliers (Name, Address, Telephone and Contact).

5. Warranties (Cards and Information Including Start Date, Duration, Company Name, Address, Telephone and Contact).

1.18 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections.

B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

1.19 SITE VISIT

A. Visit the site before submitting a bid. No extra payment will be made for additional work that would have been made apparent by the site visit.

1.20 OBSERVATION BY ARCHITECT

A. Work may be observed at any time by the Architect or his representative. Work covered or concealed before being observed and accepted shall be opened and uncovered upon request, and replaced at no additional cost or time to the project.

A. Secure and pay fees for permits, licenses, 286


1.21 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES AND UTILITIES

A. Coordinate with other Sections and schedule sequence of accomplishing the work covered by this division in such a manner as not to interrupt existing services and utilities at a time that will inconvenience the Owner.

1.22 FEES

A. Secure and pay fees for permits, licenses, inspections and royalties required for work of this Section.

1.23 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Products furnished to site and paid for by Owner.

B. Owner's Responsibilities:

1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor.

2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.

3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.

4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items.

5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service.

C. Contractor's Responsibilities:

1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner.

3. Handle, store, install and finish products.

4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.

1.24 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Submittal Procedures”.

B. General:

1. In addition to the procedures indicated below follow the procedures specified in Division 1 where they exceed the the requirements of this section.requirements

287


of this section.

2. Provide submittals of material or equipment in accordance with each specification section.

3. Each item submitted shall be labeled or identified the same as on the drawings. (AC1, EF1, TB1.01, etc.)

C Equipment, materials, and products specifically identified, described, and scheduled on the drawings are the basis of design. The other manufacturers or suppliers which may be named in the specification only indicate the general acceptability of the manufacturer or supplier and are considered alternates. It is the Contractor's responsibility to research, select, and prove, through the submittal process, that the specific model, size, or type of the alternate proposed manufacturer is equal and will perform equal to that which is the basis of the design. Operational characteristics for such items as outlet velocities, power input, sound levels, efficiencies, etc., shall be considered in addition to the overall performance, output, and physical constraints.

D . The Contractor assumes full responsibility that alternative items substituted for the scheduled manufacturer will meet the job requirements and is responsible for the cost of redesign and modifications necessary due to this substitution, for all trades. Revisions or additional work required by any trade due to the use of substitute materials and equipment shall be fully indicated on detailed drawings submitted with the shop drawings and all additional costs shall be accounted for in the final proposed substitution.

E. Mark submittal "Exactly as Specified" or accompanied by a letter from the supplier explaining in detail what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the scheduled item. Failure to point out the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not indicated and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, the Contractor will still remain responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the individual specification sections, provide materials and equipment from the indicated manufacturers only. Submittals of material or equipment manufactured by other than those indicated may be returned, not reviewed. If no manufacturers are indicated, then any product or material which complies with the specification and for the intended application may be submitted.

G. The mechanical and electrical components, structural systems, service clearances, and controls for all equipment are selected and sized, based on the basis of design manufacturer and equipment scheduled. If substitutions and/or equivalent alternate equipment are furnished, it shall be the responsibility of all parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent alternate equipment to verify and compare the characteristics (capacity, size, clearance, acoustics, etc.) and requirements of that submitted to that scheduled. If greater capacity or more materials or labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then it shall be the

288


responsibility of the parties involved in providing the substitute and/or equivalent items of equipment to provide all compensation for additional charges made for the proper rough-in, circuitry, support, and connections for the equipment furnished for all trades affected. No additional charges shall be allowed for such revisions.

H. Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.

I. The Engineer and/or Architect will review submitted shop drawings and documents for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the information contained in the contract documents. The Engineer's and/or Architect's review is for the convenience of the Owner in following the work and does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of deviations from the requirements stated in this specification and contract documents.

J. The Engineer's and/or Architect's review shall not be construed as a complete or detailed check of the work submitted, nor shall it relieve the Manufacturer or Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions of any sort in the shop drawings and samples, or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the contract documents. The review of a separate item shall not indicate review of the complete assembly in which it functions. Nothing in the Engineer's and/or Architect's review of the shop drawings and samples shall be considered as authorizing 1) a departure from contract documents and specifications, or 2) additional cost to the owner, or 3) increased time for completion of the work.

K. Submittals are not reviewed for quantities, dimensions, weights, fabrication processes, construction methods, coordination with work of other trades, construction safety practices, service clearance, coil and motor location, location of control and electrical panels, and other layout constraints. These items shall remain the sole responsibility of the contractor.

L. The Engineer and/or Architect will review submittals with reasonable promptness and will return them to the Vendor/Supplier/Manufacturer stamped to indicate the appropriate action taken as follows:

1. No Exceptions Taken.

2. Exceptions Taken As Noted. No resubmittal required.

3. Exceptions As Noted. Resubmit.

4. Rejected. Resubmit.

5. Not Reviewed. Must Meet Plans, Specifications, and Codes.

289


M. Markings or comments or the lack thereof shall not be construed as relieving the Vendor/Supplier/Manufacturer/Contractor from complete compliance with the project drawings and specifications.

N. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the Engineer and/or Architect have reviewed the shop drawings and samples for that respective portion of the work. Shop drawings and samples shall be submitted for review sufficiently in advance of the scheduled start of the work in the shop or in the field to allow ample time, in consideration of the number and complexity of the drawings in the submittal, for the Engineer and/or Architect to make an orderly review. No extension of time to complete the work will be granted to the Vendor/Supplier/Manufacturer by reason of failure to perform in this respect.

O. Each shop drawing and sample submitted for review shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal, and shall be identified by the project title, Vendor's/Supplier's/Manufacturer's name, and a reference to the related part of the contract documents.

P. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings.

2. Dielectric fittings.

3. Mechanical sleeve seals.

4. Escutcheons.

Q. Welding certificates.

1.25 ESTABLISHED STANDARD MANUFACTURER/OTHER AACEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Project Requirements and Substitutions”.

1.26 PRODUCTS

A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.

B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.

C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.

290


1.27 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.28 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Provide mixing with foreign matter.

F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.

1.29 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to “Submittal Procedures” above and Division-1for additional requirements.

B. Submit information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings.

C. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings and directions, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings, and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorages. Include as a minimum the following information on drawings or diagrams:

291


1. Dimensions

2. Identification of products and materials included

3. Compliance with specified standards

4. Notation of coordination requirements

5. Allowance for expansion, contraction, and deflection/movement of support structures.

D. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement

E. Clearances for access and service

F. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction.

G. Upon contractor’s request, engineer can make electronic data files available at contractor’s expense in order to enable contractor to expedite the production of working/coordination/shop drawings for the project. Transfer of the electronic data files to Contractor is for informational purposes only and will only be completed after a waiver is signed by contractor and owner relieving engineer of all liability resulting from use of electronic files and all engineer costs to produce electronic files in a format suitable for distribution are paid by contractor.

1.30 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. Place materials and equipment on order in time to avoid job delay or hindrance. Schedule deliveries to coincide, as nearly as possible, with the construction schedule.

B. Use only new, unused materials and equipment unless specifically noted otherwise.

C. All materials and equipment not conforming to the requirements of these specifications will be considered as defective. Items which have been accepted or approved at one time and place, but which subsequently fail to conform to the requirements of these specifications will also be considered as defective. All such defective materials, whether in place or not, will be rejected. Remove such materials and equipment immediately from the site of the work.

D. Prior to ordering materials or starting work, verify all measurements at the site. No extra compensation will be allowed for differences between actual dimensions and the measurements shown on the drawings.

E. Except as specifically noted otherwise, follow the installation and/or maintenance directions provided by the manufacturer for all materials and equipment.

292


F. For each part of the work furnish all materials and equipment of the same type by the same manufacturer.

1.31 PROTECTION OF BUILDING

A. Protect new and existing building structures and adjacent finished surfaces during construction. Patch, repair, and refinish existing work damaged by work under this Division to match adjacent undisturbed areas. Patching, repair, and refinishing is to be performed by workmen skilled in the Sections involved.

1.32 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Project Record Documentation”.

B. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions:

1. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping and conduits.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

3. Accepted substitutions, contract modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. This includes updating all equipment schedules with actual equipment provided.

4. Indicate duct and pipe routing and locations.

5. Refer to division-1 for additional requirements.

C. Contractor shall maintain a complete set of documents on site that are marked-up during the construction process indicating all changes that have been made. These mark-ups shall be maintained on a regular basis so they are current as the construction is in process and available for inspection by the Architect/Engineer. Markups shall include changes to duct and pipe routing and sizing.

D. Upon completion of the construction, the contractor shall transfer all mark-ups into AutoCAD and update the contract documents into record documents and the shop/coordination drawings in to as-built documents.

1. Upon contractor’s request, engineer can make electronic data files available at contractor’s expense in order to enable contractor to expedite the production of record drawings for the project. Transfer of the electronic data files to Contractor is for informational purposes only and will only be completed after a waiver is signed by contractor and owner relieving engineer of all liability resulting from use of electronic files and all engineer costs to produce electronic files in a format suitable for distribution are paid by contractor.

293


2. Architect/Engineers makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of electronic data files. They are provided to the contractor as a start point to upgrade to Record Drawings.

3. The contractor record documents shall be in the same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings.

4. Delete architect / engineer title block and seal from all documents.

E. Record and as-built document updates shall include schedules where contractor has supplied alternate manufacturers to those scheduled or where submitted performance varies.

F. Contractor shall prepare an electronic CAD file of record and as-built drawings and the drawings shall be updated with the mark-up, RFI and change orders.

G. Provide a minimum of one copy of the markup documents, a hard copy set of prints of the record and as built documents, and one electronic copy (disk) of the CAD files.

1.33 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, contractor shall request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

1.34 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review.

294


B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.

C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by Architect/Engineer.

1.35 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section.

B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mock-up has been accepted by Architect/Engineer.

1.36 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

A. Refer to Division 1 section “Quality Requirements”.

1.37 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer thirty (30) days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer and/or Owner.

B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment and to initiate instructions when necessary.

C. Manufacturer’s Field representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Submit report in duplicate within five (5) days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review.

1.38 SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER AND MODEL

A. Trade names are used to establish standards. Where more than one name is given, the first listed is the basis of the project design and will be described fully. Other names indicate product lines of generally comparable quality but are subject to the Architect's/Engineer’s direction.

B. Where specifications call for an installation to be made in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, a copy of such recommendations shall at all times be kept in the job superintendent's office, and shall be available to the

295


Owner's representative.

C. Follow manufacturer's instructions where they cover points not specifically indicated on the drawings and specifications. If they are in conflict with the drawings and specifications obtain clarification from the Architect before starting work.

1.39 NO SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER

A. Where no specific make of material or equipment is mentioned, an appropriate product of approved manufacturer may be used, provided it conforms to the requirements of system.

1.40 U.L. LABEL

A. Furnish UL labeled and listed materials and equipment except when equipment is of a type for which labeling or listing services are not available from UL.

1.41 CURRENT MODELS

A. Materials and equipment shall be new, current models by each manufacturer and shall bear complete identification by the manufacturer. Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to equal or exceed specified, submitted and published specifications, such as pressure ratings, capacities, etc.

1.42 SERVICE CAPABILITY

A. Provide materials and equipment of major and reputable manufacturers with ability to render competent and thorough technical services through local organizations, and to expeditiously furnish spare parts.

1.43 FINISHES AND PAINTING

A. Provide all equipment with a factory painted finish. All other painting will be done per the Architect's direction.

B. Touchup scratches in factory finished surfaces to match original. Obtain touch-up paint from the manufacturer of the piece of equipment.

1.44 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with work performed by other sections/divisions in order to accommodate the requirements of this section and to ensure adequate space and proper location for all necessary work on this project whether or not work is under this section. Provide coordination drawings, as indicated. Coordination shall be done prior to order or manufacture of any systems or components.

296


B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.

E. Coordinate work with the Electrical Division. Furnish the Electrical Division with shop drawing information for indicating ratings and control circuits required for the actual equipment furnished. Coordinate voltage, phase, and load requirements, prior to ordering equipment, to insure mechanical and electrical matches. All equipment shall be provided and ordered to suit the power available.

F. Layout support pads, curbs, sleepers, anchor bolts, etc., for all mechanical equipment and materials so as to be in the proper location for the equipment actually ordered. These pads shall be of adequate dimension to provide for proper mounting of equipment isolators and equipment mounting so that anchor bolts meet all seismic criteria. Contractor shall allow for proper service clearances.

G. Provide templates, information, and instructions to other divisions as necessary to properly locate holes and openings to be cut or provided for mechanical work.

H. Layout ducts, piping, and other mechanical systems and confirm all sizes of systems and components to be sure they fit the space available prior to ordering and manufacturing of components. Be certain to allow for proper pipe slopes.

I. Provide proper clearances for access to and service of all equipment and items requiring adjustment including shutoff valves.

J. Coordinate all disciplines to insure maximum point loads that can be attached to structural members are not exceeded. See other sections and structural contract documents for requirements. Provide intermediate supports between existing structural members (Unistrut, angle, etc.) as necessary to not exceed maximum point loads.

K. Lay out trench locations, do all excavation, shoring, laying, backfilling, and compacting for work performed under this division and not provided under other divisions. See other divisions for specification requirements.

1.45 COORDINATION SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Prepare and submit, for review, large scale (minimum 1/4" = 1'-0") coordination drawings showing location and elevations of all equipment, ducts, piping, cable trays, conduits, structural, and other items in the area. These shall be fully coordinated with all other trades and Owner supplied items. Check routing and

297


elevations of all piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment before fabricating. Report any conflicts that cannot be solved in the field to the Architect/Engineer. Extra charges shall not be allowed due to lack of coordination prior to, or during, construction. These drawings shall be distributed to, and coordinated with, all other trades that are affected.

1 In addition to plan view, indicate heights to clarify clearances from structure and from other trades. Use partial sections where necessary.

2 Provide proper clearances for access to and service of all equipment and items requiring adjustment including shutoff valves.

3 Coordinate the location of access panels in the hard ceiling areas to insure all equipment and devices have proper access for servicing and adjusting.

4 The coordination drawings shall be reviewed and checked for completeness by the general contractor. Review by the architect and engineer is to assist the contractor and to attempt to point out obvious errors. Responsibility for proper coordination shall remain with the contractor.

B. Differences or disputes concerning coordination, interference, or extent of work between sections shall be decided by general contractor.

C. Extra charges shall not be allowed due to lack of coordination (or lack of coordination drawings) prior to or during construction.

D. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work. Indicate the proposed locations of ductwork, piping, conduit, equipment, and materials. Include the following:

1. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation, including clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

2. Clearances for electrical and control components and panels.

3. Equipment connections and support details.

4. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

5. Interior floor penetrations

6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

8. Support, bracing and anchor locations for equipment and conduit.

298


E. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.

F. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

G. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, access panel and door locations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted items where ceilings are to be installed.

1.46 STRUCTURAL MODIFICATION

A. Do not cut structural members except with written approval of the Architect.

1.47 WORKMANSHIP

A. Workmanship shall be first class throughout, performed only by competent and experienced workmen in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. Replace work falling below these standards as directed by the Architect. Constant supervision of the work either by the Contractor or his competent representative shall be maintained. Welding shall be done by certified pipe welders.

1.48 QUIETNESS

A. Quietness during construction is a requirement. Eliminate noise, other than that caused by specific equipment operating at optimum conditions as directed by the Architect.

1.49 GENERAL ELECTRICAL

A. All equipment shall be selected to suit power available; this requirement supersedes other portions of the specifications.

B. All equipment shall conform to the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards, and shall bear the Underwriter Laboratories label unless such listing is not available.

C. Load and line voltage connections to equipment will be made by the Electrical Division unless specifically noted otherwise. Coordinate work with the Electrical Division. Furnish the Electrical Division with shop drawing information for indicating ratings and control circuits required for the actual equipment furnished.

D. Guard opening giving access to "live" or rotating parts to prevent accidental contact with such parts.

299


1.50 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers’ printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers’ instructions and Contract Documents.

C. Follow Manufacturer's installation details except as specifically modified on the drawings, and provide any valves or special fittings or other specialty items called for by them as required in order to make the equipment perform as intended.

1.51 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers’ certificate to Architect/Engineer for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.52 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. General: All equipment, piping, ductwork, and materials shall be fastened to the structure with properly sized and structurally engineered anchors, bolts, and restraints to prevent permanent displacement in any direction caused by lateral motion, overturning, or uplift.

B. Calculations:

1. Submit drawings, calculations, and specifications that clearly indicate the furnished systems for support of equipment, piping, ductwork and materials.

2. Calculations shall be in a form that can be readily reviewed by the Owner, and shall be prepared, stamped and signed by a licensed Structural Engineer.

3. Calculations for all seismic restraints including standard NFPA approved restraints shall indicate how the restraints are adequately supported by the secured to the building structure.

C. Provide specifications of anchor bolt size and loads with installation instructions for each item.

300


D. All structural steel shall be ASTM A36 (Fy = 36,000 psi). All pipe steel shall be ASTM A501 (Fy = 36,000) or ASTM A53, type E or S, grade B (Fy = 35,000). All tubular steel shall be ASTM A500 grade B (Fy = 46,000 psi). All bolts shall be ASTM A307 or ASTM A325. Other ASTM specified materials to be used in the unit and support shall be submitted for approval. Latest American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) and American Welding Society (AWS) codes shall apply.

E. All bolts, anchor bolts, expansion bolts, etc., shall be installed with steel washers. All high strength bolting shall be inspected by an independent testing laboratory. All welding shall be by welders holding valid certificates and have current experience in type of welds performed. Certificates shall be those issued by an accepted testing agency.

F. All welding shall be done by E70 series low hydrogen rods. All welding shall be per American Welding Society standards. Vendor may shop weld only the portions of unit and support which is factory preassembled. All field connections shall be bolted. Shop welds shall be shown on shop drawings. All full penetration welds shall be tested and certified by an independent testing laboratory.

G. Expansion Anchors in Hardened Concrete:

1. An expansion anchor is defined as a mechanical fastener designed to expand in a self-drilled or predrilled hole of a specified size, and to engage the sides of the hole in one or more locations to develop shear and/or withdrawal resistance to applied loads without the use of grout, epoxy, or dry pack.

2. Maximum Values: The shear and tension (pull-out) loads shall not exceed the values allowed in the latest International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation Report for the specific anchor in hard rock 3000 psi concrete.

3. Where the anchors are subjected to combined shear and pull-out forces, the ratio of the actual shear to the allowable shear, plus the ratio of the actual pull-out to the allowable pull-out, shall not exceed 1.00 for gravity loads or seismic forces.

4. Expansion anchors shall be specified in calculations and drawings by Manufacturer's name and model number, as well as by nominal thread size and required embedment. They shall be sized and installed in accordance with the above referenced conditions and requirements, as well as Manufacturer's recommendations, and ICC Evaluation Report recommendations for the specific anchor.

H. All isolators shall be fastened to the structure and to the equipment with properly sized and structurally engineered anchors and bolts as specified above. The

I. The equipment Manufacturer shall furnish the weight of the equipment at each

point of support.

J. The SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of mechanical Systems andPlumbing Piping Systems" may be used for reference.

301


K. Seismic Bracing for Hangers and Duct: All required seismic bracing shall beinstalled as per the State of California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Division T-22modified to meet an importance factor (I) of 1.0.

L. Under California Code of Regulations Title 24, Division T-22, seismic restraintsmay be omitted from the following installation:

1. Gas piping less than 1" inside diameter.

2. Piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 1/4" inside diameter.

3. All other piping less than 2 1/2" inside diameter.

4. All piping suspended by individual hangers 12" or less in length from the top of pipe to the bottom of the support for the hanger.

5. All rectangular air handling ducts less than 6 square feet in cross sectional area.

6. All round air handling ducts less than 28" in diameter.

7. All ducts suspended by hangers 12" or less in length from the top of the duct to the bottom of the support or the hanger connection point.

M. Provide for attachment to portions of the building structure capable of bearing the loads imposed. Design systems to not overstress the building structure.

N. The Construction Manager shall coordinate the load requirements from all contractors so that no combination of loads exceeds the structural limitations.

O. Design and install all support systems to comply with the seismic zone 4 requirements of the California Building Code (CBC). Use an importance factor (I) of 1.0.

P. The Engineer (under Contract of the Mechanical Contractor) providing the required calculations shall inspect all supports and attachments designed by him and provide a letter certifying that they have been installed as designed.

1. PRODUCTS (See Subsequent Sections)

2. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation and Arrangement: Install all mechanical work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchange bundles, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, raceways and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors, and control components. Doors and access panels shall be kept clear.

302


B. Ductwork: Change the cross-sectional dimensions of ductwork when required to meet job conditions but maintain at least the same equivalent cross-sectional area. Obtain the Architect's/Engineer’s approval prior to fabrication of ductwork requiring such changes.

C. Access: Provide access panels in equipment, ducts, as required for inspection and for proper maintenance.

D. Location of pipes, ducts, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate the work and to avoid interferences anticipated or encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication.

1. Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example, steam, condensate and plumbing drains shall normally have the right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

2. Offsets, transitions and changes in directions in pipes and ducts shall be made to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., required to affect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction.

E. Location of valves, traps, strainers, motors, damper operators, etc., shall be such as to be easily accessible by a person standing on the floor. If any such items are not in the open they shall be accessible through access openings in the building construction. Valves in vertical risers shall be located not over 5 feet above the floor. If circumstances at a particular location make this accessibility difficult or inconvenient, the situation shall be discussed with the Architect before installing apparatus at reduced accessibility locations.

F. Manufacturers' Installation Details: Conform to manufacturer’s instructions. Provide any valves or fittings recommended by manufacturers.

G. Openings in Pipes and Ducts: Keep closed during construction.

H. Ferrous metal work exposed to the weather, other than cast iron, shall be hot dip galvanized.

I. Nameplates: Provide for each fan and pump per the equipment schedules and its associated motor controller (if not in a motor control center); including any special instructions for fan or pump use; laminated black and white plastic with lettering cut through to white background. Submit list to the Architect for prior approval.

J. Items Exposed-to-View Entries, Hallways / Corridor Areas: Obtain acceptance by the Architect of the location of all equipment and materials before installation of work in these areas.

303


3.2 TESTING

A. Delayed Heating or Cooling Tests: If the work is completed during the heating season, perform final tests of cooling equipment the following summer; if completed during summer, perform test of heating system the following winter.

B. Test Procedures and Reports: The Contractor shall notify the Architect at least 48 hours before each system test, for mechanical work. Qualifications of people running tests should be established in writing. Monitor all tests. A written report shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Architect, showing the following as a minimum.

1. Who conducted test.

2. Test plan -times, pressures, etc.

3. Test results -times, pressures, a part of system that failed to meet test minimum and why. Corrective action recommended.

END OF SECTION

304


SECTION 230500 -BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.




5. Sleeves.

6. Escutcheons.

7. Grout.

8. Mechanical demolition.

9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

10. Painting and finishing.

11. Concrete bases.

12. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

305


C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:




4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

306


B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1 Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified at no additional cost to the Owner. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in pouredin-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate and provide the access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Coordinate with construction manager for Access panels, doors and requirements from other trades.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

307


2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 and Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

308


I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.

c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.

d. JCM Industries.

e. Smith-Blair, Inc.

f. Viking Johnson.

1. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.

3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Eslon Thermoplastics.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

1. Manufacturers:

309


a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

1. Manufacturers:

a. NIBCO INC.

b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Fernco, Inc.

c. Mission Rubber Company.

d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Eclipse, Inc.

d. Epco Sales, Inc.

e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.

f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

310


D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150-or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Epco Sales, Inc.

d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face-or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150-or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

311


a. Perfection Corp.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

312


G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

A. Refer to Division 3 Section, “Cast in Place Concrete”.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

313


A. Refer to Division 1 Section for "Cutting and Patching" and Division 2 Section for "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS -COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are accepted on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

314


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type and set screw.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.

k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set

315


screw.

l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Use the following:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.

i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.

j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips.

k. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

316


N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable plain-end sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas minimum 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to minimum 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. (1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1 Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2 Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

3 Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

317


R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

318


F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.

3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-thanschedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. Plain-End Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

319


M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION -COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section, “Painting”.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

320


1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel information and requirements.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood supports and anchorages information and requirements.

B. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

D. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.10 GROUTING

321


A. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for grouting information and requirements.

B. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

C. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

D. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

E. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

F. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

G. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

H. Place grout around anchors.

I. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION

322


SECTION 230523 -VALVES 1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Cast-iron angle valves.

3. Copper-alloy ball valves.

4. Ferrous-alloy ball valves.

5. Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves.

6. High-pressure butterfly valves.

7. Bronze check valves.

8. Gray-iron swing check valves.

9. Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves.

10. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.

11. Bronze gate valves.

12. Cast-iron gate valves.

13. Bronze globe valves.

14. Cast-iron globe valves.

15. Cast-iron plug valves.

16. Resilient-seated, cast-iron, eccentric plug valves.

17. Chainwheel actuators.

B. Related Sections include the following:

323


1 Division 22 and Division 23 piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction piping.

2 Division 22 and Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.

3 Division 22 and Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and actuators.

4 Division 22 and Division 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1 CWP: Cold working pressure.

2 EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

3 NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

4 PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

5 SWP: Steam working pressure.

6 TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.


A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

1. Exceptions: Domestic hot-and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping valves unless referenced.

B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

324



A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, man-ufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.


2.2 VALVES, GENERAL

A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.

B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

325


C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Actuators:

1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.

2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.

3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller, except plug valves.

5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.

G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.

H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F (454 deg C) for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F (216 deg C) for ball valves.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.3 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 1, Bronze Angle Valves with Metal Disc:

a. Cincinnati Valve Co.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

c. Hammond Valve.

326


d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. Red-White Valve Corp.

2. Type 2, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. American Valve, Inc.

b. Cincinnati Valve Co.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

f. Grinnell Corporation.

g. Hammond Valve.

h. NIBCO INC.

i. Powell, Wm. Co.

3. Type 3, Bronze Angle Valves with Metal Disc and Renewable Seat:


b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

e. Grinnell Corporation.

f. Milwaukee Valve Company.

g. NIBCO INC.

B. Bronze Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.

C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring bonnet.

327


D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring bonnet.

E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring bonnet.

F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with PTFE disc and union-ring bonnet.

G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with PTFE disc and union-ring bonnet.

H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with PTFE disc and union-ring bonnet.

I. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat, include union-ring bonnet.

J. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat, include union-ring bonnet.

K. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat, include union-ring bonnet.

2.4 CAST-IRON ANGLE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type II, Cast-Iron Angle Valves with Metal Seats:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

d. NIBCO INC.

B. Cast-Iron Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-85, Type II.

C. Class 125, Cast-Iron Angle Valves: Bronze mounted with gray-iron body and bronze seats.

D. Class 250, Cast-Iron Angle Valves: Bronze mounted with gray-iron body and bronze seats.

2.5 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

328



b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.



e. DynaQuip Controls.


g. Jamesbury, Inc.

h. Kitz Corporation of America.

i. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.

j. NIBCO INC.

k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.




e. DynaQuip Controls.

f. Flow-Tek, Inc.

g. Grinnell Corporation.

h. Hammond Valve.

i. Honeywell Braukmann.

j. Jamesbury, Inc.

k. Jomar International, LTD.

l. Kitz Corporation of America.

m. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.

n. Milwaukee Valve Company.

o. Nexus Valve Specialties.

p. NIBCO INC.

q. R & M Energy Systems (Borger, TX). 329


r. Red-White Valve Corp.

s. Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves.

t. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

3. Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:


b. DynaQuip Controls.

c. Grinnell Corporation.

d. Hammond Valve.

e. Jamesbury, Inc.

f. Kitz Corporation of America.

g. NIBCO INC.

h. PBM, Inc.

i. Red-White Valve Corp.

j. Worcester Controls.

4. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:


b. DynaQuip Controls.


d. Hammond Valve.

e. Jamesbury, Inc.

f. Milwaukee Valve Company.

g. NIBCO INC.

330


B. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.

C. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball, PTFE seats, and 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP rating.

D. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Forged-brass body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

E. Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Forged-brass body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

F. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Two-piece bronze body with exhaust vent opening, chrome-plated ball with vent, blowout-proof stem, locking handle, and working pressure rating of 400-psig (2760-kPa) CWP.

2.6 FERROUS-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. American Valve, Inc.

2. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

3. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div.

4. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

5. Flow-Tek, Inc.

6. Foster Valve Co.

7. Hammond Valve.

8. Jamesbury, Inc.

9. Jomar International, LTD.

10. Kitz Corporation of America.

11. KTM Products, Inc.

12. McCANNA, Incorporated.

13. Milwaukee Valve Company.

14. NIBCO INC.

15. PBM, Inc.

16. Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves.

17. Worcester Controls. 331


B. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-72, with flanged ends.

C. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 150, full port.

D. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 300, full port.

2.7 BRONZE CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 1, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc:



c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

d. Red-White Valve Corp.

e. Walworth Co.

2. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:





e. Walworth Co.

3. Type 1, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc:



c. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

d. Red-White Valve Corp.

332


4. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. Grinnell Corporation.

b. Kitz Corporation of America.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

5. Type 3, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc:







g. Hammond Valve.



j. Milwaukee Valve Company.

k. NIBCO INC.

l. Powell, Wm. Co.

m. Red-White Valve Corp.

n. Walworth Co.

o. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

6. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:






f. Hammond Valve.

g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.

h. Milwaukee Valve Company. 333


i. NIBCO INC.

j. Red-White Valve Corp.

k. Walworth Co.

l. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.

C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

D. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

E. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

F. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

G. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

H. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

I. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

J. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

K. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

334


L. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

M. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

N. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

O. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

P. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

Q. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.

R. Type 4, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

S. Type 4, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

T. Type 4, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

2.8 GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:





e. Flomatic Valves.


g. Hammond Valve.



j. Milwaukee Valve Company. 335


k. Mueller Co.

l. NIBCO INC.

m. Powell, Wm. Co.

n. Red-White Valve Corp.

o. Walworth Co.

p. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

336


2. Type II, Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves with Composition to Metal Seats:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

c. Mueller Co.


3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Swing Check Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation.

b. Mueller Co.

c. Victaulic Co. of America.

B. Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.

C. Type I, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with metal seats.

D. Type I, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with metal seats.

E. Type II, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.

F. Type II, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.

G. 175-psig (1207-kPa) CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with grooved or shouldered ends.

337


H. 300-psig (2070-kPa) CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with grooved or shouldered ends.

2.9 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 1, Bronze, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:







g. Hammond Valve.



j. Milwaukee Valve Company.

k. NIBCO INC.

l. Powell, Wm. Co.

m. Red-White Valve Corp.

n. Walworth Co.

o. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Type 2, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Solid-Wedge Gate Valves:







g. Hammond Valve.


338


i. Milwaukee Valve Company.

j. NIBCO INC.

k. Powell, Wm. Co.

l. Red-White Valve Corp.

m. Walworth Co.

3. Type 3, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Split-Wedge Gate Valves:


b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.


d. NIBCO INC.

B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.

C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge and union-ring bonnet.

D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge and union-ring bonnet.

E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge and union-ring bonnet.

F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge and union-ring bonnet.

G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge and union-ring bonnet.

H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge and union-ring bonnet.

I. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge and union-ring bonnet.

J. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge and union-ring bonnet.

K. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge and union-ring bonnet.

339


2.10 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:






f. Hammond Valve.

g. Kitz Corporation of America.

h. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.


j. NIBCO INC.

k. Powell, Wm. Co.


m. Walworth Co.

n. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Type I, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:






f. Hammond Valve.




j. NIBCO INC.

k. Powell, Wm. Co. 340



m. Walworth Co.

n. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I.

C. Class 125, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

D. Class 125, OS&Y, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

E. Class 125, NRS, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim, nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

F. Class 125, OS&Y, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim, rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

G. Class 250, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

H. Class 250, OS&Y, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

I. Class 250, NRS, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim, nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

J. Class 250, OS&Y, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim, rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

2.11 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc:






f. Hammond Valve. 341





j. NIBCO INC.

k. Powell, Wm. Co.


m. Walworth Co.

2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:






f. Hammond Valve.


h. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.


j. NIBCO INC.

k. Powell, Wm. Co.


m. Walworth Co.

342


3. Type 3, Bronze Globe Valves with Renewable Seat and Metal Disc:






f. Hammond Valve.

g. Milwaukee Valve Company.

h. NIBCO INC.

i. Walworth Co.

B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.

C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring bonnet.

D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring bonnet.

E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring bonnet.

F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE disc and union-ring bonnet.

G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE disc and union-ring bonnet.

H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE disc and union-ring bonnet.

I. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat, include union-ring bonnet.

J. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat, include union-ring bonnet.

K. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat, include union-ring bonnet.

2.12 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Cast-Iron Globe Valves with Metal Seats:


343






f. Hammond Valve.


h. Milwaukee Valve Company.

i. NIBCO INC.

j. Powell, Wm. Co.

k. Red-White Valve Corp.

l. Walworth Co.

B. Cast-Iron Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-85.

C. Type I, Class 125, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Gray-iron body with bronze seats.

D. Type I, Class 250, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Gray-iron body with bronze seats.

2.13 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Nonlubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves: a. General Signal; DeZurik Unit.

b. Grinnell Corporation.

c. Mueller Flow Technologies.

d. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls.

e. Wheatley Gaso, Inc.

f. Xomox Corporation.

B. Cast-Iron Plug Valves, General: MSS SP-78.

C. Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.

D. Class 250 or 300, lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.

E. Class 125 or 150, nonlubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.

F. Class 250, nonlubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.

344


3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.

3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze.

2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast iron.

3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig (2760kPa) CWP rating, copper alloy.

4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.

345


5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.

6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 125 , gray iron.

7. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 175-psig (1207-kPa) CWP rating.

8. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.

9. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron.

10. Globe Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze.

11. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron.

12. Plug Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Class 125 , nonlubricated-type, cast iron.

D. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig (2760kPa) CWP rating, copper alloy.

2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.

3. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 3, Class 125, bronze.

4. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 125, gray iron.

5. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 175-psig (1207-kPa) minimum CWP rating.

6. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.

7. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron.

8. Globe Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.

9. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron.

10. Plug Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Class 125 or 150, nonlubricated-type, cast iron.

E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends.

346


3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.

5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends.

6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.

7. For Grooved-End, Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved. Do not use for steam or steam condensate piping.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

END OF SECTION

347


SECTION 230529 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure.

2. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

348


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

D. All attachments to building structure shall be made in accordance with the Owners structural engineers requirements and weight limitations.

E. Submit shop drawings and calculations for review and approval by Owners structural engineer before installation.


A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for equipment, duct and pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of California.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Pipe Hangers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.

b. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.

349


c. Grinnell Corp.

d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.

e. National Pipe Hanger Corp.

f. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

2. Channel Support Systems: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.

b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.

c. GS Metals Corp.

d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.

e. National Pipe Hanger Corp.

f. Unistrut Corp.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.

b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.

c. Pipe Shields, Inc.

e. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.

b. Hilti, Inc.

c. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.

350


1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.

1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or waterrepellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

2. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier.

3. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

4. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or waterrepellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.

5. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass.

6. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.

7. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.

8. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

9. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

351



2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

4. Refer to Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for additional information and requirements”

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon-or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

352


4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable Swivel Split-or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur

353


and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Carbon-or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape where allowed by seismic codes.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles where allowed by seismic codes.

5. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

6. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

7. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

8. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge where allowed by structural codes.

9. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams where allowed by 354


structural codes.

10. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads.

11. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

12. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.

13. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 14. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

15. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

16. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited.

G Saddles and Shields. Unless Other indicicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, waterrepellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360degree sheet metal shield.

355


H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.


A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.

1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe

356


size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

357


J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

1. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

2. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

358


3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment as indicated on the drawings.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

359


B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

360


SECTION 230533 -MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts.

2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.

3. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.

4. Housed spring mounts.

5. Elastomeric hangers.

6. Spring hangers.

7. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.

8. Thrust limits.

9. Pipe riser resilient supports.

10. Resilient pipe guides.

11. Freestanding and restrained air spring isolators.

12. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.

13. Seismic snubbers.

14. Restraining cables.

15. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AV: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient.

361


B. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development for the State of California. OSHPD assigns a unique anchorage pre approval "R" number to each seismic restraint it tests. The number describes a specific device applied as tested.


A. All mechanical equipment shall be braced or anchored to resist horizontal force acting in any direction using the following criteria:

1. The total design lateral seismic force shall be determined from Section 1632A.2, California Building Code (CBC) 1998. Forces shall be applied in the horizontal directions, which result in the most critical loading for design.

2. The value of Ap (Component Application Factor) of Section 1632A.2 shall be selected from Table 16A-0, CBC 1998. The valve of Pp (Seismic Importance Factor) and Ca (Seismic Coefficient) shall be selected from Table 16A-K and 16A-Q, CBC 1998, respectively.

B. Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient, Av: Per 1998 UBC, Chapter 16.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

4. Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.

5. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2-inch deflection in x, y, and z planes.

362


C. Welding certificates.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article above. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


A. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage pre-approval "R" number, from OSHPD or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If pre-approved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

363


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for all snubbers.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. California Dynamics Corp.

3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

4. Mason Industries, Inc.

5. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.

6. Vibrex

B. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil-and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Material: Bridge-bearing neoprene, complying with AASHTO M 251.

2. Durometer Rating: 60.

3. Number of Layers: 1.

364


C. Elastomeric Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Durometer Rating: 60.

D. Restrained Elastomeric Mounts: All-directional elastomeric mountings with seismic restraint.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron housing containing two separate and opposing, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene elements that prevent central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.

4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 100 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.


3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

365


G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.

1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.

2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.

3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel before contacting a resilient collar.

H. Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.





6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

366


J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.





6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.

K. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to equipment.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.





6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop.

367


L. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

M. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers:




4. Mason Industries, Inc.

5. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division.


7. Vibrex.

B. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 40, plus or minus 5, with a flat washer face.

C. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 60, plus or minus 5.

D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

368


E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.

2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Manufacturers:




4 Mason Industries, Inc.


2. Vibrex.

B. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

C. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for field-applied, cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.

369


2.5 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1 Powder coating on springs and housings.

2 All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.

3 Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.

4 Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

B. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.

C. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

370


D. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

E. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.

F. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.

3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported equipment manufacturer's written instructions for seismic codes at Project site.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

4. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

C. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. Isolator seismic-restraint clearance.

2. Isolator deflection.

3. Snubber minimum clearances.

4. Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

5. Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling system. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

6. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

371


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop.

D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.

E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

END OF SECTION

372


SECTION 230553 -MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

1. Equipment nameplates.

2. Equipment markers.

3. Equipment signs.

4. Access panel and door markers.

5. Pipe markers.

6. Duct markers.

7. Stencils.

8. Valve tags.

9. Valve schedules.

10. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.

373



A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment.

1. Data:

a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.

b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.

c. Labels of tested compliances. 壱 Location: Accessible and visible.

壱 Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment. 壱 B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. 壱 1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. 2 Data: 壱 a. Name and plan number.

壱 b. Equipment service.

壱 c. Design capacity.

壱 d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. 壱 3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment. 壱 C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resinlaminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 壱 Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.

壱 Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment

374


identification.

壱 Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for larger units.

壱 Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive. 壱 D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch-(1.6-mm-) thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment. 壱 1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws.

2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow.

1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

375


B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Aluminum or Brass.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Architect. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.

1 Material: 0.032-inch-thick brass or aluminum.

2 Material: 0.0375-inch-(1-mm-) thick stainless steel.

376


3 Material: 3/32-inch-(2.4-mm-) thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer.

4 Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain.

377


5 2.6 VALVE SCHEDULES

6 A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1 Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.

2 Frame: Extruded aluminum.

3 Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass.

2.7 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1 Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.

2 Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3 Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE.

4 Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:

378


1 Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.

2 Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.

3 Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment.

4 Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.

5 Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. Provide identification label on each door to indicate service section, i.e. supply fan, return/exhaust fan, filters, electrical, controls, cooling coils, heating/reheat coil, humidifier and similar items.

6 Expansion tanks, air separators and similar equipment.

B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated.

1. Letter Size: Minimum ¼ inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. 3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets.

b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.

c. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.

d. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.

e. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.

f. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment.

g. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.

h. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.

i. Tanks and pressure vessels.

j. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

379


C. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated-plastic equipment markers, at Installer’s option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

D. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.

1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes:

a. Green: For cooling equipment and components.

b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components.

c. Green and Yellow: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.

d. Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components.

2. Letter Size: Minimum ¼ inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. 4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. c. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. d. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. e. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. g. Tanks and pressure vessels. h. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

380


E. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminated-plastic equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

F. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.

1 Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.

2 Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

3 Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.

4 Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

381


B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers complying with ASME A13.1 on each piping system.

1 Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2 Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows:

1 Near each valve and control device.

2 Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3 Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.

4 At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5 Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6 Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7 On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1 Green: For cold-air supply ducts.

2 Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.

3 Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

4 ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.

5 Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and

382


proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include sec-ondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

c. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches, round.

d. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round.

e. Steam: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: Green.

b. Hot Water: Yellow.

c. Fire Protection: Red.

d. Gas: Yellow.

3. Letter Color:

a. Cold Water: White.

383


384

b. Hot Water: White. c. Fire Protection: White. d. Gas: White.


3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.

3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.

END OF SECTION

385


SECTION 230593 -TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following:

1 Balancing airflow including submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.

2 Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.

3 Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.

4 Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.

5 Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.

6 Measuring sound and vibration.

7 Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

C. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.

D. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

E. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

B. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Prepared on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.


386


A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by AABC or NEBB.

B. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1 Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

2 Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification" as appropriate.

E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.


A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: For AABC certified agents, provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting,

387


and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

388


1 The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.

2 Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

B. Special Guarantee: For NEBB certified agents, provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

1 The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.

2 Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

1. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

2. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to construction, examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment.

1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documentation."

D. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with design data and installed conditions.

389


E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.

F. Examine system and equipment test reports.

G. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, flow-control devices and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

I. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

M. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

N. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.

2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.

3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff dampers are properly connected.

5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

6. Sensors are located to sense only intended conditions.

7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.

8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.

9. Interlocked systems are operating.

10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

390


O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and stepby-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1 Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2 Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

3 Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

4 Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

5 Isolating and balancing dampers are open and control dampers are operational.

6 Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided.

7 Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

391


A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to procedures contained in AABC national standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

壱 Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

壱 Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 5 to minus 5 percent. 壱 3.5 REPORTS

A. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

B. Final Report: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, bound in three-ring, loose-leaf binder, and tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing agent.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: a. Fan curves.

b. Manufacturers' test data.

c. Field quality-control test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

d. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. 4. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: a. Title page.

b. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.

392


c. Project name.

d. Project location.

e. Architect's name and address.

f. Engineer's name and address.

g. Contractor's name and address.

h. Report date.

i. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. j. Summary of contents, including the following: (1) Design versus final performance.

(2) Notable characteristics of systems.

(3) Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. k. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

l. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.

m. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values. n. Test conditions for fan performance forms, including the following: (1) Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. (2) Conditions of filters. (3) Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. (4) Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. (5) Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. (6) Other system operating conditions that affect performance. 5. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following: a. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

b. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

c. Terminal units.

d. Balancing stations.

393


3.6 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION

394


SECTION 230700 -DUCT INSULATION

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.


1 Division 7 Section "Through Penetration Fire Stop Systems" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

2 Division 23 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.

3 Division 22 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.

4 Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1 Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2 Application of field-applied jackets.

3 Applications at linkages for control devices.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch square sections of each sample material.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of

395


insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

396


E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1 Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.

2 Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc.

397


2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. Rubatex Corp.

3. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:

a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.

4. Calcium Silicate Insulation:

a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.

b. Pabco.

c. Schuller International, Inc.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge-or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.

1 Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2 Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.

398


E. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.

2.3 KITCHEN GREASE DUCT INSULATION – FIRE BARRIER DUCT WRAP

A. Manufacturer: 3M Fire Protection Products (No substitutions permitted).

1. Telephone: (800) 328-1698; website: www.3M.com/firestop

B. Proprietary Products/Systems: fire Barrier Duct Wrap, including the following:

1. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 15A:

a. Material: Patented inorganic blanket encapsulated with a scrim-reinforced foil.

b. Type and Size: Roll, 2 inches x 24 inches x 20 feet or 2 inches x 48 inches x 20 feet.

c. Color: Aluminum.

d. Weight: 1.83 psf (8.93 kg/m

C. Provide accessory products and materials as follows:

1. Aluminum Foil Tape:

a. Type and Size: Acceptable to wrap material manufacturer.

2. Filament Tape:

a. Width: Minimum ¾ inch.

3. Banding Material and Banding Clips:

a. Material: Carbon steel or stainless steel.

b. Width: Minimum ½ inch.

c. Thickness: Minimum 0.015 inch.

4. Insulation Pins:

a. Material: Copper-coated steel.

b. Size: Minimum 12 gauge.

5. Speed Clips:

399

http://www.3m.com/firestop.com


a. Material: Galvanized steel.

b. Type and Size: Minimum 1 ½ inches square or 1 ½ inches diameter round or equivalent sized insulated cup-head pins.

6. Access Door Hardware:

a. Type: Threaded rods with ¼ inch (6.4 mm) wing nuts and ¼ inch (6.4 mm) washers. b. Material: Galvanized steel.

c. Diameter: ¼ inch (6.4 mm).

d. Length: 4 ½ inches – 5 inches (114 – 127 mm).

7. Access Door Hardware:

a. Type: Hollow tubing to fit threaded rods.

b. Material: Steel.

c. Length: 4 inches (102mm).

8. Fire Barrier Silicone Sealant:

a. Manufacturer: 3M.

b. Manufacturer Designation: 1000 N/S, 1003 S/L or 2000+.

D. Manufacture’s Instructions

1. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the fire barrier wrap manufacturer.

E. Preparation

1. Surface Preparation: Ensure that surfaces of all openings and penetrating items are clean, dry, and free of dust.

F. Installation

1. General:

a. Comply with installation requirements of fire tested assembly design.

b. To minimize waste, roll out fire barrier duct wrap material tautly before measuring.

400


2. Wrap fire barrier duct wrap blanket around the perimeter of the duct and cut to a length to overlap itself not less than 3 inches (76 mm) so that the overlap made by adjacent blankets forms a longitudinal overlap. 3. Seal all cut edges of the blanket and any tears in the foil scrim with aluminum foil tape. a. Telescoping 3 inch Overlap Wrap Method.

b. Install each blanket overlapping 1 adjacent blanket, so that each blanket has 1 edge exposed and 1 edge covered by the next blanket and the visible edges of the perimeter overlaps all point in the same direction. 4. Checkerboard 3 inch Overlap Wrap Method.

a. Install blankets with both edges exposed alternate with blankets with covered edges so that the visible edges of the perimeter overlaps alternate their directions and appear on every other blanket.

5. Butt Joint with Collar Method.

a. Install adjacent blankets butted tightly together with a 6 inch (152 mm) wide collar of fire barrier duct wrap centered over the joint, overlapping each blanket by 3 inches (76 mm) minimum.

Note: Select and specify one of the 3 methods below to suit project requirements and specifier practice.

6. Banding Only

a. Filament tape may be used to temporarily hold the blanket in place until the banding is applied.

b. Apply steel banding around the duct 1 ½ inches from each edge of the blanket and maximum 10 ½ inch centers.

c. Place banding around the material and tighten so as to sufficiently hold the fire barrier duct wrap in place against the duct, compressing the foil but not cutting the foil.

7. Additional Pinning to Prevent Sagging of the Wrap.

a. For ducts 24 inches (610 mm) and larger in width, additional pins are required to support the blanket on the bottom horizontal surface and on the outside face of a vertical duct run. b. Space pins a maximum of 10 ½ inches apart in the direction of the blanket width and a maximum of 12 inches apart in the direction of the blanket length.

401


8. Mechanical Fastening with Pins Only.

a. Weld insulation pins to the duct in the centers of the overlaps a minimum of 1 ½ inches from each edge of the blanket and spaced a maximum of 10 ½ inches (267 mm) on center along perimeter overlap, and a maximum of 10 ½ inches on center along longitudinal overlaps.

b. Impale blanket over pins and hold in place by galvanized speed clips.

c. Insulation pins that extend beyond the blanket wrap shall be turned down to eliminate sharp points.

d. Install insulated cup-head pins at the same spacing requirements of the insulation pins.

9. Access Door Installation:

a. Weld 4 galvanized steel threaded rods, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter by 4 1/2 inches -5 inches (114 -127 mm) long to the duct at the corners of the door opening.

b. Place 4 steel tubes, each 3 inches (76 mm) long, over the rods to act as protection for the fire barrier duct wrap when fastening the door.

c. Weld 4 insulation pins to the door panel for installation of the blanket.

d. Cut 1 layer of fire barrier duct wrap approximately the same size as the access panel and impale over the insulation pins on the panel, fitting this layer tightly against the wrap surrounding the access door opening with no through openings.

e. Cut a second layer of fire barrier duct wrap so as to overlap the first layer by a minimum of 1 inch (25.4 mm) and impale over the pins so that both layers are locked in place with galvanized speed clips.

f. Turn down pins that extend beyond the outer layer of fire barrier duct wrap to avoid sharp points on the door.

g. Place insulated door panel over the threaded rods and hold in place with washers and wing nuts.

402


H. Protection

1. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.

2.4 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant aluminum foil.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2. PVC Jacket Color: White.

D. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with ASTM B 209, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the end of this Section.

1. Finish: Smooth finish or cross-crimp corrugated finish.

2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

E. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 0.10 inch thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

1. Moisture Barrier: Minimum 1-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

2. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4 inch wide.

2.5 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.

1. Tape Width: 4 inches.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

403


1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.

3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.

4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.

5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface.

E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

404


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each duct system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

405


3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.

2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.

1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.

3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.

Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.

R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor.

1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends with vapor-retarder mastic.

3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

406


3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.

407


B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Space anchor pins as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.

408


3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows:

壱 Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

壱 Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the duct and plenum surface.

3.6 CLOSED-CELL PHENOLIC-FOAM INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation as follows:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands at 12inch intervals and tighten without deforming the insulation materials.

2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.

3. On exposed applications, finish insulation with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

3.7 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands without deforming the insulation material.

2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands.

3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 409


2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.10 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:

1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.

2. Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.

3. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.

4. Indoor exposed range-hood exhaust ductwork.

5. Indoor concealed range-hood exhaust ductwork.

6. Indoor exposed oven and dishwasher exhaust ductwork.

7. Indoor concealed oven and dishwasher ductwork.

C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

410


1. Fibrous-glass ducts.

2. Metal ducts with duct liner.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.

5. Flexible connectors.

6. Vibration-control devices.

7. Testing agency labels and stamps.

8. Nameplates and data plates.

9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.

3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Round, supply-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber board, mineral-fiber blanket, flexible elastomeric, and closed-cell phenolic foam.

2. Thickness: 1 inch.

3. Number of Layers: One.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum foil.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: Perm rating not exceeding 0.5 perm.

6. Minimum Thermal Resistance: R2.1.

B. Service: Round, return-air ducts, concealed.





5. Vapor Retarder Required: Perm. Rating not exceeding 0.5 perm.


411


C. Service: Round, outside-air ducts, concealed.







D. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, concealed.







E. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, concealed.







F. Service: Rectangular, outside-air ducts, concealed.





412




G. Service: Round, supply-air ducts, exposed.







H. Service: Round, return-air ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber board, mineral-fiber blanket, flexible elastomeric, and Closed-cell phenolic foam.






I. Service: Round, outside-air ducts, exposed.







413


J. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, exposed.







K. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, exposed.







L. Service: Rectangular, outside-air ducts, exposed.







414


M. Service: Rectangular, range-hood exhaust ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber board, calcium silicate.






N. Service: Rectangular, range-hood exhaust ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber board, calcium silicate.




5. Vapor Retarder Required: Perm rating not exceeding 0.5 perm


END OF SECTION

415


SECTION 230900 -BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating Building Management System (BMS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls (DDC) as shown on the drawings and described herein. The BMS shall perform control algorithms, calculations and all monitoring functions. The BMS shall provide operator interaction and dynamic process manipulation, including overall system supervision, coordination and control. This shall include HVAC control, metering, energy management, alarm monitoring, and all reporting and maintenance management functions related to normal building operations all as indicated on the drawings or elsewhere in this specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Products furnished but not installed under this section:

1. Section 232113 – Hydronic Piping;

a. Control Valves

b. Flow Switches

c. Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets

d. Flow meters

2. Section 233113 – Sheet metal

a. Automatic Dampers (not specifically specified with the equipment)

3. Division 260000 – Electrical

a. Wiring and conduit required for dedicated 115 VAC outlets at the Operator Interfaces and accessories

b. Duct Smoke Detectors with contacts for use by this contractor.

c. Wiring of power feeds through all disconnects, starters, and variable speed controllers to electric motors.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

416


A. General Requirements

417


1. Provide and install a dedicated, stand-alone automatic Direct Digital Control system complete with all required software and hardware. This system will directly control all specified mechanical equipment, heat pumps, fans, etc. Carrier to provide all necessary materials, software, graphics etc. to conform to the district standard included in the scope of work for complete operation and functionality of the BMS system.

2. The controls contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the entire controls system as a single source. He shall certify that he has on staff under his direct employ on a daily basis, factory trained technical personnel. These employees shall be qualified to project manage, engineer, commission, and service all portions of the control system.

3. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operate under stand alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate.

B. Basic System Features:

1. Zone by zone direct digital logic control of space temperature, scheduling, optimum starting, equipment alarm reporting, and override timers for after-hours usage. A zone is the area served by one VAV box, heat pump, unit ventilator, fan coil, etc.

2. Operator Interface software shall be Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Windows 2000 or higher application. The software shall be multitasking, capable of executing and displaying multiple instances in individual windows while running concurrently with other Windows programs such as word processors or database programs. Operation of the terminal software shall be simple and intuitive.

3. Complete energy management firmware, including self adjusting optimum start, power demand limiting, global control strategies and logging routines for use with total control systems. All energy management firmware shall be resident in field hardware and not dependent on the Operators Terminal for operation. Operators terminal software is to be used for access to field based energy management control firmware only.

4. Priority password security systems to prevent unauthorized use. Each user shall have an individual password, or users can be assigned to a group password. Each user shall be assigned which control functions they have access to.

5. Equipment monitoring and alarm function including information for diagnosing equipment problems and alarm dial out to remote sites or pagers.

6. The complete system, including, but not limited to zone controllers, field installed controllers and operator’s terminals shall auto-restart, without operator intervention, on resumption of power after a power failure. Database stored in field installed controller memory shall be battery backed up for a minimum of 1 year. Batteries on unitary controllers shall not be allowed.

7. Modular system design of proven reliability.

8. Each field panel capable of independent control.

9. All software and/or firmware interface equipment for connection to remote monitoring station 418


from field hardware or the operator’s terminal.

10. The system shall be capable of recording equipment runtime totalization of fans, heaters, boilers, etc., and also capable of alarm generation and alarm dial out to remote sites.

11. Communication wiring for field controllers shall not be run in star patterns.

12. All DDC hardware and software shall be designed and manufactured by U.S. corporations. All hardware shall be Listed Underwriters Laboratory for Open Energy Management Equipment (PAZX) under the U.L. standard for safety 916, with integral labels showing rating.


A. Product Date: Comply with requirements of Section 23 00 00.

B. Responsibility: The supplier of the Building Control System shall be responsible for inspection and Quality Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship furnished by him.

C. Component Testing: Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of high-quality, pre-tested components. Each and every controller, sensor, and all other DDC components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment.

D. Tools, Testing and Calibration Equipment: The Building Control System supplier shall provide all tools, testing and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the control system.

E. The installer shall have an established working relationship with the Building Controls Systems Manufacturer for not less than three years.

F. The installer shall have completed the Building Control Systems Manufacturer’s classes on the control system. The installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request. The installer shall have a minimum of five years documented experience in Building Control Systems installations and be approved by the Manufacture or their authorized Distributors.

G. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Engineer in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of date of supplier's purchase order, and any subsections thereof as applicable, shall govern design and selection of equipment and material supplied:

419


1. ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) Standards 90.1 and 62.99

2. (CBC) California Building Code, including amendments

3. Listed Underwriters Laboratory for Open Energy Management Equipment (PAZX) under the UL Standard for Safety 916. Listing includes both U.S. and Canadian certification.

4. NEC National Electrical Code

5. FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.

6. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark).

B. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase order.

C. Except as otherwise indicated, the system supplier shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for necessary approvals by the governing authorities.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Date: Comply with requirements of Section 23 00 00.

B. Drawings:

1. The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequences, bill of materials, bus riser diagrams, hardware/software product data sheets, and applicable valve and damper schedules for approval.

2. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11” x 17”. 3. Six complete sets of submittal drawings shall be provided. 4. Drawings shall be available on CD-ROM.

420


C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals will be provided prior to final acceptance. The manuals shall include:

1. Installation instructions.

2. Principles of operation and a detailed system description.

3. Startup and operating instructions.

4. System layout and interconnection schematic diagrams.

5. Routine preventive maintenance procedures and corrective diagnostic troubleshooting procedures.

6. Name, address and telephone number of the DDC Systems field representative.

7. Complete recommended spare parts list.

1.7 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION

A. The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time markings and details for hardware items and software configuration phases.

B. The schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and documents and shall indicate timing and dates for system installation, debugging, and commissioning.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period of one year from completion and acceptance by the owner, except for damages from other causes.

B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours during normal business hours.

C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software and be at no cost to the owner.

421


1.9 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable manufacturer for the Building Management System / Automatic Temperature Control system shall be Carrier Corp. (no substitution). The installer shall use only products from this manufacturer and it shall be compatible with existing Carrier Comfort Network system installed in other facilities.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Materials.

B. Communication.

C. Operator Interface.

D. Custom Application Controllers.

F. Application Specific Controllers.

G. Controller Inputs and Outputs.

H. Power Supplies and Line Filtering.

I. Auxiliary Control Devices.

J. Wiring and Raceways.

K. Fiber Optic Cable System.

L. Compressed Air Supply – Pneumatic.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All products used in this project installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of six months. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner’s Representative in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract.

422


2.3 COMMUNICATION

A. Peer-to-peer controller communications shall be via a three-conductor cable with shield. EIA Standard RS-485 Communications protocol shall be employed.

B. The Peer–to-peer Communications network shall be capable of having multiple system elements connected. Each Communications network shall allow for the use of modules as an interface to secondary Buses.

C. Whenever the Communications Bus enters or leaves a building, the Bus shall be provided with adequate lightning suppression devices.

D. The Communications Bus shall be capable of communicating through a telephone modem to a remote building. This interface shall allow the Energy Management PC operator’s station to communicate with any other remotely located, compatible, Communications Bus.

E. The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily via the network.

F. The network shall have the following minimum capacity for future expansion:

1. The Primary Network shall have routing capacity for 239 controllers.

2. Each secondary Network shall have capacity for 239 Controllers.

3. The system shall have an overall capacity for 57,100 Building Controller, Custom Application Controller, and Application Specific Controller input/output objects.

2.4 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and operate in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at the operator workstation.

B. System Security

1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names.

2. Passwords shall restrict the user to the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager.

3. User Log On/Log Off attempts shall be recorded.

4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorised use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user-definable.

423


C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week and one for Holiday scheduling. Each of these schedules should include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer. Each schedule may consist of up to 8 events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to adjust the start and stop times for all members from one schedule.

2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed, it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week.

3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination. Provide a standard application for the proper coordination of equipment. This application shall provide the operator with a method of grouping together equipment based on function and location. This group may then be used for scheduling and other applications such as group setpoints.

E. Binary Alarms. Each binary object may be set to alarm based on the operator-specified state. Provide the capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms. Each analog object may have both high and low alarm limits. Alarming should be able to be automatically and manually disabled.

G. Alarm Reporting. The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the appropriate workstations based on time and other conditions. An alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in the event log, generate custom messages, and display graphics.

H. Remote Communication. The system shall have the ability to dial out in the event of an alarm.

I. Demand Limiting. The system shall have the ability for demand limiting. If specified in the drawings, the system shall include:

424


1. The demand limiting program shall monitor building power consumption from signals generated by a pulse generator (provided by others) mounted at the building power meter, or from a watt transducer or current transformer attached to the building feeder lines.

2. The demand-limiting program shall predict the probable power demand such that action can be taken to prevent exceeding the demand limit. When demand prediction exceeds demand limit, action will be taken to reduce loads in a predetermined manner. When demand prediction indicates the demand limit will not be exceeded, action will be taken to restore loads in a predetermined manner.

3. Demand reduction shall be accomplished by the following means:

a. Reset air handling unit supply temperature set point up.

b. Widen space temperature set points].

c. De-energize equipment based upon priority.

4. Demand limiting parameters, frequency of calculations, time intervals, and other relevant variables shall be based on the means by which the local power company computes demand charges.

5. Provide demand-limiting prediction and control for any individual meter monitored by the system or for the total of any combination of meters.

6. Provide the means for an operator to make the following changes on-line: a. Addition and deletion of loads controlled.

b. Changes in demand intervals.

c. Changes in demand limit for meter(s).

d. Maximum shutoff time for equipment.

e. Minimum shutoff time for equipment.

f. Select rotational or sequential shedding and restoring.

g. Shed/restore priority.

7. Provide the following information and reports, to be available on an hourly, daily, and monthly basis:

a. Total electric consumption. b. Peak demand. c. Date and time of peak demand. d. Daily peak demand.

425


J. Sequencing. Provide application software to properly sequence the start and stop of chillers, boilers, and pumps to minimize energy usage in the facility.

K. PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and anti-windup shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value that is used to position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, set point, and PID gains shall be user-selectable.

L. Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts, shall be user-selectable.

M. Energy Calculations. If metering is specified on the drawings, provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g., kW) or flow rates (e.g., L/s [GPM]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data. Provide an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window kW demand value.

N. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling. This feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

O. On/Off Control with Differential. Provide an algorithm that allows a binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set point. The algorithm shall be direct-acting or reverse-acting, and incorporate an adjustable differential.

P. Run-Time Totalization: Provide software to totalize run-times for all binary input objects. A high run-time alarm shall be assigned, if required, by the operator.

2.5 FIELD INSTALLED GENERAL PURPOSE CONTROLLERS

A. The Field Installed Controller shall be a solid state sixteen bit micro-controller with pre-tested and factory configured software specifically designed for regulating building equipment using closed-loop Direct Digital Control and facility management routines.

B. General Purpose Electronic Controller (GPEC): The GPEC shall be located where shown on the plans and shall include inherent input/output capability. Each controller shall include a minimum of eight inputs and eight outputs. If the GPEC’s input/output capability is exceeded, additional controllers with inherent input/output capability shall be provided. The GPEC’s input/output capability shall include a combination of standard HVAC sensor input and output types. The GPEC shall support discrete and either 0–10 VDC and 4–20 ma type analog outputs. The GPEC shall support the following sensor input types as a minimum:

426


1. Dry contact and pulsing dry contacts

2. 0–10 VDC and 4–20 ma

3. 5K and 10K thermistors

4. 1000 ohm Nickel RTD

5. Communication status for the primary communications bus and Local Interface Device (LID) shall be indicated by LEDs. The separate LEDs shall flash whenever communications are occurring. The GPEC shall communicate to all connected points at least once a second.

6. The GPEC shall not require wiring to a terminal strip and shall utilize “plug type” terminals such that the user may be able to disconnect and replace a module simply by removing the plug type connectors and plugging them into a new module.

C. General Purpose Electronic Expandable Controller (GPEX): The GPEX shall be located where shown on the plans and shall include inherent input/output capability. Each GPEX shall include a minimum of eight inputs and eight outputs. If the GPEX’s input/output capability is exceeded, the GPEX shall be capable of supporting additional GPEX-I/O modules. Each GPEX-I/O module shall be capable of supporting a minimum of eight additional inputs and outputs. The GPEXs and associated GPEX-I/O modules shall include the ability to support a combination of universal HVAC sensor input and output types. The GPEX and GPEX-I/O modules shall include the inherent ability to support any combination of discrete, 0–10 VDC and 4–20ma outputs and the following sensor inputs types as a minimum:

1. Dry contact and pulsing dry contacts.

2. 0 –10 VDC and 4 –20ma.

3. 10K thermistors.

4. 1000 ohm Nickel RTD.

5. All output channels shall include diagnostic LEDs. Whenever a discrete output has been enabled by the GPEX, a LED associated with that channel shall light. When used with analog output points the LED will indicate the commanded position by dimming and brightening of the LED when the HO-A is in the Auto position. When the output is commanded to its minimum position the LED will become dim. As theanalog output commanded position increases, the brightness of the LED will increase, until it is fully illuminated at the maximum commanded output.

6. Each input and output channel shall include a configuration switch such that the user shall be able to select the input or output type from any of the types listed above. The GPEX and GPEX-I/O shall not require wiring to a terminal strip. Both types of controllers shall utilize “plug type” terminals such that the user may be able to disconnect and replace a module simply by removing the plug type connectors and plugging them

427


into a new module.

7. The GPEX shall be capable of supporting HAND-OFF-AUTO (H-O-A) override switches for all output channels. The H-O-A switches shall be accessible to the user and shall allow the user the ability to force the controllers discrete outputs on, off, or in an automatic mode allowing the GPEX to command the discrete output channel on and off. When used with analog output channels, the hand position will command the analog output to its maximum value. When the switch is indexed to the automatic mode the GPEX’s algorithm will command the output.

428


D. Controller Attributes:

1. The controller shall be powered from standard, off-the-shelf, Class II, 24 volt transformers. The controller shall be listed under UL916-PAZX (Energy Management), UL 864-UDTZ (General Utility Signaling), UL864-UUKL (Smoke Control), VDE, and CSA. Products shall be manufactured in a facility having a Quality System that is registered to either ISO 9002 or ISO 9001 Quality Assurance Standard. The controller shall be designed to be easily mounted in a standard NEMA 1 type enclosure without special rails or mounting hardware and as local and national code dictates.

2. The controller shall include a 365-day real-time clock and watchdog timer diagnostic indicator provided by a LED. The watchdog timer shall reset upon power on and be resettable by software thereafter. Should the watchdog timer not be resettable during the timing period, it shall time out and set all outputs to their non-powered state. The LED shall illuminate solidly to indicate this failure.

3. The controller shall not require a battery. All configuration data, custom programs, etc., will be stored in non-volatile memory. The controller shall provide a minimum of two days data retention for the time clock and consumable data (runtimes, GPM, KWH, etc.). Systems that require a battery to store data is not acceptable.

4. The controller shall include the capability to provide a local interface for all operating values, alarms, etc., via a hand held, panel mounted, or remotely mounted Local Interface Device. The controller shall also be capable of interfacing to a portable PC for configuring or altering the configuration, setting the address, performing uploads/downloads, entering of custom programs, etc., through a separate, additional RJ14 plug.

5. The controller shall be capable of operating in either a stand-alone mode or as part of a network with an EMS operator’s station and other system elements including Product Integrated Controllers (PICs).

E. Controller Software

1. The controller shall provide stand-alone operation and shall accept analog and discrete signals from sensors, switches, relays, etc., and shall multiplex the various signals into digital format. All closed loop Direct Digital Control routines shall utilize controller based software algorithms that shall be resident in its memory. All standard and custom control controller based algorithms shall operate independently, and systems that require an on-line host computer or intermediary processor to control mechanical or electrical equipment is not acceptable.

2. Time Schedules: Each time schedule shall include provisions for eight individual-day types (Monday through Sunday and holidays), and each individual-day type shall contain at least seven individual on-off time periods. The controller shall support one minute granularity. Systems that use a granularity of greater than one minute shall not be accepted.

3. Set point Schedules — Each set point schedule shall be individually definable in terms of: a. Engineering Units

b. Occupied High Set point

c. Occupied Low Set point

429


d. Unoccupied High Set point

e. Unoccupied Low Set point

4. Controller software shall include the capability to link specific time schedules with corresponding set point schedules for any particular DDC loop.

5. Remote Timed Override — The controller shall support remote timed override through the use of a space sensor with an integral override button or a momentary contact switch. Whenever the override is initiated during the unoccupied period and the controller is configured to provide remote

430


override the time schedule associated with the override shall become occupied for 0-1-2-3-4 hours (operator selectable). Whenever the time schedule becomes occupied the controller shall control its associated control points to their occupied set points.

a. The controller shall provide a power-fail restart routine that shall provide an adjustable staggered time delay for each DO point selected, to avoid sudden power peaks.

F. Input/Output Signal Processing

1. Input Processing:

a. Each connected or calculated input point shall be independently processed to provide accurate data values. All point processing shall be performed by the controller. All connected and calculated points, both analog and discrete, shall be individually configured and be capable of displaying their values at the LID, portable PC or at a connected EMS operator’s station. Input points may be added, deleted or modified via the Local Interface Device, portable PC, and if tied into a network, by the EMS operator’s station. Discrete input points shall be monitored for status, alarm or consumable data.

b. Analog inputs shall be monitored to provide feedback to a control loop, to annunciate that an analog alarm limit has been exceeded, to offer centralized analog monitoring or to monitor consumable data. Discrete and analog inputs shall be able to interact with controller resident algorithms for local processing.

c. The operator shall be able to create sensor groups for use in the algorithms. The sensor groups will provide the lowest, highest, or average values, as applicable to the application and algorithm.

d. Controller software shall include a trim function to allow for the field calibration of analog input sensors.

2. Alarm Processing: The controller shall contain a routine to process alarms and alerts. Alarm processing shall be initiated once per second and shall consist of a scan of all input points. Alarm processing logic shall also monitor return to normal conditions as part of the alarm scan. The operator will have the ability to modify the alarm/alert priority level.

3. Output Processing

a. Discrete Outputs

(1) Discrete outputs shall be used to command two state devices (on/off, open/close, etc.). Each discrete output point must be capable of being individually configured by the operator.

(2) The following types of direct digital control routines shall be provided for discrete outputs as a minimum:

431


(a) Enthalpy/Analog Comparison

(b) Analog

(c) Interlock

(d) Time Clock/Cycling

(e) Time Clock/Cycling with Temperature Override

(f) Staged Thermostat (Minimum of four stages plus fan)

(g) Staging Control (Minimum of 6 stages. For VAV, CV air handlers with electric heat and/or DX cooling and cooling towers)

(h) Lead/Lag Pump Control with Automatic Fault Logic b. Staging algorithms will include adjustable on/off delays as well as adjustable differential between stages.

4. Analog Outputs: Analog outputs shall be used to command modulating/variable position devices. Each analog output must be capable of individual configuration via the operator. As a minimum, the following preprogrammed analog out algorithms shall be resident at the controller:

a. Cooling Coil Control with Dehumidification (CV and VAV)

b. Heating Coil Control (CV and VAV)

c. Mixed Air Damper Control (CV and VAV including Indoor Air Quality

d. Damper Override)

e. Minimum Outside Air CFM for VAV Air Handlers

f. Air and Water Reset

g. Humidification

h. Sequenced Cooling and Heating Coil Control For CV Applications

i. Static Pressure and Fan Tracking Control

j. Adaptable Control

5. Systems which require a host computer to perform any of the above algorithms shall not be acceptable. The algorithms shall support both dual (master/submaster) and single control loops, and shall include PID control, as required.

Overrides And Interlocks

432


1. Provide the capability to manually override a controller’s input or output value and input a different value in its place. Manual overrides shall be capable of being initiated via the Local Interface Device, portable PC or the EMS operator’s station, if part of a network. All manually initiated overrides shall be manually removed.

2. The controller shall also be capable of providing event initiated overrides of normal control algorithms. Specific preprogrammed interlock sequence programming shall be configured via either the Local Interface Device, portable PC or the EMS operator’s station, if part of a network.

H. Stand-Alone Data Collection

1. Traces: The controller shall include the inherent ability to perform automatic point tracing based on a change in value of a discrete or analog point. The trace function shall be operator selectable to store up to 60 samples at an operator configured interval. When the point trace is full the operator shall be able to have the trace stop, wrap around, or to stop and trigger another trace of the point to begin. The trace values shall be displayed at the LID, portable PC or EMS operator’s station, if part of a network.

2. Runtimes/Consumables: Any discrete input may be linked by the operator to a runtime table for the purposes of displaying equipment runtime totals. Equipment runtime alarms shall also be displayed at the LID.

3. Any discrete or analog input shall be capable of being used to calculate and display consumable data such as; GPM, KWH, #/hour, etc. This information shall be displayed at the LID.

I. Facility Management Application Software:

1. The controller shall contain the following preprogrammed application software:

a. Night Time Free Cooling (NTFC)

b. Adaptive Optimal Start/Stop

c. Power Fail Restart

J. Facility Management Application Software: Provide a controller based, user-friendly interactive, programming language for the purpose of creating custom programs for specific, unique applications. Complex control strategies shall be able to be developed by the end user.

All custom programming must be performed in English language and shall be addressable by user specific English names without requiring alphanumeric addresses or point numbers. Programming languages such as BASIC or FORTRAN shall not be acceptable for these applications, and the custom programs shall be retained in controller memory and shall not require a host CPU to operate correctly. Custom programs shall be capable of supporting either SI metric or customary US units. All custom programming point data shall be capable

433


of being transferred from one controller to another (if networked) directly without an on-line CPU or host computer.

K. Networking

1. The controller shall include the inherent ability to be networked with other system elements to allow a dynamic exchange and sharing of information without the addition of communication cards or additional software. Systems that require a host computer to be in the system architecture or on-line is not acceptable.

2. This information exchange shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Broadcast of time, date, holiday, outside air temperature and relative humidity

b. Data Collection of consumable and runtime data in addition to stand-alone controller based consumable and runtime data.

c. Data transfer to receive and utilize input/output point data from and to other system elements.

d. Tenant billing

e. Peak Demand Limiting

f. Water System Manager (To allow a dynamic exchange of information between the air handler load and the water source)

g. Chiller Plant Manager

h. Dynamic linkage software between an air handler and its associated air terminals

i. Data Port/Data LINK (ASCII conversion) and alarm printer interface

j. BAC link (BACnet)

k. Custom Programming

434


2.6 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A. General. Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user-programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve.

1. Each ASC shall be capable of standalone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network.

2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.

B. Communication:

1. Each Custom Application Controller shall reside on a Peer-to-Peer RS-485 network or bus.

2. The controller shall provide a service communication port using RS-485 for connection to a hand-held workstation.

C. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 40°C to 65°C [-40°F to 150°F].

2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C [32°F to 120°F].

3.D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal connectors — or to a removable molex tyle cable.

E. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall use non-volatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss.

F. Immunity to power and noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5-120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m [3 ft].

G. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.

H. Split System Unit And Zone Controllers (Field Installed)

1. Device Description

a. The controller shall be a solid-state microprocessor based controller used to control each function of the applicable HVAC equipment using Direct Digital Control (DDC) and specifically designed software.

435


b. The controller shall be capable of providing stand-alone operation. All application software actually performing the required control functions shall be supplied with the controller, pre-tested and pre-configured. All closed loop DDC routines shall utilize controller based software algorithms that shall be resident in the controller memory.

c. The controller and associated transformers shall be field mounted in the unit’s control box or a separate weather resistant NEMA enclosure shall be provided.

d. All control transformers shall be field supplied, mounted and wired. The controller shall not require a battery. All configuration data is to be stored in non-volatile memory. Systems that require a battery to store data are not acceptable. e. The controller shall feature and maintain a 365-day software clock/calendar with holiday functions. The controller shall provide the capability to provide various time scheduling such as:

(1) Local time schedule

(2) Time schedule within another controller on the network

(3) Time schedule within a Linkage Thermostat

1. Time schedule from a field-supplied dry contact that performs remote occupancy control.

2. Timed override requests shall be performed by all controllers without a network requirement. The controller shall be capable of interfacing to a portable PC for configuring, or altering the configuration, setting address, uploads, downloads, etc.

3. Alarm/Alert Processing -The controller shall contain routine(s) to process alarms and alerts. Alarm/alert processing shall consist of a scan of all input points. Certain analog alarms/alerts shall only be monitored when the controller is in the occupied mode (i.e., relative humidity, indoor air quality sensor). Time delays shall be provided with the software to prevent nuisance alarms/alerts during a transition period or if a set point change occurs. All alarms/alerts shall be displayed at a local Interface device, portable PC and via the network to a remote EMS operator’s station or alarm printer as applicable. The controller shall include the inherent capability to store the most recent alarm messages.

I. Standard Control Hardware

1. Supply Air Sensor

a. The factory-supplied sensor shall be a thermistor type (RTDs [Resistant Temperature Detectors] shall also be acceptable).

b. The sensor shall be field installed to properly measure the unit supply air temperature.

c. The sensor shall be field wired to the controller.

J. Optional Control Hardware

436


1. Space Temperature Sensor

a. The space temperature sensor shall be field-supplied for field installation as shown on the plans.

b. The sensor shall consist of a thermistor with a nominal resistance of 10,000 ohms at 77° F (RTDs shall also be acceptable), termination block with screw terminals mounted on a printed circuit board, push button for remote occupant override, and a remote communication port RJ11, if required.

c. Sensors shall be capable of including a slide switch that may be used by the occupant to adjust the heating and cooling set points as detailed in the I/O (Input/Output) list, shown on the plans, or mentioned elsewhere within this specification.

2. Relays

a. The relays (SPDT) shall be integrated in the controller field wired to equipment contactors or relays.

b. Pilot relays shall be field-supplied and wired as applicable inside the equipment or control panel.

3. Economizer

a. The controller shall include a self-powered 4 to 20-ma output, field wired to the economizer motor.

b. Economizer and relief damper actuators shall be Carrier/Belimo type LM24-SR or NM24-SR, sized for the application, and compatible with unit controller output signal.

2.7 CONTROLLER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

A. Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom Application, or Application Specific Controllers.

B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself — to another point, or to ground — will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller. Inputs and outputs shall be arranged on interchangeable modules or circuit boards to allow the replacement of a damaged module or board without replacing the entire controller.

C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices, and shall be protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense “dry contact” closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) being applied.

D. Pulse accumulation input objects. This type of object shall conform to all the 437


requirements of binary input objects, and also accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation.

E. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low-voltage (0 to 10 VDC), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with — and field-configurable to — commonly available sensing devices.

F Binary outputs shall provide for On/Off operation, or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on Building and Custom Application Controllers shall have three-position (On/Off/Auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.

G. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on Building or Custom Application Controllers shall have status lights and a two-position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch and manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4% of range per year.

H. Tri-State Outputs. Provide tri-state outputs (two co-ordinated binary outputs) for control of three-point floating type electronic actuators without feedback. Use of three-point floating devices shall be limited to zone control and terminal unit control applications (VAV terminal units, duct mounted heating coils, zone dampers, radiation, etc.). Control algorithms shall run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking.

I. Input/Output points shall be universal type, i.e., controller input or output may be designated (in software) as either a binary or analog type point with appropriate properties. Application Specific Controllers are exempted from this requirement.

J. System Capacity. The system size shall be expandable to at least twice the number of input/output required for this project. Additional controllers (along with associated devices and wiring) shall be all that is necessary to achieve this capacity requirement. The operator interfaces installed for this project shall not require any hardware additions or software revisions in order to expand the system.

2.8 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

A. Control transformers shall be UL Listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type, or furnish over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service per NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated capacity.

1. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and

438


over-current protection, and shall be able to withstand a 150% current overload for at least 3 seconds without trip-out or failure. Contractor/Vendor shall be responsible for providing correct half bridge or full bridge rectification per device requirements.

a. Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C [32°F and 120°F]. EM/RF shall meet FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B, and MIL-STD 810C for shock and vibration.

b. Line voltage units shall be UL Recognized and CSA Approved.

B. Power Line Filtering:

1. Provide transient voltage and surge suppression for all workstations and controllers either internally or as an external component. Surge protection shall have the following at a minimum:

a. Dielectric strength of 1,000 volts minimum

b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less

c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater

d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or better at 40 Hz to 100 Hz.

2.9 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized Control Dampers:

1. Motorized control dampers, unless specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:

a. Multiple blade dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade type as listed below or as scheduled on the drawings. Single blade round dampers shall have an elliptical blade.

(1) Modulating outdoor air and exhaust dampers shall be opposed blade type with blade and side seals.

(2) Modulating return air dampers shall be parallel blade type with blade and side seals.

(3) Two position shut off dampers may be parallel or opposed blade type with blade and side seals. b. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel channel or 1/8” extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.

c. Damper blades shall not exceed 8” in width or 48” in length. Blades are to be suitable for medium velocity performance (<2000 fpm). Blades shall not be less than 16guage.

439


d. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for the application, Oilite or better.

e. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frames shall be provided with replaceable butyl rubber or neoprene seals. Side seals shall be spring-loaded stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for a maximum leakage rate of 10 cfm/sq. ft @ 4” w.c. differential pressure.

f. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48” wide x 60” high. Provide a minimum of one damper actuator per section.

g. Dampers shall have exposed linkages.

B. Electronic Valve and Damper Actuators: Electronic valve and damper actuators, unless specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:

1. Electronic actuators, less than 600 in-lb. of rated torque, shall have ISO Electronic 9001 quality certification and be UL listed under standard 873, CSA C22.2 No. 24 and have CE certification.

2. Electronic actuators used on valves or dampers shall be designed to directly couple and mount to a stem, shaft or ISO style-mounting pad. Actuator mounting clamps shall be a V-bolt with a toothed V-clamp creating a cold weld, positive grip effect. Single point, bolt, or single screw actuator type fastening techniques or direct-coupled actuators requiring field assembly of the universal clamp is not acceptable.

3. Actuators shall be fully modulating/proportional, pulse width, floating/tristate, or two position as required and be factory or field selectable. Actuators shall have visual position indicators and shall operate in sequence with other devices if required.

4. Optional auxiliary switches shall be available.

5. Actuators shall have an operating range of –22° to 122°F.

6. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 V DC or 0-20 mA input signal and provide a 2-10 V DC or 4-20 mA (with a load resistor) operating range.

7. Actuators shall be capable of operating on 24, 120 or 230 VAC, or 24 V DC and Class 2 wiring as dictated by the application. Power consumption shall not exceed 5 VA for AC, including 120 V AC actuators. 8. Actuators shall have electronic overload protection or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent actuator damage throughout the entire rotation. For power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Spring return actuators shall be capable of CW or CCW mounting orientation. Spring return models > 60 in-lbs. will be capable of mounting on shafts up to 1.05” in diameter. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. of torque shall have a metal, manual override crank. 9. Upon loss of control signal, a proportional actuator shall fail open or closed based on the minimum control signal. Upon loss of power, a non-spring return actuator shall maintain the last position.

10. Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paralleled to increase

440


torque if required. Valves and dampers requiring greater torque or higher close off may be assembled with multiple low torque actuators.

11. Dual mounted actuators using additional anti-rotation strap mechanical linkages, or special factory wiring to function are not acceptable. Actuators in a tandem pair must be "off the shelf," standard actuators ready for field wiring.

12. Damper and valve actuators will not produce more than 62 dB when furnished with a mechanical fail-safe spring. Non-spring return actuators shall conform to a maximum noise rating of 45 dB(A) with power on or in the running or driving mode.

C. Binary Temperature Devices

2. Low-voltage space thermostat shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set point adjustment, 13°C to 30°C [55°F to 85°F] set point range, 1°C [2°F] maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

3. Line-voltage space thermostat shall be bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listed for electrical rating, concealed set point adjustment, 13°C to 30°C [55°F to 85°F] set point range, 1°C [2°F] maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

4. Low-limit thermostats. Low-limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6 m [20 ft] minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any 30 cm [ 1 ft] section. The low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

D. Temperature Sensors.

1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor. 2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum

of 1.5 m [5 feet] in length. 3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure rating

of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed. 4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set point adjustment, override switch, display,

and/or communication port as shown. 5. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement.

E. Flow Switches.

1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.

2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as specified.

441


F. Relays.

1. Control relays shall be UL Listed plug-in type or hub mount with dust cover and LED “energized” indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays shall be UL Listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable 200% (minimum) from set point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure when not installed in local control panel.

G. Voltage Transformers.

1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA Recognised, 600 V AC rated, complete with built-in fuse protection.

2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4 to 55°C [40 to 130°F] and shall provide 0.5% accuracy at 24 VAC and a 5 VA load.

3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic material.

442


H. Current Switches: Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current. The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the DDC system.

I. Differential Pressure Type Switches (Air Or Water Service): DP shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as shown.

J. Local Control Panels:

1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with [hinged door], key-lock latch, and removable sub-panels. A single key shall be common to all field panels and sub-panels.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL Listed for 600 volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide ON/OFF power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each local panel.

2.10 WIRING AND RACEWAYS

A. General: Provide and install copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in the applicable sections of Division 16.

B. All insulated wire to be copper conductors, UL labeled for 90C minimum service.

2.11 COMMUNICATION BUS

A. General

1. The Communications Bus shall be a three-conductor cable with shield. EIA Standard RS-485 Communication’s protocol shall be employed. The communications bus shall comply with FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A for bus radiated and conductive noise.

2. Communications Bus shall be capable of having multiple system elements connected. Each Communications Bus shall allow for the use of modules as an interface to secondary Buses.

3. Whenever the Communications Bus enters or leaves a building, the Bus shall be provided with adequate lightning suppression devices.

4. The Communications Bus shall be capable of communicating through a telephone modem to a remote building. This interface shall allow any EMS operator’s station, as applicable, to communicate with any other remotely located, compatible, communications bus.

443


B. Network Communications

1. The communications infrastructure shall be capable of supporting a two-tiered physical architecture consisting of an RS-485 Layer and Ethernet Layer. All controllers and system interface devices shall maintain a peerto-peer flat, logical, communications architecture from either physical layer. The infrastructure shall rely on the use of communications routers that will encapsulate messages on the RS-485 layer and pass them to or through the Ethernet layer. These routers shall provide a seamless, transparent connection from the RS-485 layers or segments to an Ethernet backbone, network, as well as to computers with a direct Ethernet connection. The Ethernet routers shall have full communication capability with the DDC network without loss of dynamic data or functional control tables.

2. The RS-485 communications segments shall have the capability to be connected using a minimum of 200 Ethernet routers in order to extend the RS-485 communications segments over the Ethernet. The Ethernet routers shall support flexible Internet Protocol addressing. The Ethernet routers shall support either static or Dynamic Host IP address assignments. Addressing shall be capable of being done in more than one way. A standard Windows tool such as HyperTerminal shall allow a non-HVAC technician to commission the Ethernet router. The Ethernet router shall also be able to be fully commissioned using a standard commissioning tool that an HVAC technician is familiar with.

3. The Ethernet router shall have the following minimum components and capabilities:

a. 32 Bit Micro Processor

b. 10 Base-T Ethernet Port

c. RS232 Console Port

d. RS485 Network Port

e. Status and Communication LED’s

2.12 OPERATOR INTERFACE VIA WEB BROWSER

444


A. Description:

1. General: The control system shall be as shown and consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers and, where shown on the drawings, shall include a stand alone Web Server. The stand alone Web server shall be a compact device capable of routing peer to peer communications of devices on the RS-485 network to either an Ethernet LAN or a telephone line. The Web Server shall be capable of storing all system device definitions within the Web server and shall not require an external system manager, computer, or controller to define or access system control devices. The Web Server will allow users to interface with the network via dynamic color graphics served over the Intranet or Internet via a standard Web Browser. The Web server shall be capable of tabular and graphic displays of mechanical systems, building floor plans, or control devices depicted by point-and-click graphics.

B. Operator Interface

1. Operator Interface. Furnish one compact Web server interface as shown on the system drawings. Operators shall be able to access all necessary operational information in the system via personal computer utilizing standard Web browser software. Computer and Web browsing software shall not be furnished under this section. The Web server shall reside on the same Peer-to-Peer network as the Building Controllers.

2. Web Server shall connect via Ethernet to a LAN or to a Phone Line and be able to serve up controller information to up to four simultaneous operators connected via the Ethernet or telephone with standard Web Browsers.

3. Hardware: Furnish one compact Web server router with internal 56k modem and ethernet port for operator computer access. The web server shall have an integrated RS-485 port for connection to the peer to peer controller network. The web server shall not require a permanent keyboard or monitor, however shall have an integrated terminal port for connecting a terminal and keyboard during installation and configuration. The Web server shall allow file transfer of files from another system for use as graphics backgrounds or custom displays.

4. Web Browser Interaction

a. The Web server shall be capable of providing the operator, at a Web Browser, with both tabular or graphical pages of controller data. An operator with the proper password level shall be able to change setpoint and occupancy schedules or override points and remove overrides. Dynamic objects shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files.

Graphics shall have the ability to show animation by shifting image files based on the status of the object.

b. Custom Graphics. Custom graphic files may be created with the use of a graphics

445


generation package. These graphics may be downloaded to the Web server to use as graphical backgrounds for Dynamic data sent to a Web browser. A text editor shall be all that is required to combine the custom graphic files with dynamic data points and create custom display pages for an operator accessing the Web server from a standard Web browser.

c. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package program. Upon connection to the controls system the Web Server shall have the capability to learn the controls system and automatically present default web pages for each controller found.

d. Alarms. An operator shall be able to access a tabular listing of the systems most recent alarm messages from a standard Web browser. This listing shall include up to 50 of the most recent system alarms from building controllers.

e. Display Information. An operator shall have the capability to perform basic setup of the Web Server from a standard Web browser. Basic setup shall include learning new controllers that are added to the controls system, setting the time in controllers and changing the display units of the data presented between Metric and Imperial units.

2.13 OPERATING INTERFACE SOFTWARE

A. Operating Software: Multi-tasking, single user operating software shall be provided for the central facilities operators station, as shown in the contract documents. The vendor shall provide all required software, including the database. The PC shall be capable of running either Windows 2000, or XP Professional operating system. All new PCs shall include Windows 2000, or XP Professional operating software.

B. Passwords: The proposed system shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 100 unique operator Energy Management System (EMS) passwords. Each operator shall be assigned an access level. Each access level shall be customized to include the required control functions from the menu of all available functions (i.e., view only, force and auto points). Each operator’s access level shall be further customized based on an assignment of control exceptions for each area (i.e., full access in one building, view only access in another, and custom programming in another).

446


C. Operator Interface

1. The proposed system shall include screens with standard windows format, commands, menu conventions, and dialog boxes. The operator shall have access to a full array of help displays to assist while on-line, including context sensitive on-line help, based on the current cursor position. The Program Manager shall include a separate group icon for access into the EMS system with Program Item icons for access to an Alarm Manager, Network Manager, Reports, Graphic/Plot Display Manager, Log in/out, and EMS set-up.

2. The operator (if allowed by password) shall be capable of forcing/autoing of EMS points based on a pre-defined schedule setup by the operator.

D. Wizards

1. The proposed system shall include Help Wizards to assist an inexperienced operator. Help Wizards shall be provided, as a minimum, for the following operator functions:

a. Reports

b. Alarms

c. Trends

d. ViewSPACE Databoxes

e. Operator Profiles

E. Network Manager

1. Network Manager shall graphically display the EMS system, through the use of a directory with a branching structure, similar to the windows file manager. A double click on a network will expand the directory tree and display the areas that make up the network. A double-click on an area shall display the list of controllers, then another double-click of a controller shall display the controller’s tables (status, maintenance, configuration, and service). A double-click of the controller’s table will result in dynamic updating of applicable values (i.e., point value displays, maintenance values, service information). All system operations shall allow penetration to any system operation by the operator if allowed by password. This shall allow the operator to penetrate to any desired system operation through the use of a hierarchy plan of system graphics or displays.

2. The Network Manager shall also provide the main interface into the EMS networks. The following functions shall be provided as a minimum:

a. System and Point configuration

b. Custom unit assignment and generation

c. Viewing, forcing, or autoing of point status displays and maintenance tables

d. Assigning/removing controllers to different areas

447


e. Modification/copying of table values using DRAG and DROP Windows feature

f. Ability to create or modify a controller’s name and description

g. Copying and verifying controller configuration

h. Downloads/uploads and copying of database including batch uploads and downloads

i. Assigning/modification of operators, operator profiles, and alarm filter and indication preferences

j. Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE ) or equivalent, of controller point values to third party software

3. Point display screens shall include diagnostic information such as; point description, value, units, point status, force status, and an operator entered note for each EMS point. The operator shall be able to sort the controllers list based on address, sort key, or name.

F. Global Function Manager

1. Global Function Manager shall be provided with the EMS software to allow operator(s) the ability to perform global functions, if allowed by their operator profile. When the operator selects the Global Function Manager, they shall be presented with the following global programs, to select from:

a. Timed Force W/Auto

b. Central Time Schedules

c. Point Transfer/Broadcast

2. Timed Force w/Auto

a. The proposed system shall allow the operator(s), if allowed by their operator profiles, to automatically “FORCE” and “AUTO” one or a group of points (any combination of different point types) based on a user specified time.

b. Each group shall include a dialog box that lists all of the applicable points (including name and location), group name, force and auto time, force level, and the value of the force. The system shall support at least 300 separate force groups, as a minimum. A Force group dialog box shall include buttons for new, modifying, or deleting points.

c. The system shall automatically log all success and failures in the System Activity report. If a force or AUTO command fails to be acknowledged ComfortWORKS shall initiate an alarm.

3. Global Occupancy: In addition to the stand-alone time scheduling capability specified for each system element, the systems shall provide the capability for a Global Occupancy Time

448


Schedule program. The master time schedules shall replace the local time schedules. The global time schedules shall be provided to allow the operator to quickly and easily override the master time schedules. The global occupancy schedules shall be automatically downloaded to the applicable system elements once a day or the operator may download at any time. Each master time schedule shall be linked to 366 override schedules (one for each day of the year), as required. If the master schedule determines that an override is required the master schedule will be overridden by the override schedule.

4. Central Point Transfer

a. The proposed system shall include the inherent capability to provide for the transfer of point values from one system element to another regardless if it is on a primary or secondary bus. When creating or modifying, the operator shall have the capability to select a SPEEDY ENTRY selection to speed and ease the task of configuration.

b. A point transfer dialog box shall display the read from and write to point names, addresses of the points, the frequency of the transfer, and the status of the last attempt.

G. Alarm Manager

1. The Alarm Manager allows, through the selection of an icon, operator access to system alarms associated with the signed on operator(s) profile. The proposed system shall include the capability to route alarms to specific EMS operators. Alarm filters shall be capable of routing alarms based on families (area, element, and level, including the use of wildcards) of alarms to be presented to each EMS operator. Each operator shall be assigned alarm filters on an area-by-area basis. The system shall also be capable of using alarm filters to route network alarms to a specific printer or printers. The alarm manager shall process all alerts and alarms automatically. The system shall support a minimum of eight levels of alerts and alarms.

2. When the operator has initiated the alarm manager by clicking its icon, the operator shall be presented with an alarm list window that shall allow the operator to easily perform such functions as sorting, printing, suppressing of alarms (timed), jumping to a Graphic/Plot, generating custom messages, exporting alarm files, acknowledging alarms, etc. Command icons shall be provided for the most commonly used operator commands. This includes exporting, printing, copying to clipboard, appending operator notes, exporting alarm files, acknowledging of alarms, deleting of alarms, etc. The Alarm manager shall also dynamically display how many alarms are in the alarm list and viewing buffer, and how the alarms are presently sorted.

3. Each alarm shall include the areas name, controller name, bus and element number, the alarm status and priority, time and date of occurrence, point name and explanatory text, plus a custom message. In addition to the alarm custom message, an operator entered/modified note shall be available for viewing, printed with the standard alarm message, or copied to the Windows Clipboard. The alarm note toolbar icon will change its characteristics, such that the operator can easily determine if a note was attached to an alarm. Each alarm shall also include command icons to provide the means of quickly jumping to a Graphic/Plot pertinent to the alarm condition, acknowledging alarms, viewing or appending operator notes, etc. The system shall be provided with the capability of providing a Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) or equivalent, of alarm information to third party software.

449


H. Alarm Notification

1. The proposed system shall be capable of assigning different alarm notification types. One type shall provide an audible tone or WAV file sound based on the type of computer speakers specified. A second type shall notify the operator by displaying a flashing alarm icon along with the level of the alarm (and audible beep). Another method shall be a pop-up window alarm display on top of the current window (and audible beep). The system shall also provide support for critical alarms. When a critical alarm occurs a full screen alarm pop-up window shall cover the existing window.

2. The operator shall have the capability of running third party software (e.g., Microsoft Excel, Word, etc.) and still receive alarm indication as described above.

I. . Reports

1. The Energy Management System shall include the inherent ability to store, view and print energy consumption data, runtime data, and trend analog or digital variables. These reports shall also include a summary of consumption and runtimes. Standard management reports shall be provided as well as the capability to provide custom reports. The operating system shall be multi-tasking such that the operator may select other programs to run in the operating system environment without losing report data. Reports shall be generated automatically or manually as selected by the operator. The daily, monthly, and yearly consumption report shall collect from either a digital or analog input point. The daily, monthly, and yearly runtime report shall allow digital inputs/outputs to be totaled to indicate the total runtime of a piece of equipment. The operator shall be able to reset the runtime total for each input. Trend data shall allow the operator to collect and display events for each digital or analog point. The proposed system shall provide a report panel window with icons for the operator to select from. The operator shall also be able to add an icon to initiate the execution of a custom report from a third party spreadsheet in addition to the supplied standard report icons.

2. Standard Windows type toolbars and dialog boxes shall be provided to ease the task of report definition. Dialog boxes shall also be provided to ease the task of report formatting and reports shall be displayed as they would be printed via a print preview command. The operator shall have the capability to change any value in the report or to hide any row or column in the report through standard Window type commands. The following additional reports shall be available through the File Menu’s Print command:

a. A list of all controllers in a selected area, including the controller’s name, address, and all tables

b. A listing of all configuration tables in a controller including its name, description, current value, high and low allowable entries, etc.

c. A snapshot of the currently displayed point status, maintenance, or configuration table window

d. A listing of Graphic/Plot characteristics

e. Tenant Billing report (if applicable)

450


f. Time Schedule report

3. The system shall also provide a download error report and a controller vs. database difference report upon operator request.

J. System Activity Report: The operator shall have the ability to easily create and generate operator activity reports. The report shall have the ability to monitor and log all system operator activities such as; operator login/off, operator forces, modifications to set point/time schedules, changes to controllers, areas, etc. DDE POKE commands and DLL interface changes to set points or time schedules shall be identified as a third party in the Systems Activity Report.

K. Graphic/Plot Display Manager

1. The Graphic/Plot Display Manager (GDM) shall allow the operator the ability to organize and view real time point data from multiple controllers all on one screen. The proposed system shall be supplied with standard and customized HVAC graphics as required. The following image formats shall be supported as a minimum; .BMP, .DIB, .GIF, .JPG, .PCX, .TIF, and .TGA.

2. The graphic package shall provide for multiple link areas, bookmarks, speed buttons and the ability to command point override values through Window Dialog boxes. The operator shall be able to change text colors and fonts, through standard Window Dialog boxes, for such things as point name, value, alarm, force, etc.

3. The GDM shall be capable of displaying multiple dynamic system graphics with point values, units, names, alarm status, configuration decisions, set points, etc., and also multiple point trends, all on one screen. The GDM shall allow the operator the ability to include and display DDE data from other applications. As point data changes the data to the DDE system or equivalent, shall also automatically update.

4. The GDM shall also be capable of interfacing to third party DDE “POKE” messages. Third party access to set points and time schedules shall be via Dynamic Link Library (DLL)

5. Each Trend shall include the capability for the operator to select pause, start, auto start on and a minimum sampling period of at least ten seconds.

6. The GDM shall include standard window menus, tool bars, dialog boxes, drop down lists, etc. The operator shall be able to force or auto point values and watch how the system responds dynamically, all on one screen. The graphics screens shall include the ability to be linked with other graphic screens and shall support animated data boxes. The system shall also include the capability to assign different initial graphics for each operator after logging in. If an operator selects a graphic that represents a remote-site, the sytem shall automatically connect to the remote site without any operator intervention.

L. Remote Access: The system shall include the capability to permit remote communications to multiple remote EMS sites through phone modems and vendor

451


specific software. When a remote EMS site is connected to the network, the operation of the EMS computer shall be unaffected. Alarms shall continue to be printed and logged to the database.

M. Log On/Off

1. After successfully logging in to the Multi-tasking operating system, the operator shall not be granted access into the EMS system until the selection of the EMS log-in icon is made, and the operator successfully enters the assigned login name and password. (The system shall have the ability to eliminate this second step, if desired by the operator). When the operator has successfully logged in to the EMS system, an EMS logout icon shall be displayed at the bottom of the screen. The system shall also provide the capability to assign each EMS operator an EMS start-up application (i.e., Alarm Manager, Reports, Network Manager, etc.). After logging on to the system this function shall automatically open up to the function defined on start-up. The system shall include the capability to automatically log out an operator after a user specified inactivity time.

2. The operator shall not need to be logged into the system for alarms to be annunciated or for automatic reports to be generated.

2.14 DATA COLLECTION

A. System shall support optional Data Collection module. The Data Collection option shall enable the operator to acquire three categories of historical data and store that data for access by the Energy Management PC.

B. The three categories of historical data shall be as follows:

1. Consumable Data: Information such as kilowatt hours, BTUs, gallons per minute, and so on, that are acquired in either analog or digital pulse form.

2. Runtime Data: Information on time and operation of equipment based on equipment status.

3. History Data: Trend log data on status of equipment or values such as an analog sensor.

C. History data collection shall be initiated from either a specified time function or an event.

452


D. Provide enough software capacity to accomplish the required data collection function for the total system as specified. The data collection process shall not require the Energy Management PC to be online. Additional option modules may be added at any time to meet increased system requirements. The operator shall be capable of configuring each additional module.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.

B. Notify the Owners Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)

A. Install hardware and software in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and configuration required to insure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences of operation and point schedules.

C. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.

D. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceways parallel to building lines (i.e., horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.

3.3 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS

A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 60 inches above floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on locations from Owner’s representative prior to installation.

B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures.

C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels.

D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermo wells suitable for respective application and for installation under other sections; sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow.

E. Smoke Detector:

1. Typical for Air Handling Units over 2,000 cfm, duct mounted smoke detector is 453


furnished and installed in the supply air duct, as indicated on drawing. Smoke detector shall be provided by Division 26, installed by Division 23. Power wired and connected to fire alarm system (where applicable) by Division 26. Interlock wired for unit shut down by Division 23. Upon detecting smoke in the Air duct, supply fan will stop.

3.4 INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING

A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed in a neat and professional manner in accordance with Specification Division 16 and all national, state and local electrical codes.

B. Provide wire and wiring techniques recommended by equipment manufacturers.

C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the Owner's representative prior to rough-in.

D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function.

E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated on the electrical drawings; coordinate with electrical contractor.

F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in raceways. All other wiring to be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner per local code requirements.

G. When a cable enters or exits a building, a surge suppressor must be installed. The surge suppressor shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

H. All sensor wiring shall be labeled to indicate the origination and destination of data.

3.5 FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start the control system under provisions of this section.

B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.

C. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring. As a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service for 1 year or as specified.

D. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to

454


maintaining the integrity of the operating system.

E. Provide the Owners Representative an in warranty maintenance proposal.

3.6 TRAINING

A. Provide training to the owner in the operation of systems and equipment.

B. Provide basic operator training for a minimum of 3 people on all functions of the Operator Interface unit.

C. Provide training, as required, for up to 40 hours as part of this contract.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Refer to section 23 00 00.

B. Provide a minimum of one onsite training class of 8 hours in length during the construction period for personnel designated by the Owners.

C. Provide two additional Training sessions at 6 and 12 months following building’s turnover. Each session shall be 8 hours in length and must be coordinated with the building owner’s Representative.

D. Train the designated staff of Owner’s Representative and Owners in a Day-to-day operation to enable them to.

Proficiently operate the system.

Understand control system architecture and configuration.

Understand DDC system components.

4.0 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

4.1 NETWORK OPERATIONS

A. Outdoor Air Temperature: Network operations shall include broadcast of outside air temperature to all other network elements from the GPEC/X Controller.

4.2 SPLIT SYSTEM UNIT

A. General: The Split system AC Units shall be directly controlled by Application Specific Controllers. The controller shall maintain the temperature at set point +/-1.5ºF. There shall be an adjustable dead band between heating and cooling set points.

B. Unit shall start/stop based on a time of day schedule. Override control (at room thermostat) shall allow override of schedule for 1 hour (adjustable) duration. A manual override input (through DDC software) will allow the operator to

455


manually override FC system operation. DDC system shall control unit modes: cooling only or heating only. On coil defrost mode, DDC system shall stage internal electric reheat coil to maintain room temperature set point.

4.3 PACKAGED UNIT CONTROLLERS (FIELD INSTALLED)

A. General: The Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units shall be directly controlled by Application Specific Controllers. The control shall be proportional plus integral to maintain the temperature at set point +/-1.5ºF. There shall be an adjustable dead band between heating and cooling set points.

B. Sequence of Operation:

1. Fan Control:

a. The indoor air fan shall be started and stopped based on an occupancy schedule, Unoccupied Free Cooling, IAQ Preoccupancy Purge, Temperature Compensated Start, Fire Shutdown, Unoccupied Heating or Cooling, Network Command, and Timed Override.

b. The start of an occupancy schedule shall be determined by either the local occupancy schedule, remote timed override, the temperature compensated start program, or if the remote start contact opens (refer to the sequence of operation or the input/output list for requirements).

c. If temperature compensated start is not selected the indoor fan shall start at the beginning of the scheduled occupancy.

d. The fan shall be stopped when the time schedule becomes unoccupied.

e. Timed override (0 to 4 hours) shall be initiated by the operator or by an occupant pushing the override button on the space sensor

f. During the unoccupied period, whenever the space temperature drops below the unoccupied heating set point or above the unoccupied cooling set point, the indoor air fan shall run until the space conditions have returned to the required unoccupied space temperature limits, at which time it will stop.

g. The indoor air fan shall be enabled during the unoccupied period when the unit is in the Unoccupied Free Cooling Mode to pre-cool the space prior to occupancy.

h. Fan control shall be field-modified to allow non-continuous fan operation as directed by the owner.

456


2. Unoccupied Free Cooling:

a. The controller shall start the indoor fan during unoccupied periods to pre-cool the structure mass by using only outside air for units with modulating economizer.

b. The Algorithm shall monitor the time of the scheduled occupancy, enthalpy status, outside air and space temperature, and the heat/cool set points to determine when to begin and end Unoccupied Free Cooling.

c. Once the algorithm determines that the space has been sufficiently cooled, the indoor air fan shall be disabled and the economizer shall close.

d. The algorithm shall include an operator adjustable, outside air, night-time lockout temperature set point that shall disable this algorithm if the outside-air temperature is below the operator adjustable value entered or if the algorithm determines that the enthalpy of the outside air is unsuitable.

e. The algorithm shall be disabled if the outside air or space sensor fails or if Temperature Compensated Start is active.

3. Heat Control:

a. If the indoor air fan is on, the controller shall monitor the space temperature and heating set point value with a PID control algorithm to determine if heating is required.

b. The algorithm shall calculate the required Supply Air temperature and determine the number of heat stages required (up to two separate stages) thus satisfying the calculated supply temperature.

c. Whenever heat is required and the heat stages presently enabled are different than the stage(s) commanded on, the algorithm shall add/remove the heat stages to match the calculated number of stages and order.

d. The algorithm shall include the ability to automatically compensate for additional cold outside air required by the ventilation algorithm through the enabling of its heat stages, when the outside-air temperature is below 55°F, if enabled by the operator.

e. The operator shall have the ability to lock out the heat whenever the outside-air temperature is above the operator entered set point.

f. If the space temperature sensor fails, an alarm shall be generated and the algorithm shall assume a default sub-master value to control to.

457


4. Cooling Control:

a. If the indoor air fan is on, the controller shall monitor the space temperature and the cooling set point value and with a PID control algorithm shall, determine if heating is required.

b. The algorithm shall determine the number of cool stages that are required to satisfy the calculated supply-air temperature.

c. The controller shall calculate the number of cooling stages based on the supply-air temperature deviation, the calculated supply air reference value, and the temperature drop per one stage of capacity.

d. Whenever the outside-air temperature is less than an operator’s adjustable low ambient lockout value, all stages of cooling shall be disabled (refer to the sequence of operation or the input/output list for requirements).

e. Cooling shall not be enabled whenever heat is active or if the supply-air temperature sensor fails.

f. This algorithm shall include compressor minimum on and minimum off time guards.

g. There shall be a minimum delay of three minutes after turning on the first compressor before the second compressor shall be allowed to start.

5. Economizer Control (As applicable):

a. The economizer shall be modulated to provide free cooling and/or air quality control.

b. During the Occupied mode if the indoor air fan is on, the economizer damper shall be modulated to maintain a preset, minimum damper position to maintain minimum ventilation requirements. c. The controller shall evaluate, based on outside-air temperature and enthalpy, if outside air is suitable as the first stage of cooling. If not, the damper shall stay at its minimum position unless the ventilation algorithm (including pre-purge) overrides it.

458


If the outside air conditions are suitable for free cooling, then the controller shall calculate a space temperature set point that is between the heating and cooling set points. This is done in an effort to minimize the need for mechanical heating or cooling when the Night Time Lockout Temperature (NTLO) is less than the outside-air temperature and the outside-air temperature is less than 68°F. When the outside-air temperature is less than or equal to the NTLO temperature the controller shall calculate a space temperature set point below the occupied cooling set point to minimize mechanical cooling.

If the outside air temperature is greater than or equal to 68°F, the controller shall calculate a space temperature set point above the heating set point to minimize mechanical heating.

The damper opening adjustment rate shall be automatically limited to help prevent the nuisance low temperature thermostat from tripping whenever the outside-air temperature is less than 45°F.

If the outside air enthalpy is high and the space, supply, or outside air sensors fail, then the economizer shall be positioned to its minimum damper position. The economizer shall be closed whenever the indoor air fan is not on.

During the unoccupied cycle, the controller shall close the economizer air damper unless the system has been indexed to Unoccupied Free Cooling or Indoor Air Quality purge.

The economizer control algorithm shall include a self tuning loop or shall include adjustable gains/multipliers which shall be automatically changed based on the outside-air temperature to compensate for different weather conditions.

Rooftop air conditioner economizers shall be provided with compatible Belimo 4-20 mA actuators for control by the ASC.

Where relief (exhaust) dampers are shown on the drawings, relief (exhaust) damper actuator shall be wired to open as outside air damper opens to maintain neutral building pressure.

Where power exhaust is specified, building pressure and power exhaust control sequence shall be by the power exhaust manufacturer.

459


m. Where economizer interlock with associated exhaust fan(s) is specified, economizer dampers shall be forced to open upon exhaust fan actuation through network software.

6. Temperature Compensated Start:

a. The controller shall include the software capabilities necessary to detain the morning start-up of applicable HVAC systems until the last possible moment and still allow the building space to reach occupant comfort levels according to the selected occupied time and set point schedules for that particular space.

b. The program shall utilize the thermal characteristics of the space along with the actual space temperature, outside-air temperature, and applicable set points.

c. If Unoccupied Free Cooling is active when temperature compensated start begins, and then Unoccupied Free Cooling shall be disabled.

7. Pre-Occupancy Purge:

a. The controller shall include the capability to operate the equipment prior to the occupied period in order to purge the conditioned space of airborne contaminants that may have built up during the unoccupied period when the equipment was off.

b. The algorithm shall include an adjustable user value to begin the purge for each occupied period. c. The algorithm shall compensate for different atmospheric conditions as follows: (1) When the atmospheric conditions are conducive (based on a comparison of the outside air temperature to an adjustable Night Time Lockout [NTLO] set point) to pre-cool the space, the economizer damper shall be opened 100% (operator adjustable) to provide both ventilation and space temperature tempering simultaneously.

(2) When atmospheric conditions pose a possible low temperature condition for the space (based on when the outside-air temperature is below an adjustable NTLO temperature), the economizer damper shall be positioned to a minimum position (operator adjustable).

(3) When the outside-air temperature is above the adjustable Night Time Lockout temperature but the enthalpy of the

460


outside air is high, the economizer damper shall be positioned to a different minimum position (operator adjustable).

8. Ventilation Control (As applicable):

a. The ventilation algorithm shall calculate a ventilation set point based on the differential between the outside air ventilation (CO2) sensor and the indoor air ventilation (CO2) sensor.

b. If an outside air ventilation sensor is not used (see I/O summary and or sequence of operation for the exact requirements) the algorithm shall default to an operator adjustable 400 ppm value. The algorithm shall then calculate a ventilation minimum position for the economizer based on the indoor-air sensor’s deviation from the calculated set point.

c. The controller shall be capable of both Proportional and PID ventilation calculations depending on the space configuration.

d. The operator shall have the ability to index the algorithm to a minimum ventilation position based on the comfort requirements for the conditioned space. If the space temperature is outside the range of the heating or cooling set point, the ventilation minimum position shall be overridden by the temperature control algorithm and the amount of outside air shall be reduced.

e. When the space temperature is within the range of the heating and cooling set points, the algorithm shall override the normal minimum damper position and override it to control to the ventilation minimum position calculated.

f. The controller shall include the capability to automatically position the economizer damper to its minimum ventilation position whenever the CO2 value outside is more than an adjustable entered set point value.

9. Filter Run Timer:

a. The controller shall include the capability to track its run time of the supply fan and to generate an alert to change the filter whenever the run time exceeds an operator adjustable hourly value programmed.

b. The operator shall have the ability to view or reset the timer.

10. Safeties:

461


a. Compressor Lockout: The controller shall monitor the unit’s compressor lock-out safety status. If a compressor is locked out, the controller shall generate an alarm and if only one compressor was on, it shall bring on the second compressor without waiting for the staging routine.

b. Fire Shutdown: The controller shall be capable of supporting a remote field-installed dry contact that closes when the unit is to go into a fire shutdown mode. When the contact closes, the controller shall generate an alarm and disable all heating and cooling, close the economizer and disable the indoor air fan. When the contact opens, the controller shall generate a return to normal, and the operation of the unit shall be as the time schedule and its associated algorithms dictate.

11. Diagnostic Test: The controller shall support a diagnostic test of all its outputs including the economizer and thermistors whenever the unit is indexed to field test. All outputs shall be disabled and checked, one at a time.

4.4 100% OUTSIDE AIR HEATING AND VENTILATION UNITS (Typical of 2)

A. General: The 100 % Outside Air Heating & Ventilation Units shall be directly controlled by Application Specific Controllers. The control shall be proportional plus integral to maintain the temperature at set point +/-1.5ºF.

B. Run Conditions -Scheduled: The unit shall run according to a user definable time schedule in the following modes:

1. Occupied Mode: The unit shall maintain space temperatures with following set points,

a. 68°F (adj.) heating set point

2. Unoccupied Mode (night setback): The system shall maintain space temperatures with following set points,

a. 55°F (adj.) heating set point.

C. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1. Low Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is less than the heating set point by a user definable amount of 3°F (adj.).

D. Zone Optimal Start: The unit shall use an optimal start algorithm for morning start-up. This algorithm shall minimize the unoccupied warm-up or cool-down period while still achieving comfort conditions by the start of scheduled occupied period. The unit shall start prior to scheduled occupancy based on the time necessary for the space to reach the occupied set point. The start time shall automatically adjust based on measured outside air temperature and space temperature.

462


E. Purge Cycle: One hour immediately prior to occupancy, the associated space shall be purged for one hour at the minimum code required ventilation rate of 0.15 cfm/sf of outside air (scheduled minimum outside air quantity). This purge shall be integrated with the warm up cycle.

F. Unit Unoccupied Override: A timed local override control shall allow an occupant to override the schedule and place the unit into an occupied mode for an adjustable period of time. At the expiration of this time, control of the unit shall automatically return to the schedule.

G. Supply Air Smoke Detection (If applicable): The unit shall shut down upon detection of smoke in the supply air.

H. Supply Fan: The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties or during unoccupied mode. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime.

I. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

a. Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.

b. Supply Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

c. Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded – Service Required: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.).

J. Unoccupied mode (Night setback): The system shall cycle on the fan and enable the heating staging until the unoccupied (night setback) space temperature set point is satisfied at which point the unit shall cycle off.

K. Gas Heating Stages: The controller shall measure the space temperature and stage the heating to maintain temperature set point. To prevent short cycling, there shall be a user definable (adj.) delay between stages, and each stage shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime.

1. The heating shall be enabled whenever:

a. Outside air temperature is less than 68°F (adj.)

b. AND the space temperature is below heating set point

c. AND the supply fan status is on.

463


L. Outside Air Damper: When in the occupied mode and in unoccupied warm-up or cool-down period, the controller shall open the outside air damper. When in the unoccupied mode, the controller shall close the outside air damper.

M. Filter Hours: The system shall monitor the fan runtime. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1. Pre-filter Change Required: Pre-filter has been in use for more than 2200 hrs (adj.).

N. Supply Air Temperature: The controller shall monitor the supply air temperature. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1 High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater than 120°F (adj.).

2 Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less than 45°F (adj.).

4.5 CONSTANT VOLUME HEATING AND VENTILATION UNITS (Typical of 1)

A. General: The constant volume Heating & Ventilation Units shall be directly controlled by Application Specific Controllers. The control shall be proportional plus integral to maintain the temperature at set point +/-1.5ºF. There shall be an adjustable dead band between heating and cooling set points.


1. Occupied Mode: The unit shall maintain space temperatures with following set points,

a. 72°F (adj.) cooling/ventilation set point

b. 68°F (adj.) heating set point

2. Unoccupied Mode (night setback): The unit shall maintain space temperatures with following set points,

a. 85°F (adj.) cooling set point.

b. 55°F (adj.) heating set point.


1 High Space Temp: If the temperature is greater than the cooling set point by a user definable amount of 3°F (adj.). 2 Low Space Temp: If the temperature is less than the heating set point by a user definable amount of 3°F (adj.).

464


D. Unit Optimal Start: The unit shall use an optimal start algorithm for morning start-up. This algorithm shall minimize the unoccupied warm-up or cool-down period while still achieving comfort conditions by the start of scheduled occupied period. The unit shall start prior to scheduled occupancy based on the time necessary for the space to reach the occupied set point. The start time shall automatically adjust based on measured outside air temperature and space temperature.



G. Supply Air Smoke Detection: The unit shall shut down upon detection of smoke in the supply air.



1 Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.

2 Supply Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

3 Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.).

J. Unoccupied mode (Night setback): The system shall cycle on the fan and enable the heating staging until the unoccupied space temperature set points are satisfied at which point the unit shall cycle off. In the unoccupied mode the outside air damper shall remain fully closed.

K. Gas Heating Stages: The system shall measure the space temperature and stage the heating to maintain temperature set point. To prevent short cycling, there shall be a user definable (adj.) delay between stages, and each stage shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime.


465


a. Outside air temperature is less than 68°F (adj.).

b. AND the zone temperature is below heating set point.


L. Economizer:

1. The economizer system shall be directly controlled by the space temperature sensor and integrated with the fan speed and heating staging. The system shall modulate the economizer dampers in sequence to maintain space temperature set point.

2. In the cooling mode the system shall modulate the outside air damper to full open, to a minimum of 50ºF adj. supply air temperature, before modulating the supply fan speed above minimum.

3. In the heating mode the outside air damper shall be at minimum before any heating stages are enabled. The fan speed shall be at minimum prior to staging on heating and shall be ramped up in sequence and proportional to the heating stages.

4. The outside air dampers shall maintain the scheduled minimum air quantity whenever occupied (work with the balancing contractor to determine the required damper position to obtain the design minimum outside air flow). The damper shall fully close in the unoccupied mode and when the fan is off. 5. The economizer shall be enabled whenever: a. The system is in the cooling mode.

b. AND the outside air temperature is less than the space temperature.

c. AND the supply fan status is on. 6. The economizer shall be in the minimum outside air position whenever the system is in the heating mode.

M. Minimum Outside Air Ventilation -Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Control: When in the occupied mode, the system shall measure the space CO2 levels and modulate the outside air dampers open on rising CO2 concentrations, overriding normal damper operation to maintain the CO2 set point of 400 ppm (adj.). When the CO2 concentrations are less than 400 ppm, the system shall modulate the outside air damper to maintain the scheduled minimum outside air quantity (work with the balancing contractor to determine the required damper position to obtain the design minimum outside air flow).

466


N. Space Pressurization – Space Differential Pressure Control: During occupied mode the system shall measure the space differential pressure (differential pressure between the space and reference). The system shall modulate the relief air motorized dampers (inside the relief air hoods on the roof) as necessary to maintain the set point of 0.05”wg (adj.). During unoccupied mode the relief air motorized dampers shall be closed.

O. Filter Hours: The system shall monitor the fan runtime. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1. Filter Change Required: Filter has been in use for more than 2200 hrs (adj.).

P. Supply Air Temperature: The system shall monitor the supply air temperature. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1 High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater than 120°F (adj.).

2 Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less than 45°F (adj.).

4.6 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME HEATING & VENTILATION UNITS (Typical of 4)

A. General: The variable air volume Heating & Ventilation Units shall be directly controlled by Application Specific Controllers. The control shall be proportional plus integral to maintain the temperature at set point +/-1.5ºF. There shall be an adjustable dead band between heating and cooling set points.


1. Occupied Mode: The system shall maintain space temperatures with following set points,

a. 72°F (adj.) cooling/ventilation set point

b. 68°F (adj.) heating set point

2. Unoccupied Mode (night setback): The system shall maintain space temperatures with following set points,

a. 85°F (adj.) cooling set point.

b. 55°F (adj.) heating set point.


467


1 High Space Temp: If the temperature is greater than the cooling set point by a user definable amount 3°F (adj.).

2 Low Space Temp: If the temperature is less than the heating set point by a user definable amount 3°F (adj.).

D. Unit Optimal Start: The unit shall use an optimal start algorithm for morning start-up. This algorithm shall minimize the unoccupied warm-up or cool-down period while still achieving comfort conditions by the start of scheduled occupied period. The unit shall start prior to scheduled occupancy based on the time necessary for the space to reach the occupied set point. The start time shall automatically adjust based on measured outside air temperature and space temperature.



G. Supply Air Smoke Detection: The unit shall shut down upon detection of smoke in the supply air.



1 Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.

2 Supply Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

3 Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded -Service Required: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.).

J. Occupied mode: The system shall modulate the fan speed via the Variable Frequency Drive as necessary to maintain the space temperature set points during heating and cooling mode. Provide minimum cooling (50% adj.) and minimum heating (60% adj.) fan speeds (See H&V Unit Fan Speed Control for Units with VFD, detail 2 on drawing M7.1). The fan speed shall be integrated with the economizer cycle and the heating stages.

468


K. Unoccupied mode (Night setback): The system shall cycle on the fan, maintain the fan speed via Variable Frequency Drive at minimum, and enable the heating staging until the unoccupied space temperature set points are satisfied at which point the unit shall cycle off. In the unoccupied mode the outside air damper shall remain fully closed.

L. Gas Heating Stages: The system shall measure the space temperature and stage the heating in sequence with the fan speed to maintain temperature set point (Refer detail 2 on drawing M7.1 for heating demand based on the space temperature). To prevent short cycling, there shall be a user definable (adj.) delay between stages, and each stage shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime.


a. Outside air temperature is less than 68°F (adj.).

b. AND the space temperature is below heating set point.


M. Economizer: The economizer system shall be directly controlled by the space temperature sensor and integrated with the fan speed and heating staging. The system shall modulate the economizer dampers in sequence to maintain space temperature set point.

In the cooling mode the system shall modulate the outside air damper to full open, to a minimum of 50ºF adj. supply air temperature, before modulating the supply fan speed above minimum.

In the heating mode the outside air damper shall be at minimum before any heating stages are enabled. The fan speed shall be at minimum prior to staging on heating and shall be ramped up in sequence and proportional to the heating stages.

The outside air dampers shall maintain the scheduled minimum air quantity whenever occupied (work with the balancing contractor to determine the required damper position to obtain the design minimum outside air flow). The damper shall fully close in the unoccupied mode and when the fan is off.

The economizer shall be enabled whenever:

1 The system is in the cooling mode

2 AND the outside air temperature is less than the space temperature.

3 AND the supply fan status is on.

469


The economizer shall be in the minimum outside air position whenever the system is in the heating mode.

N. Minimum Outside Air Ventilation -Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Control: When in the occupied mode, the system shall measure the space CO2 levels and modulate the outside air dampers open on rising CO2 concentrations, overriding normal damper operation to maintain the CO2 set point of 400 ppm (adj.). When the CO2 concentrations are less than 400 ppm, the system shall modulate the outside air damper to maintain the scheduled minimum outside air quantity (work with the balancing contractor to determine the required damper position to obtain the design minimum outside air flow).

O. Space Pressurization – Space Differential Pressure Control: During occupied mode the system shall measure the space differential pressure (differential pressure between the space and reference). The system shall modulate the relief air motorized dampers (inside the relief air hoods on the roof) as necessary to maintain the set point of 0.05”wg (adj.). During unoccupied mode the relief air motorized dampers shall be closed.

P. Filter Hours: The system shall monitor the fan runtime. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1. Filter Change Required: Filter has been in use for more than 2200 hrs (adj.).

Q. Supply Air Temperature: The system shall monitor the supply air temperature. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

R. High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater than 120°F (adj.).

S. Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less than 45°F (adj.).

4.7 EXHAUST FAN CONTROL

A. General: Exhaust fans specified as being interlocked with associated unit economizers shall be locally controlled but monitored for status which shall be input to the controller.

B. Sequence of Operation

1 Exhaust fans specified as controlled from BMS shall be started and stopped according to prescribed occupancy schedules.

470


2 Exhaust fans specified as being interlocked with associated unit economizers shall be controlled from local switching. When status indicates fan is in operation, associated air conditioner

economizer shall be set to 100% open position through network software.

471


SECTION 233113 -METAL DUCTS

1.0 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections 01330 Submittal Procedures.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2-to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:

1 Rectangular ducts and fittings.

2 Single-wall, round and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.

3 Double-wall, round and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.

4 Duct liner.


1 Division 23 Section 23 33 00 "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

2 Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.

472


3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation, and seismic restraints.

473


B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1 Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2 Other systems installed in same space as ducts.

3 Ceiling-and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices.

4 Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.


A. NFPA Compliance:

1 NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2 NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.

474


C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of shop drawings and calculations for duct support and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of California.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installation of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this project in material, design and extent.

D. All ductwork shall be cleaned and wiped down before delivery to job site. Ends of duct shall be sealed to prevent any dust and debris from getting in. Seals shall be removed after rigging into place for installation and downstream ends shall be kept sealed at all times. Upon attachment to diffuser and grille, provide visqueen over diffuser and grille.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2D finish for concealed ducts and No. 4 for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

475


E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.

1. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.

b. Johns Manville International, Inc.

c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.

d. Owens Corning.

2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

a. Thickness: Minimum 1 inch, or thicker where specifically noted in Contract Documents.

b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature for indoor use and 0.158 at 75 deg F mean temperature for outdoor use.

c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. (1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall.

(2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.

(3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.

476


B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Materials: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed sheet insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, except for density.

a. Thickness: Minimum 1 inch.

b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.24 at 75 deg F mean temperature for indoor use and 0.158 at 75 deg F mean temperature for outdoor use.

c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411.

d. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK:

A. Type I grease exhaust duct and supports must conform to California Mechanical Code section 507.

B. Sheetmetal: Steel or stainless Steel; Ducts for Type I hoods shall be minimum No. 16 manufacturer’s standard gauge (0.055 inch thick steel or 0.044 inch thick stainless steel).

C. Seams and Joints: Fully welded seams on exterior of duct using a gas torch or inert gas shielded electric arc and silicone copper welding rod. All of the welds shall be air and liquid tight and sheet metal surfaces free from warpage.

D. Slope duct minimum ¼ inch per linear foot toward hood or approved grease collection device. When horizontal ducts exceed 75 feet in length, the slope shall be not less than 1 inch per linear foot.

E. Access Doors: On sides of ducts; same material as duct; locations per Uniform Mechanical Code; hinged type, neoprene gasketed; steel flat bar reinforcing frame inside duct.

F. Hangers and access doors shall be suitable to obtain code compliance and the installation recommendations/requirements of the 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap. See Specification Section 230529.

2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

477


B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

壱 All attachments to building structure shall be made in accordance with the Structural Engineers requirements and weight limitations.

壱 Submit shop drawings and calculations for review and approval by Mechanical & Structural engineer before installation. 壱 B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. 壱 Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. 壱 Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. 壱 Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer. 壱 C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. 壱 D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 壱 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 壱 2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

478


A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1 Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class.

2 Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Nexus Inc.

c. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.

1. Manufacturers:


b. Lockformer.

479


1 Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.

2 Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.

2.8 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.

G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

1 Fan discharges.

2 Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

3 Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500 fpm or where indicated.

I. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

480


1. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

J. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.9 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

B. Round, Longitudinal-and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible."

C. Flat-Oval, Longitudinal-and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Fabricate ducts larger than 72 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

1. Manufacturers:

a. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

b. SEMCO Incorporated.

D. Duct Joints:

1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.

2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.

3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2. 4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances.

a. Manufacturers:

(1) Lindab Inc.

5. Flat-Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and one synthetic rubber gasket.

481


a. Manufacturers:

(1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.

(2) McGill AirFlow Corporation.

(3) SEMCO Incorporated.

E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.

F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.

G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Pleated elbows not allowed. Bend radius of die-formed and gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2-to plus 2-inch wg: a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.

c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.

d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch. 3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2-to 10-inch wg: a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.

c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.

d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch. 4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct.

5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.

6. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45-and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60,

482


and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

8. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.

9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch thick with 2-piece welded construction.

10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.

11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified above.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS

A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:

1 Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg.

2 Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 3-inch wg.

3 Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 3-inch wg.

4 Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 4-inch wg.

5 Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.

6 Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch wg.

483


B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:

1. Range Hood Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96.

a. Concealed: Galvanized steel sheet of at least 0.055 inch thickness.

b. Exposed: Type 304, stainless steel of at least 0.044 inch thickness with finish to match kitchen equipment and range hood.

c. Weld seams and joints.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.

C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.

J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire-and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

484


M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated combination fire/smoke dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23 Section 23 33 00 "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

O. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" and NUSIG.

P. Protect all ductwork and duct interiors shall be clean and free from foreign materials until building is enclosed. Refer sections 3.07 and 3.08 for duct cleaning requirements.

Q. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

3.3 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS, SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install ducts so that grease cannot become pocketed in any portion thereof, and the duct shall slope not less than 1/4 unit vertical in 12 unit horizontal (2% slope) toward the hood or toward an approved grease reservoir. Where horizontal ducts exceed 75 feet in length the slope shall not be less than 1 unit vertical in 12 unit horizontal (8.3% slope).

B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues unless traps have continuous or automatic residue removal.

C. Install access openings at each change in direction and at 12 feet intervals as defined by NFPA 96; locate on sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of same material as duct.

D. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as permitted by applicable building codes.

485


3.4 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.

1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.5 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS

A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing.

B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.

壱 Create other openings to comply with duct standards.

壱 Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

壱 Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process. 壱 C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. 壱 D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 壱 Air outlets and inlets registers, grilles, and diffusers.

壱 Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums, except ceiling supply and return plenums, scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

壱 Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

486


壱 Coils and related components.

壱 Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.

壱 Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

壱 All ductwork shall be cleaned and wiped down before delivery to job site. Ends of duct shall be sealed to prevent any dust and debris from getting in. Seals shall be removed after rigging into place for installation and down stream ends shall be kept sealed at all times. Upon attachment to diffuser grille, provide visqueen over diffuser and grille. 壱 E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 壱 Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

壱 Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

壱 Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

壱 Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet.

壱 Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 壱 F. Cleanliness Verification: 壱 Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 壱 Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts. 壱

487


壱 3.8 CLEANING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. Use existing service openings where possible.

1 Create other openings to comply with duct standards.

2 Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3 Reseal rigid fiberglass duct systems according to NAIMA recommended practices.

4 Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.

B. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and restore to their marked position on completion.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1 When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size or larger particles.

2 When venting vacuuming system to the outside, use filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1 Air outlets and inlets registers, grilles, and diffusers.

2 Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3 Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4 Coils and related components.

5 Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.

6 Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7 Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

8 All ductwork shall be cleaned and wiped down before delivery to job site. Ends of duct shall be sealed to prevent any dust and debris from getting in. Seals shall be removed after rigging into place for installation and down stream ends shall be kept sealed at all times. Upon attachment to diffuser grille, provide visqueen over diffuser and grille.

488


E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1 Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2 Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3 Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4 Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5 Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures.

6 Biocidal Agents and Coating. Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present. Apply biocidal agents according to manufacturer’s written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

1 Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment, including biocidal agents and protective coatings.

2 Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.

3 Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.

G. Gravimetric Analysis: At discretion and expense of Owner, sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, may be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA vacuum test gravimetric analysis.

1 If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels, system shall have passed cleanliness verification.

2 If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness verification will have failed and metal duct system shall be recleaned and re-verified.

H. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning must restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on thorough visual inspection.

END OF SECTION

489


SECTION 233300 -DUCT ACCESSORIES 1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers.

2. Volume dampers.

3. Motorized control dampers.

4. Fire dampers.

5. Ceiling fire dampers.

6. Smoke dampers.

7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.

8. Duct silencers.

9. Turning vanes.

10. Duct-mounting access doors.


12. Flexible ducts.

13. Duct accessory hardware.


1 Division 28 Sections "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.

2 Division 23 Section "23 09 00 – Automatic Temperature Controls" for electric and pneumatic damper actuators.

490


1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Backdraft dampers.

2. Volume dampers.

3. Motorized control dampers.

4. Fire dampers.

5. Ceiling fire dampers.

6. Smoke dampers.

7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.

8. Duct silencers.

9. Turning vanes.

10. Duct-mounting access doors.


12. Flexible ducts.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1 Special fittings.

2 Manual-volume damper installations.

3 Motorized-control damper installations.

4 Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire-and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.

5 Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories.

491



A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 (Z180) or G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

492


G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1 Air Balance, Inc.

2 American Warming and Ventilating.

3 Duro Dyne Corp.

4 Greenheck.

5 Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.

6 Prefco Products, Inc.

7 Ruskin Company.

B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, counter-balanced dampers where noted in Contract Documents, with center-pivoted blades of maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

C. Frame: 0.125-inch thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.

D. Blades: 0.070-inch thick, extruded aluminum.

E. Blade Seals: Vinyl.

F. Blade Axles: Nonferrous or Galvanized steel.

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1 Air Balance, Inc. 2 American Warming and Ventilating. 3 Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 4 McGill AirFlow Corporation. 5 Nailor Industries Inc. 6 Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.

7 Ruskin Company.

493


B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple or single-blade, opposed-blade design for multiple blades, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

1 Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.

2 Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or nonferrous.

3 Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or Molded synthetic.

4 Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple or single-blade, opposed-blade design for multiple blades, low-leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

1 Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.

2 Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or Nonferrous.

3 Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze, molded synthetic or stainless-steel sleeve thrust or ball.

4 Blade Seals: Vinyl.

5 Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel or aluminum.

6 Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

494


E. Jackshaft: 1-inch diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

F. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32inch thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1 Air Balance, Inc.

2 American Warming and Ventilating.

3 Duro Dyne Corp.

4 Greenheck.

5 McGill AirFlow Corporation.

6 Nailor Industries Inc.


8 Ruskin Company.

B. General Description: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; minimum of 0.125inch thick, extruded aluminum hat channel frames with holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.070-inch thick, airfoil shape extruded aluminum damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zincplated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

3. Provide opposed-blade design with replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

495


2.6 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1 Air Balance, Inc.

2 Greenheck.





7 Ruskin Company.

B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours as required for opening conditions.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory galvanized sheet steel.

1 Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick of length to suit application.

2 Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

H. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

496


2.7 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1 Air Balance, Inc.

2 Greenheck.




6 Pottorff Company, Inc.


8 Ruskin Company.

B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor-and roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours as required for opening conditions.

D. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.

E. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.

F. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

2.8 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch wide, double-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Manufacturers:


b. Duro Dyne Corp.

c. METALAIRE, Inc.

d. Ward Industries, Inc.

497


C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.9 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating.

b. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

d. Greenheck.

e. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

f. Nailor Industries Inc.

g. Ventfabrics, Inc.

h. Ward Industries, Inc.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows: a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.

b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.

d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.

C. Pressure Relief Access Door: Double wall and duct mounting; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated, latches, and retaining chain.

498


1. Manufacturers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating.

b. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

c. Greenheck.

d. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

E. Insulation: 1-inch thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1 Duro Dyne Corp.

2 Ventfabrics, Inc.

3 Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1 Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2 Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3 Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.




499


F. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.




G. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating.




2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1 Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2 Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

3 Hart & Cooley, Inc.


5 Flexible Technologies, Automation Industries, Inc.

B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. Meet NFPA Standards 90A and 90B.

1 Pressure Rating: 6 inch wg positive and 1.0 inch wg negative.

2 Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3 Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.

4 Thermal Conductance: 0.23 BTU/hr/sq. ft./deg F.

5 Acoustical Performance per Air Diffusion Council Performance Standards and the ASTM-C518.

500


OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQ. DUCT DIAMETER VERSUS INSERTION LOSS (IL) IN DECIBELS

C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 20 inches to suit duct size.

2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.

501

Hz 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 14” 16” 20” 63 25 25 20 15 15 16 25 25

125 42 42 33 28 28 27 25 25 250 40 40 32 30 28 26 24 20 500 37 37 31 29 26 24 21 19

1000 33 38 32 29 27 26 28 24 2000 38 38 33 38 36 34 30 22 4000 35 33 37 22 18 14 14 9


F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

H. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts. For silencers before and after elbows, install silencer baffles parallel to the plane of the elbow.

I. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows:

1 On both sides of duct coils.

2 On both sides of air measuring stations.

3 Downstream from volume dampers and equipment.

4 Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.

5 To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot spacing.

6 On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.

J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1 One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2 Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3 Head and Hand Access: 18 by 14 inches.

4 Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5 Body Access: 25 by 16 inches.

6 Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 25 inches.

K. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1 One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.

2 Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.

3 Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter.

4 Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter.

5 Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.

502


L. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors:

1 One-Hand or Inspection Access: 5 inches in diameter.

2 Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.

3 Head and Hand Access: 13 inches in diameter.

4 Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches in diameter.

M. Label access doors according to Division 23 05 53 Section "Mechanical Identification." Access to fired and fire smoke dampers shall be permanently labeled with letters not less than ½ inch in height reading “Smoke Damper” or “Fire Damper” per UMC.

N. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

P. Connect terminal units and VAV boxes to supply ducts with minimum 36 inches of straight duct.

Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low-pressure ducts with maximum 72inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with sheet metal collars secured with screws and UL 181 FX tape.

S. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. Provide plugs for all test hole locations.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

END OF SECTION

503


SECTION 233423 -POWER VENTILATORS 1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1 Utility set fans.

2 Centrifugal roof ventilators.

3 Axial roof ventilators.

4 Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans.

5 Centrifugal wall ventilators.

6 Ceiling-mounting ventilators.

7 In-line centrifugal fans.

8 Propeller fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1 Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2 Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3 Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4 Material gages and finishes, including color charts.

5 Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 504


505


B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1 Structural analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of California.

2 Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

3 Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

4 Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show roof penetration requirements and reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating roof penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the following:

1 Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

2 Ceiling suspension assembly members.

3 Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4 Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

D. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

506



D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Belts: One (1) set for each belt-driven unit.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Utility Set Fans:

a. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Company

b. Cook, Loren Company.

c. Greenheck Fan Corp.

d. New York Blower Company (The).

f. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.

g. Trane Co.

2. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:

507


a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.

b. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.

c. Breidert Air Products, Inc.

d. Cook, Loren Company.

e. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.

f. NuTone

g. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.

3. Ceiling-Mounting Ventilators:

a. Breidert Air Products, Inc.

b. Cook, Loren Company.

c. Greenheck Fan Corp.

d. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.

B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow drains.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:

1 Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

2 Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

3 Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

4 Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

508



E. Accessories:

1 Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

2 Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.

2.3 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS

A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line applications.

B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.

D. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.

E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

F. Accessories:

1 Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.

2 Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, and premium efficiency.

B. Enclosure Type: Open drip proof.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

509


3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 2 inches for utility type fans and static deflection of 1 inch for ceiling mounted and inline centrifugal fans. Vibration and seismic control devices are specified in Division 23 05 33 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to structure.

C. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.

D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 05 33 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

E. In seismic zones, restrain support units.

F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

G. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 05 53 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 33 00 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Equipment Startup Checks:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

510



1 Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connection to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

2 Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

3 Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

4 Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

5 Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

6 Disable automatic temperature-control operators.

B. Starting Procedures:

1 Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.

2 Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.

511


3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.

B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section “Mechanical General Requirements”.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilators.

1 Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.

2 Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

3 Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

4 Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION

512


SECTION 233713 -DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling-and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.


1 Division 8 Section 08 91 00 "Louvers" for fixed louvers, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2 Division 23 Section 23 33 00 "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

3 Division 23 Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1 Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.

2 Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.

513


233713 -DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

514



1 Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

2 Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in ceilings and walls.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.


A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements and Substitutions."

B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

1. All diffusers and grilles shall be selected for maximum NC 30. NC valve shall be based on Octave Bank 2-7 sound power levels minus a room absorption of 5 db.

515


3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION

516


SECTION -FACILITY FUEL PIPING

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within and outside the building.


A. Gas System Pressures: 0.25 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models.

B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other Work.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties and accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code."

B. FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if specified to be FM approved.

C. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A. Certified Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed.

D. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if specified to be UL listed.

517



A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from end of one day to beginning of next day.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1 Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2 Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Construction Manager's written permission.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Appliance Connector Valves:


b. Jomar International, Ltd.

c. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.


2. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

a. Jomar International, Ltd.

b. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.

c. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.


3. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

518


a. Flow Control Equipment, Inc.

b. Nordstrom Valves, Inc.

c. Olson Technologies, Inc.; Homestead Valve Div.

d. Walworth Co.

4. FM-Listed Earthquake Valves:

a. Quakemaster Seismic Safety Systems.


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black.

1 Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2 Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

3 Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

4 Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.

5 Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

6 Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

7 Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

8 Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.

B. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.

519


C. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joining materials not in this Section.

2.4 PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in corrosive atmosphere.

2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy, AGA listed.

2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.

B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

C. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig (13.8-kPa) minimum pressure rating.

D. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig (860-kPa) pressure rating.

Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

E. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated plug valves, with 125-psig (860-kPa) pressure rating.

Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

F. Earthquake Valves: FM approved, listed in IAS Directory as complying with ANSI Z21.70 and UL listed. Include mechanical operator.

2.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Description: Precast, reinforced concrete base, made of 3000-psi-(20-MPa-) minimum, 28-day compressive strength concrete, and measuring 4 inches (100 mm) thick and 4 inches (100 mm) larger in each dimension than supported item, unless otherwise indicated.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of

520


piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section.

B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph.

3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Extend fuel gas piping and connect to fuel gas distribution for service entrance to building.

1. Exterior fuel gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and service meter will be provided by gas utility.

B. Install dielectric fitting downstream from and adjacent to each service meter unless meter is supported from service-meter bar with integral dielectric fitting. Install shutoff valve downstream from and adjacent to dielectric fitting. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric fittings.

3.3 CONCRETE BASE INSTALLATION

A. Locate bases at service meters and service regulators.

B. Excavate earth and make level beds to support bases. Set bases level with top surface projecting approximately 3 inches above grade.


A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fuel Gas Piping, 0.5 psig or Less: Use the following:

1 NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

2 NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

3 NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

4 NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

5 NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

6 NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

7 Larger Than NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

521


C. Underground Fuel Gas Piping: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. Encase in containment conduit.

D. Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop.

B. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.

C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve.

D. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.

E. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve.


A. Refer to Division 23 Section 23 05 00 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements.

B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap.

1 Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings.

2 In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.

D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

522


E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.

F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

I. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections.

J. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.

K. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight conduits extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC-Paint 16.


A. Refer to Division 23 Section 23 05 00 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.


A. Refer to Division 23 Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

523


B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1 NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

2 NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

3 NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

4 NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

5 NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.

3.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each service meter, pressure regulator, and specialty valve.

1 Text: In addition to name of identified unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

2 Refer to Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification" for nameplates and signs.

3.11 PAINTING

A. Use materials and procedures in Division 9.

B. Paint exterior piping, service meters, pressure regulators, and specialty valves.

1. Color: Gray.


A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

524


B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and specialties.

E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.

F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.

3.13 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices.

END OF SECTION

525


SECTION 238119 -CLASSROOM HEAT PUMP UNIT 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Description: Work specified in this Section includes heat pump systems including refrigerant piping and control systems.


A. Codes and Regulations:

Heat pumps shall conform to requirements of ARI Standards 210/240 and UL 599; capacities not less than that shown, for heating and cooling. Units shall be used in combinations approved under approval lists of ARI.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Electrical Wiring: All wiring shall confirm to requirements of the California Electrical Codes and the local city ordinance. Units shall be ETL or UL listed and labeled.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of electrical, piping, ductwork and temperature control interfacing for Airedale Heat Pump units. Contractor to ensure that Airedale (Heat Pump Manufacturer) shall be responsible for providing Carrier web access enabled CCN controls by Echo Mechanical Services. Airedale shall be responsible to coordinate with Echo Mechanical Services (Controls contractor, Phone Number (415) 710-1017) for providing factory mounted Microprocessor Controller / Thermostat / Sensors etc. on the Heat Pump unit. Wiring and testing of the controls shall be by the Heat Pump manufacturer. The controller shall perform all temperature control and monitoring of the unit as described below and shall interface with the existing Energy Management System. No other controllers shall be acceptable.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Heat Pump unit shall be Manufactured by AIREDALE, OR Approved Equal.

B. The supplied product shall be a self-contained air conditioning unit available as a DX cooling only or a heat pump unit ventilator with options for electric heating . The unit shall be floor-mounted and vertically sized to allow the supply air to be ducted or supplied through a high level plenum. All access and maintenance shall be through

526


the front of the unit. The unit shall fit cleanly against the outside wall with all components contained within the cabinet, the use of side trim strips to conceal exposed condenser fans is not allowed. The unit shall be engineered to provide one stage of free cooling and three stages of mechanical cooling. Heat pump units shall also offer two stages of mechanical heating with automatic defrost control.

C. The unit shall meet the DOE 13 SEER minimum standard for central air conditioning and heat pump units.

D. The manufacturer shall furnish independently tested sound data so as to demonstrate a maximum sound level of 45 dba for all units measured 5 feet from the front of the unit when operating with full cooling capacity

E. The unit shall be constructed in accordance with ETL & CSA standards, and a label shall be affixed to the unit listing the product code under which it is registered.

F. The unit shall be a product of ISO:9001 quality control program and be fully assembled and tested prior to shipment.

2.2 CABINET

A. The cabinet shall be constructed from galvanized sheet steel. After assembly the cabinet shall be degreased and coated with a dry powder, epoxy resin paint, baked after application, standard color shall be hammertone beige (CODE: Cardinal T013-BG38). The paint finish shall be easily cleanable and hard wearing to give maximum protection. The cabinet shall be insulated with acoustic foam insulation containing no fibrous materials. The foam insulation shall have a fire rating of UL94HF-1.

B. The front of the door shall be clear of grilles or louvers so as to allow the option of being used as a “Classroom Bulletin Board”. Return air shall enter through grilles in the side and base of the door. The door shall open in such a way as to allow the unit to be placed in the corner of the classroom without impeding airflow.The doors shall be hinged with a spring-loaded pin to allow for easy removal if required. Doors shall be secured with a key lock. Maximum dimensions for the 4 and 5 ton models will be 48” wide x 34” deep x 90” high including the door. Maximum dimensions for the 2 and 3 ton models shall be 42” wide x 34” deep x 90” high including the door. Outside air and exhaust air locations shall be at minimum of 38” above the finished floor. Access to all components of the unit shall be thru the front of the unit. Side access shall not be acceptable. Multiple panel removal to access components shall not be acceptable. Sub assemblies shall slide out the front if needed for service.

C. The rear of the unit shall allow for high sill outside air discharge (up to 38”). A condensate connection stub shall also be provided internally at the rear/side of the unit for connection to the field installed building condensate drain.

527



2.3 COMPRESSOR

A. The refrigeration system shall contain a two stage hermetic scroll compressor equipped with a crankcase heater to guard against liquid floodback conditions and the elimination of oil foaming upon start up. The compressor shall contain an internal unloading mechanism, providing capacity control and enabling part load efficiencies to be increased. An internal overload protector shall protect the compressor against excessive motor temperatures and currents. The compressor shall also be mounted on 125 # all neoprene vibration absorbers for quiet operation.

2.4 REFRIGERATION – HEAT PUMP

A. Heat pump systems shall utilize HCFC-R410A and shall be fitted with two expansion devices, each with a check valve assembly to prevent short cycling of refrigerant during the heat pump operation and a reversing valve to enable the unit to operate in both cooling and heat pump mode. A factory set defrost switch shall be fitted to allow defrosting of the outside coil when in heat pump mode. Factory set high and low-pressure switches shall be fitted; manual reset high pressure cutout and automatic reset low-pressure cutout. A sight glass and filter drier shall also be included for system observation.

2.5 COILS

A. The unit shall contain an enhanced, high efficiency, cross-rifle tubed condenser coil. The unit shall also contain a quick draining, hydrophilic fin, evaporator coil. Both coils shall be ideally positioned for optimal airflow and heat transfer, and fitted to non-corrosive drain trays.

2.6 FANS AND FAN MOTOR

A. The indoor fan assembly shall consist of two blowers and one common shafted electronically commutated motor (ECM). The ECM motor shall have a wide range of programmable speed and torque characteristics for ultra high efficiency and low audible noise. The ECM motor shall also be fully programmed to compensate for a wide variety of static pressures as well as lack of maintenance (dirty air filters). The unit will be capable or running in multiple operating modes including full capacity air volume and ventilation mode (70 %) air volume. The outdoor fan assembly shall consist of two backward curved plug fans with centrifugal blower wheels.

2.7 FILTER

A. Each unit shall be fitted with 2” thick pleated disposable synthetic filters designed to meet ASHRAE standard 52-76, 90% arrestance. The filter shall be treated with a durable, low toxicity, broad-spectrum antimicrobial that inhibits the growth of bacteria and fungi on the filter surfaces. The filter shall be of a standard size.

528


2.8 ECONOMIZER

A. Each unit shall be fitted with a spring return modulating damper that acts to mix the outdoor air with the return air. The damper shall have the capability of permitting only the outside air into the space, or recycling the return air and allowing only a minimum of outside air to enter the space. Full modulation allowing any mixture of outside air and return air shall be possible. A minimum damper position setting shall also be possible to continuously maintain outside air ventilation requirements dependent on control via the unit’s microprocessor controller. The damper actuator shall be mounted directly on the damper operating shaft with no linkages.

2.9 CONTROL PANEL

A. Located at the top of the unit behind the front door(s), the control panel shall contain a 24-volt control circuit transformer and all necessary contactors, relays and circuit breakers to provide the necessary control. The use of cartridge fuses for sub circuit protection shall not be permitted. All components located in the panel shall be clearly marked for easy identification. All terminal blocks and wires shall be individually numbered. All electrical wires in the control panel shall be run in an enclosed trough. Wiring outside the control panel shall be run in a protective sleeve.

2.10 POWERED EXHAUST

A. Powered exhaust shall be integral to the unit to prevent over pressurization of the space with the exhaust fan capable of exhausting 100% of room air.

2.11 POWERED LEAD EXTENSION

A. The unit shall be complete with a 3ft power lead extension for single point field connection to customer supplied junction box.

2.12 CONTROLS

A. The unit shall be fitted with a programmable Carrier microprocessor controller mounted outside the air stream and specifically designed to operate the unit in an energy efficient manner using pre-engineered control strategies. The microprocessor shall determine mode of operation based on the return air, supply air, and ambient air temperatures. The microprocessor controller shall be capable of managing the unit in each of the following modes of operation:

1. Free Cooling 2. Stage One Mechanical Cooling: 67% capacity compressor, low speed supply fan Santa Clara County Office of Education HVAC and Roofing for Gateway School 3. Stage Two Mechanical Cooling: 100% capacity compressor, low speed supply fan

4. Stage Three Mechanical Cooling: 100% capacity compressor, high speed supply fan

529


2.13 ADDITIONAL MODES OF OPERATION FOR HEAT PUMP UNITS:

A. Stage One Heating: 67% capacity compressor, low speed supply fan

B. Stage Two Heating: 100% capacity compressor, high speed supply fan

C. The microprocessor controller shall also modify the minimum damper position to compensate for mode of operation and fan speed.

D. Airedale shall provide all necessary controls, the microprocessor controller and associated controller hardware required to interface the units with the existing Energy Management System installed by the Owners. Airedale shall coordinate with the existing Energy Management System provider for the necessary Strategy, wiring diagrams, microprocessor and sensors and all these controls shall be factory installed and tested.

2.14 THERMOSTAT

A. A Carrier Digital Temperature Sensor and set point adjustment module with override button shall be provided for each unit and shall be located and mounted as indicated on Contract drawings.

2.15 DISCONNECT SWITCH

A. The unit shall be fitted with a power disconnect switch located on the control panel, sized for the full load amperage of the unit to enable the unit to be disconnected from the power supply prior to any maintenance. In the off position the switch can be locked out.

2.16 ELECTRIC HEATING

A. The unit shall be fitted with electric resistance heating elements downstream of the DX coil. The elements shall be controlled by the unit’s operating system. Both a manual thermal protection switch and an automatic thermal protection switch shall be installed.

2.17 OUTDOOR COIL FILTER

A. A wire framed synthetic filter shall be fitted across the inlet of the outdoor coils. This shall be reusable and may be vacuum cleaned.

530


2.18 OUTDOOR LOUVER

A. For standard installations, an outdoor louver with bird screen shall be furnished by Airedale and be suitable for masonry, glass, or panel wall construction. The louvers shall be Aluminum with anodized finish as selected by architect and may be flanged or recessed style.

2.19 WALL SLEEVE

A. The adjustable wall sleeve shall be constructed from galvanized steel sheet metal. An interior separator plate running the entire length of the sleeve shall separate the fresh air inlet from the exhaust air. The sleeve shall be provided and insulated by the installing contractor with foil back insulation. Provide custom wall sleeves of required length to meet project requirements where required.

2.20 ACOUSTICAL PLENUM

A. Provide acoustical plenum as shown on the plans by unit manufacturer painted to match unit. Provide filler plates for area above rear extension painted to match unit.

2.21 FACTORY START-UP & TRAINING

A. Airedale shall provide start-up and customer training for the supplied equipment. Start-up will be coordinated with the local representative. Provide one year on site labor warranty. Provide 4 hours of owner training. Contractor shall coordinate with Airedale Representative for the start up of the class room units. Manufacturers shall have factory employed field service engineers living within 50 miles of the site as a requirement to bid. Contracted out field service is not acceptable. Provide one set of spare filters of each type. Provide two (2) professionally produced Digital Video Discs (DVDs) that cover service and maintance of the unit.

B. Contractor shall provide and replace all filters in each Airedale unit at the substantial completion of the project.

2.22 DUCT FLANGE

A. Provide discharge duct flange for unit where shown on plans

2.23 CONDENSATE PUMP

A. Provide factory installed & wired condensate pump for all units. Condensate pump shall only operate in the defrost mode. Provide option for the condensate connection to be on the back or either side up to 36” above the finished floor. Provide separate overflow sensor that will shut the compressor off and alarm over the EMS if the condensate reaches high level.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 UNIT OPERATION

531


A. The microprocessor controller shall be designed to provide the control information necessary to operate the unit in an energy efficient manner.

B. DX Cooling (Occupied Cycle): If the outdoor air temperature is higher than the room temperature and the return air rises above the cooling set point, the controller will select DX cooling. When the return air drops to just below the cooling set point, the compressor and outdoor fan cutout to leave the supply fan recirculating room air. The fresh air damper remains in the minimum ventilation position, which is adjustable.

C. Free Cooling (Occupied Cycle Only): When the outside ambient temperature is low enough to satisfy the cooling load in the room, the fresh air damper will be in the fully open position, using full fresh air to cool the room. A low limit sensor for the room supply air temperature is set at 45 degree F but can be adjusted. The exhaust fan will be running to provide powered exhaust.

D. Free Cooling and DX Cooling: The return air temperature sensor will call for free cooling when the temperature of the outside is below the return air temperature. The microprocessor will then command the fresh air damper to open and modulate to satisfy the cooling load in the room. Until the external ambient drops low enough, the fresh air may not be capable of satisfying the cooling requirement for the room and DX cooling may also be required on an intermittent basis. When the ambient is low enough and free cooling can totally satisfy the cooling requirement of the room the damper will modulate to maintain the design room set point with just the supply fan and exhaust fan operating.

E. Heating (Occupied Cycle): When the return air temperature drops below the heating set point the microprocessor will select the first stage of DX heating. When room conditions are satisfied the heat pump and/or electric heating cuts out to leave the indoor fan recirculating the room air. The damper remains in the minimum ventilation position.

F. Defrost Cycle: While operating in the Heat Pump Heating Cycle it may prove necessary for the unit to revert to cooling in order to prevent ice build-up on the outdoor coil. This operation will occur during periods of low outdoor air temperature. Ice formation on the outdoor coil is identified automatically by a sensor set into the coil, which alerts the microprocessor of ice build-up. Defrost initiation is built into the microprocessor logic which as required energizes the reversing valve, stops the outdoor fan and the hot discharge gas melts the ice on the outdoor coil. During this period the room supply air is warmed by the electric heaters. The defrost cycle is terminated by the microprocessor when the outdoor coil is completely free of ice and de-energizes the reversing valve, starts the outdoor fan and the units go back into the heat pump heating mode.

532


G. Set Back (Unoccupied Cycle Only): During the unoccupied cycle (as governed by the time clock) the unit drops into a relaxed or set back condition. Normal room conditions are not maintained and the unit cools to a temperature above the cooling set point or heats to a temperature below the heating set point.

H. Control Diagrams: Diagram of wiring system and instruments shall be prepared by the manufacturer. Coordinate all Sections with functions specified for heat pumps and temperature control. Submit to Architect for approval; include in Maintenance Manuals.

I. Notations: At all instruments, state their use, typewritten; at thermostats, the proper setting; on instruments in finished spaces, inside the case; in other areas, attached to duct, column, wall, etc., adjacent to instrument, with clear plastic cover.

J. Shutdown: Where heat pump fan motor for indoor unit is shut off, outside air damper shall close and all heaters shall be de-energized.

K. The heat pump shall be factory tested and inspected after receiving the refrigerant charge in final assembly. Such testing and inspection shall serve to ensure proper construction including the sealed refrigerant system, control function, and general operation of heat pump.

3.2 START – UP PROCEDURE

A. The unit manufacturer is responsible to provide start-up for units and to complete the start-up certificate form for each unit.

END OF SECTION

533


SECTION 260000 -ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division I -General Requirements, and the drawings. The Contractor, shall read the conditions and be responsible for, and governed by, all requirements thereunder. This Condition applies to all Sections of Specification Division 26.

1.2 REGULATIONS

A. The Contractor shall give required notices to the building inspectors, the Engineer and the Owner and comply with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to the work and safety. Authorities include, but are not limited to:

1 The latest revision of the State of California Electrical Code. 2 The applicable Rules and Regulations of the National Fire Protection Association. 3 State Fire Marshal. 4 Underwriters Laboratories. 5 Any other applicable Federal, State, County or City Codes or Regulations, including O.S.H.A.

B. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to the above Regulations and Codes.

1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of equipment and wiring. Exact requirements shall be governed by architectural, structural and mechanical conditions of the job. Consult other drawings in preparation of the bid.

B. Extra lengths of wiring or pull boxes or junction boxes, etc., necessitated by conditions shall be included in the bid. Report any apparent discrepancies before submitting bid.

C. Right is reserved by the Owner to make changes of up to ten feet in location of any outlet or equipment prior to roughing-in without increasing contract cost.

1.4 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. The Contractor shall examine the site and the existing conditions and make allowances for them in preparing his proposal. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditions and the Drawings, the Contractor shall report such discrepancies prior to bid

534


and bid the conditions necessary to complete the job and to provide a fully operable and acceptable systems.

B. Extra charges will not be allowed for work that must be provided when it was apparent from a pre-bid inspection of the premises, even though the work is not shown on the drawings or called for in the Specification.

1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS AND SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections “Closeout Procedures”, “Operation and Maintenance Data”, “Project Record Documentation” and “Demonstration and Training”.

1.6 SHOP DRAWING AND MATERIAL LIST

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections “Submitall Procedures”.

1.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections “Operation and Maintenance Data”.

1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Receive, store and handle materials in a manner to prevent damage. Costs of damage shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Protect equipment from weather (rain, sunshine, winds), water vapors, theft, and vehicular traffic.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL APPROVAL

A. The design, manufacture and testing of electrical equipment and materials shall conform to or exceed latest applicable NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and U.L. Standards.

B. Materials shall be new and bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) label or other accepted testing laboratory certification. Materials that are not labeled by U.L. shall be tested and approved by an independent testing laboratory or a governmental agency acceptable to the Engineer, Owner and code enforcing authority.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installation of parts and connection of parts into systems shall be completed by skilled electrical journeymen. Material assemblies and installation work shall be securely fastened to structure, attractive in appearance and safe to operate. Provide code required clearance about electrical equipment. Assembly work or installations that are

535


improper, unsafe or unattractive shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory work at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Provide a foreman or superintendent in charge of this work at all times.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid conflict and to provide correct rough-in and connection for equipment furnished by other trades. Inform other trades Subcontractors of the required access to, and clearances around, electrical equipment to maintain serviceability and code compliance.

B. Verify equipment dimensions and requirements. Check actual job conditions before installing work. Report necessary changes in design to Construction Manager in time to prevent needless work. Changes, or additions subject to additional compensation, which are made without written authorization and an agreed price, shall be at Contractor's risk and expense.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Where the specifications call for an installation to be made in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations, a copy of such recommendations shall at all times be kept in the job superintendent's office and shall be available to the Owner's representative.

B. Follow manufacturer's instructions where they cover points not specifically indicated on drawings and specifications. If instructions are in conflict with the drawings and specifications, obtain clarification from the Engineer before starting work.


A. Provide a Quality Assurance program. These specifications set forth the minimum acceptable requirements. The specifications do not prohibit the Contractor from executing other Quality Assurance measures which can improve the operating facility, improve the construction schedule, and conserve energy within the scope of this project.

B. The Contractor shall insure that workmen's practices, materials employed, equipment and methods of installation conform to accepted construction and engineering practices, and that each piece of equipment can satisfactorily perform its functional operation.

3.5 CLOSING IN UNINSPECTED WORK

A. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested and/or approved. Field observations made by the architect or engineer do not waive the inspections required by the contract documents.

536


B. Should a portion of the work be enclosed or covered up prior to inspection and testing, the contractor shall uncover the work at his own expense, and after it has been tested, inspected and approved, make repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore the uncovered work to its intended condition.

3.6 PRELIMINARY OPERATION

A. Should the Owner request that a portion of the plant, apparatus or equipment be operated prior to final completion and acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall consent, and such operation shall be under the supervision and direction of the Contractor, but expense thereof shall be paid by the Owner, separate and distinct from money paid on account of the Contract. Such preliminary operation and payment thereof shall not be construed as an acceptance of that portion of the work in this Contract.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATION

A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Demonstration and Training”.

B. The system demonstrations shall be made by this Contractor in the presence of the District's facilities manager or his designated representative and the manufacturer's representative.

C. Demonstrate the function (in the structure) of each system and indicate its relationship to the single line diagrams and drawings.

D. Demonstrate by "start-stop operation", the controls, how to reset protective devices, how to replace fuses and what to do in case of emergency.

E. Demonstrate how maintenance and spare parts manuals are related to the equipment and systems installed.

3.8 TESTS

A. Where the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances or any public authority requires any work to be tested specifically or reviewed by another authority, the Contractor shall give the Engineer/Owner timely notice of readiness therefor. The Contractor shall give the Engineer/Owner the test results for review. If any work to be tested is covered up without written approval or consent of the Architect, it must, if directed by the Architect, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense.

B. The cost of all such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

C. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any test or any work which does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective and may be rejected. Rejected work shall be corrected promptly by the Contractor or removed from the site.

D. Provide written test reports for each test to the Engineer for review.

END OF SECTION

537


SECTION 260100 -DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide labor, materials, appliances, tools and equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with removal of all the existing electrical systems, complete as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.

B. General Summary of Work:

1. The work includes the furnishing of all labor, material and equipment required for the demolition and removal of electrical systems, devices and other components as indicated on Drawings and as otherwise required to provide work.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Wall Demolition.

B. Ceiling / Roof Demolition.

C. Mechanical Demolition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposed demolition and removal procedures to the Construction Manger for approval prior to commencement of work. Procedures shall provide for careful removal and distribution of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a detailed description of methods and special equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of respective operations.

1.4 DUST CONTROL

A. Take appropriate action to contain the spread of dust and to avoid the creation of a nuisance in surrounding areas. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as flooding, or pollution. Comply with all dust regulations imposed by local air pollution agencies.

1.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect existing work that is to remain in place, that is to be reused, or that is to remain the property of the Owner by temporary covers, shoring, bracing, and supports. Items that are to remain which are damaged during performance of the work shall be repaired to their original condition or replaced with new. Do not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened or otherwise compromised by demolition or removal work.

538


B. Protect all electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities.

1.6 EXPLOSIVES

A. Use of explosives will not be permitted.

1.7 BURNING

A. Burning will not be permitted.

1.8 SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. Owner reserves the right to let other contracts relating to but not included as part of the work. Contractor shall afford such other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials on the premises and execution of their work and shall promptly connect and coordinate Contractor’s work with their work.

1.9 FIRE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Contractor and each of Contractor’s sub-contractors shall at all times comply with the fire prevention measures listed below as well as with any other measures reasonably called for to ensure that adequate fire safety is maintained.

B. The use of open torches shall not be permitted without prior approval of the Construction Manager.

1.10 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment used on work shall comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations and shall be in such quantities as to prosecute the work properly and expeditiously. Hoists, mixers, temporary shops, etc., shall be maintained outside of the structure on the premises unless otherwise permitted by the Construction Manager.

1.11 SAFETY AND PROTECTION

A. Responsible for Safety: Contractor shall, throughout the prosecution of the work, be responsible for the safety and protection of the work, workmen of Contractor and sub-contractors, and any other persons and public or private property, all as required by law and as herein provided. Contractor, sub-contractors and their employees shall be subject to reasonable rules and regulations promulgated at any time by the Owner for the safe, orderly and efficient conduct of all operations upon the premises and upon any other Owner’s property. Contractor shall enforce compliance with such rules and regulations.

B. Protection of Property: Contractor shall properly barricade the work and erect and maintain in good condition and remove at the completion of the work, all temporary partitions, fences, shelters, barricades and other structures required by code, law, ordinance, rule or regulation or necessary or useful to ensure the protection of the work in progress

539


and the property of the Owner.

1.12 WORKERS

A. All workers shall be satisfactorily experienced in their particular field of expertise with respect to both nature and quality of work.

1. PRODUCTS (Not Used)

2. EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED

A. Structures, Walls, and Partitions: Existing interior walls and partitions are to be removed. The removal of all electrical equipment installed on and/or in those walls shall be coordinated with the Contractor removing the walls or partitions. All power, lighting and low voltage system shall be turned off to the feeders and/or branch circuits in the demolition area prior to the start of any demolition work. Coordinate with Construction Manager for removal of data/telephone equipment prior to removal of cables.

B. Branch Circuits: In all areas being demolished, remove all branch circuit conduit and conductors from the outlets to the source of power. Branch circuit conduits that have been installed underground shall have all conductors removed and the conduit removed to the first coupling above the finished floor. The empty conduit(s) shall be plugged and abandoned in place.

3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL

A. Title to Materials:

1 Except where indicated otherwise or specified otherwise in other Sections, all materials and equipment removed, and not turned over to the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the property. Title to all materials resulting from demolition, and all materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Owner of the Contractor’s demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the Owner to begin demolition.

2 The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after notice to proceed. Any such materials are conveyed to the Contractor as is, without any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, including but not limited to any warranty or merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, or any purpose. Materials and equipment shall not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site.

SECTION 260100 -DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL B. Salvage Value of Material: Credit for the salvage value of material shall be allowed by the

Contractor in the bid preparation.

3.3 CLEAN-UP

A. Debris and Rubbish: Remove and transport debris and rubbish in a manner that will prevent 540


spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Clean-up spillage from streets and adjacent areas.

B. Reuse of Materials and Equipment: Carefully remove and store all transformers and panelboards as directed by the Construction Manager. These items are to remain the property of the Owner and will be reused; care shall be taken to prevent damage to the finishes of the equipment. All covers shall be properly assembled on all salvaged items.

C. Regulations: Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations.

D. Debris Disposal: The Contractor shall dispose of all non-hazardous waste in a legally approved sanitary landfill. All associated dump permits shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and included in the original bid.

3.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Other than the fluorescent lamps outlined in Paragraph 3.1.E.2, all equipment and material to be removed under this Section do not contain any known hazardous materials. In the unlikely event that hazardous materials are encountered notify the Construction Manager immediately.

END SECTION

541


SECTION 260500 -BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1 Supporting devices for electrical components.

2 Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

3 Touchup painting.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1 Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2 Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

542


2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs.

1 Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.

2 Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

F. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

G. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

2.2 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

543


E. Coordination: Coordinate with work of other trades, especially other utilities routes and clearances required to properly provide work.

3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials, U-channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four (4); minimum of 200-lb design load.

3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze or bracket-type hangers.

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations, so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

F. Install 1/4-inch diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.

544


J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceways with an approved fastener not more than 24-inches from the box.

K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units.

3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.

4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items.

7. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.

8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test load.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections “Cutting and Patching” and “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems”.

B. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

545


C. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new firepstopping where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1 Supporting devices for electrical components.

2 Electrical demolition.

3 Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

4 Touchup painting.

3.8 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touchup paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

1 Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.

2 Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.

3 Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace with new items damaged beyond repair or refinishing.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations, and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

546


SECTION 26 05 23 -CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

1 American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2 General Cable Corporation. 3 Okonite Wire & Cable Company. 4 Southwire Company.

547


B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

548



C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5; stranded conductor.

D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete and Below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHNTHWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Fire Alarm Circuits: Refer to Section 28 31 00 – Fire Alarm Sysrtem.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All conductors and cables shall be installed in raceways.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

549


C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Seal around conduits penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.”

E. Open cable installed above accessible ceiling space shall be supported by metallic J-hooks. No stapling is allowed. Staples used shall be removed and cable conductivity shall be tested by contractor at contractor’s cost.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

B. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.


A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

1 After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2 Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1 Test procedures used. 2 Test results that comply with requirements. 3 Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

550


1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1 Ground rods and ground rod well. 2 Fittings.

B. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:

1 Test procedures used. 2 Test results that comply with requirements. 3 Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply

with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1. Comply with UL 467.

2.0 PRODUCTS

551


2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Chance/Hubbell. c. Copperweld Corp. d. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. e. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. f. Galvan Industries, Inc. g. Ideal Industries, Inc. h. ILSCO. i. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. j. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. k. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. l. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. m. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. n. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

C. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

G. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

552


1 Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

2 Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3 Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

H. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.

2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.

1. Size: 5/8 inch in diameter and 96 inches in length.

B. Test Wells: Provide handholes "Christy" G5 or equal, with cast iron traffic lid and hold down screws.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells.

D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts.

F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

553


3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.

C. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

E. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.

F. Water Heater and Heat-Tracing Cable: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

G. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

壱 Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.

壱 Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 壱 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.

1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

554


2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.

F. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor.

G. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor to the main ground bus in the electrical room.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1 Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2 Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3 Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent

future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

555



B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted-and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.

F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.

3.5 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING

A. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

B. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum,

556


stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.


A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. c. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. 4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect and Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

557


SECTION 26 05 33 -RACEWAYS AND BOXES

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.


1 Divisions 26, 27 and 28 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods", “Security System”, “Fire Alarm System”, “Paging and Clock System”, “Data / Telephone System” and “Television System” for supports, anchors, and identification products.

2 Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings.

3 Division 23 Section “Automatic Temperature Controls” for supports, anchors, and identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For conduit, fittings, surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

558



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with existing conditions and work of other trades.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Available Manufacturers:

1 AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2 Alflex Inc.

3 Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

4 Electri-Flex Co.

5 Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.

LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.

6 Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

7 O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

559


D. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

1. Fittings: Compression type.

E. FMC: Aluminum.

F. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. American International.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

3. Arnco Corp.

4. Cantex Inc.

5. Carlon.

6. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.

7. Condux International.

8. ElecSYS, Inc.

9. Electri-Flex Co.

10. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

11. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

12. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.

13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.

C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Hoffman.

2. Square D.

560


B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard bright white color.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

b. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

B. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.

4. Hoffman.

5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.

6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.

7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.

9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

561


12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. Walker Omni box, RFB 4 or equal as indicated.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

G. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.


A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors:

1 Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC.

2 Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC.

3 Underground, Single Run: RNC.

4 Underground, Grouped: RNC.

5 Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

6 Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

562


B. Indoors:

1 Exposed: EMT.

2 Concealed: EMT.

3 Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

4 Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.

5 Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

563


1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover.

1 Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.

2 Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.

3 Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

4 Change from rigid nonmetallic conduit to rigid steel conduit or IMC before rising above the floor.

I. Raceways below Slabs: Install in base rock below slab where practical and leave at least 2 inches of base rock cover.

J. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.

1 Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.

2 Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

K. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

L. Terminations:

1 Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.

2 Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

564


M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 18 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

N. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2 Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.

O. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

Q. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

R. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1 Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2 Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace with new any item damaged beyond repair or refinishing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION

565


SECTION 26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

1.0 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to complywith ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Schedule of Nomenclature: An index of electrical equipment and system componentsused in identification signs and labels.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and forminimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

1. Color: Black letters on orange field.

2. Legend: Indicates voltage and service.

B. Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl with legend overlaminatedwith a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.

C. Pretensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylicband sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place bypretensioned gripping action when placed in position.

D. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2inches wide.

E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed,vinyl tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.

3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.566


F. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprintednumbers and letters.

G. Brass or Aluminum Tags: 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch metal tags with stamped legend,punched for fastener.

2.2 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.

B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate,minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

C. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilledfor fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inchgrommets in corners for mounting.

D. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted,cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and withcolors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners formounting.

E. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32,stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nyloncable ties.

1 Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb minimum.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: According to color-coding.

B. Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use.

1. Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated forgalvanized surfaces.

2. Primer for Concrete Masonry Units: Heavy-duty-resin block filler.

3. Primer for Concrete: Clear, alkali-resistant, binder-type sealer.

567


4. Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primermanufacturer.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewingwithout interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and otherdesignations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with thoserequired by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, installidentification after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

E. Install painted identification according to manufacturer's written instructions and asfollows:

1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting.

2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface.

3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.

F. Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Installpressure-sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters onorange background. Install on exterior of door or cover.

G. Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exteriorunderground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuousunderground plastic line marker located directly above line at 12 inches below finishedgrade. Where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench does not exceed 16inches overall, use a single line marker.

H. Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for phaseconductors:

1. 208/120-V Conductors:a. Phase A: Black.b. Phase B: Red.c. Phase C: Blue.d. Neutral: Whitee. Ground: Green.

568


2. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following fieldapplied,color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire forsizes larger than No. 10 AWG.

a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distanceof 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps aremade. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possibleunwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bandsto avoid obscuring cable identification markings.

b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to eachwire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminaland spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to asnug fit, and cut off excess length.

I. Power-Circuit Identification: Metal tags or aluminum, wraparound marker bands forcables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, andswitchboard rooms.

1. Legend: 1/4 inch steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legendcorresponding to indicated circuit designations.

2. Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties.

3. Band Fasteners: Integral ears.

J. Apply identification to conductors as follows:

1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers.

2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify eachconductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding toidentify circuits' voltage and phase.

3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identifyeach conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent systemof tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape.

K. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation andmaintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Installengraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend whereinstructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backedbutyrate signs for outdoor items.

569


L. Device Identification Labels: Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, selfadhesivevinyl with legend overlaminated with a clear, weather- and chemicalresistantcoating. Install on each device cover of power receptacles, switchesand tele/data outlets with feeder source (i.e. panelboard, MDF, IDF) and circuitnumber information.

M. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit ofequipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power,lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with theirown self-explanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high lettering on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text arerequired, use labels 2 inches high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels foreach unit of the following categories of equipment using mechanical fasteners:

1. Branch feeder breakers at switchboard and distribution panel.

2. Disconnect switches.

3. Enclosed circuit breakers.

4. Motor starters.

END OF SECTION

570


SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified.

B. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manualsspecified in Division 1.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with NEMA WD 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:

571


1. Wiring Devices:a. Bryant Electric, Inc.

b. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices.

c. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.

d. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.

f. Pyle-National, Inc.; an Amphenol Co.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: General-Duty grade.

B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without an adapter.

C. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Equipment grounding contacts connected only to thegreen grounding screw terminal of the device with inherent electrical isolation frommounting strap.

1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles.

2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent onremovable parts.

2.3 SWITCHES

A. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type.

B. Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plasterears and removable tab connector that permit separate or common feed connection.

1. Switch: 20 A, 120/277-V ac.

2. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.

C. Key Switches: double prong type for restrooms.

2.4 WALL PLATES

572


A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Unfinished Spaces: 0.04 inch thick, Type 302, satin-finishedstainless steel.

3. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth plastic.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Color: White, unless otherwise indicated.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.

B. Install wall plates when painting is complete.

C. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging as instructedby manufacturer.

D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.

E. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with longdimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacentswitches under single, multigang wall plates.

F. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.

G. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets are installed to suit arrangement ofpartitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere asindicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.

2. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Usemachine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of

573


plate and durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment groundingconductor.

B. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Connect to isolated-ground conductor routed todesignated isolated equipment ground terminal of electrical system.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers publishedtorque-tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use thosespecified in UL 486A.


A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device atleast six times.

B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according tomanufacturer's written instructions.

C. Replace damaged or defective components.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained orimproperly painted wall plates or devices.

END OF SECTION

574


SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUITBREAKERS

1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for the following:

1. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. RMS: Root mean square.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and componentindicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components toinclude in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirementsspecified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuitbreakers.

3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuitbreaker.

575



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of theInterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by theInterNational Electrical Testing Association or National Institute forCertification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specifiedin Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components withother construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment accessdoors and panels.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:

1. Fusible Switches:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.

b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.

c. Square D Co.

2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:


576



c. Square D Co.

3. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground-Fault Trip:



c. Square D Co.

4. Molded-Case, Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers:



c. Square D Co.

5. Integrally Fused, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:



c. Square D Co.

2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.

B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips toaccommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked withcover in closed position.

2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-leveloverloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A andlarger.

577


2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element withfront-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable ratingplug; with the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-throughratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integrallimiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuseopening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5mA tripsensitivity.

7. Molded-Case Switch: Molded-case circuit breaker without trip units.

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, tripratings, and number of poles.

1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material ofconductors.

2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switchingfluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, andrefrigerating equipment.

3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustablepickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75percent of rated voltage.

5. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contactsmimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b"contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breakercontacts.

578


6. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation;key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

7. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlockingground-fault protection function.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.


A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers forcompliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and bracketsand temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; providewarning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification".

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plasticnameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

579


A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with groundcontinuity to main electrical ground bus.

B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and controland indication devices.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's publishedtorque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use thosespecified in UL 486A.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component,and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specifiedtesting.

C. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electricalcircuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance withrequirements.

1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical testindicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for moldedcasecircuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstratecompliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paintsplatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist incleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

580


END OF SECTION

581


SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Removal of planter and sidewalk for installation of new mechanical rooms



B. Section 310513, Soils for Earthwork

C. Section 312213, Rough Grading

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Secure a permit from the Bay Area Air Quality Management District. District Regulations 11-2-401.3 requires that for every renovation involving the removal of 100 sq ft/in ft or greater of Regulated Asbestos Containing Material, and for every demolition (even when no asbestos is present) a notification must be made to the BAAQMD at least 10 working days (except in special circumstances) prior to commencement of demolition / renovation.

2.0 PRODUCTS

Not applicable to this Section.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified.

B. Removed materials are to be removed from the site and disposed of in a lawful manner.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities from damage that are to remain.

B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain.

582


C. Protect benchmarks, survey control points, and existing structures from damage or displacement.

3.3 CLEARING

A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of work.

B. Remove trees and shrubs indicated and in a manner specified on the Drawings or in the Contract Documents.

3.4 REMOVAL

A. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site to the limits indicated on the Drawings.

B. Remove paving, curbs, and concrete from the site to the limits indicated on the Drawings.

C. Neatly saw cut edges at limits indicated for all pavement, curbs, walkways to be removed.

D. Excavate and remove any underground storage tanks and associated plumbing piping, as indicated on the Drawings.

3.5 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded, without mixing with foreign materials for use in finish grading.

B. Stockpile on site and protect from erosion.

C. Remove excess topsoil not intended for reuse, from site.

END OF SECTION

583


SECTION 321123 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install aggregate base course as shown on project Drawings.



A. Section 321313 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASTM D1557 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Class II Aggregate Base per Caltrans Standard Specifications, or Local Municipality.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Comply with Section 013113, Project Coordination.

B. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and that it is dry.

584


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-compacting.

B. Do not place fill on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.

3.3 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT

A. Place aggregate in maximum 6-inch layers and compact to specified density.

B. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated.

C. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction.

D. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.

E. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10-foot straight edge.

B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

C. Variation From Design Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.


A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 of these Contract Documents for quality requirements and testing and inspection services.

B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to the County.

END OF SECTION

585


SECTION 321313 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

1.0 GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY


B. Provide and install concrete sidewalks, integral curbs, gutters, parking areas, driveways, and roads; and aggregate base course.




C. Section 321123, Aggregate Base Course

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ACI 304 (American Concrete Institute) - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.

B. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

D. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.

E. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.

F. ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete.

G. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement

H. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.I. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

J. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

K. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

L. ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for 586


Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.


A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Local Municipality.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

C. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.


A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees, or surface is wet or frozen.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Wood or Steel form material, profiled to suit conditions.

B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; deformed billet steel bars; unfinished.

B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A185 in flat sheets or coiled rolls; unfinished.

C. Dowels: ASTM A615; plain steel, unfinished.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 033000, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Provide in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

2.4 CONCRETE MIX - BY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Provide concrete to the following criteria:

1. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi @ 28 days.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify compacted subgrade or granular base is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

587


3.2 SUBBASE

A. Section 321123, Aggregate Base Course forms the base construction for Work of this section.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

B. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.

C. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

3.4 FORMING

A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.

B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place reinforcement as indicated on Drawings.

B. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints.

C. Place reinforcement to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.

3.6 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints and are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints.

D. Place concrete to pattern indicated on Drawings.

3.7 JOINTS

A. Place expansion and contraction joints as shown on Drawings. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.

B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant placement.

588


C. Provide scored sawn joints as indicated on Drawings and between sidewalks and curbs.

3.8 FINISHING

A. Sidewalk Paving: Medium (non-slip) broom and trowel joint edges as indicated on Architectural Drawings.

B. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom.

C. Direction of Texturing: Transverse to pavement direction.

D. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Heavy broom perpendicular to slope.

E. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.

3.9 JOINT SEALING

A. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with thick joint filler.

B. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

C. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/8 inch of finished surface. Conform to joint sealer manufacturer requirements.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/2 inch.


A. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump [and air entrainment] tests in accordance with ACI 301.

B. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.

C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement for 7days minimum after finishing.

589


END OF SECTION

590

legacy.sccoe.org H… · Web viewsanta clara county office of education. hvac and roofing for...

Documents

Transcript of legacy.sccoe.org H… · Web viewsanta clara county office of education. hvac and roofing for...